JP2022011272A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute multiple types of predetermined performances that are expected to execute a notification performance that can execute a special game. The ratio at which a predetermined performance is executed differs depending on cases where a first start condition is satisfied and the notification performance is executed in a probability variation/time-saving game state and where a second start condition is satisfied and the notification performance is executed in a specific time-saving game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a starting port and a large winning opening are provided in a game area where a gaming ball can flow down, and a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a special symbol display when the gaming ball wins a prize at the starting opening, and a big hit. When the jackpot symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. When the special symbol is variablely displayed, the game effect is performed by the lighting / blinking operation of the effect image displayed on the image display device, the sound output from the speaker, and the light emitting body such as the lamp.

For example, in Patent Document 1, there are cases where the symbol is changed when the game ball is won in the first starting port, and cases where the symbol is changed when the game ball is won in the second starting opening. It is stated that there is.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-155132

However, in a gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in the production of the game in terms of improving the interest of the game.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention has the following configurations. The reference numerals indicate an example of the correspondence with the components shown in the drawings in order to promote understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
The gaming machine of the present invention plays a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the gaming ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening). In the playable gaming machine, the gaming state is defined as a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, shortened time) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (normal) after the special game is executed. , The first game state (normal) can be controlled to a third game state (play time) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) without executing the special game. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of producing the possibility that the special game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition by using a plurality of types of notification effects (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern). , Multiple types of predetermined effects (the fanning effect, button vibration, accessory operation (operation / light emission), effect change effect) that are expected to execute the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) that can execute the special game. , Background change, pattern production at the start of fluctuation, story progress production, step-up, dialogue notice, mode change, light guide plate emission, roulette production, decision production, design alignment production, symbol enlargement production after design alignment, look-ahead production, etc.) It is feasible, and the first start condition is satisfied in the second game state (probability change, time reduction) and the notification effect is executed, and the second start condition is executed in the third game state (play time). Is satisfied and the notification effect is executed, and the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed is different.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the normal state, the protruding state, and the pressed state of an effect button. It is an enlarged front view of the game information display device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an image control unit. It is a figure which shows (1) the jackpot determination table for the 1st special symbol, and (2) the jackpot determination table for the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows (1) special symbol determination table for big hit, (2) special symbol determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening opening / closing control table. It is a figure which shows the game state setting data table. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state. It is a figure which shows (1) the pre-determination table for a non-time saving game state, and (2) the pre-determination table for a time-saving game state. (1) A hit determination table for a normal symbol, (2) a stop symbol determination table for a normal symbol, (3) a variation pattern determination table for a normal symbol, and (4) an opening mode determination table for a second start port are shown. It is a figure. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the input control process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the 1st start port detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the 2nd start port detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a gate detection switch input process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special figure special electric control processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of a special symbol memory determination process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special symbol stop processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of a jackpot game process by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the special game end processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of the general electric control process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of ordinary symbol variation processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart of auxiliary game processing by a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a flowchart of the main processing by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process by an effect control unit. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process by an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the effect mode setting table. It is a flowchart of the continuous notice effect determination process by the effect control unit 130m. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect type determination table for a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect type determination table for the probability change / time saving mode. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice scenario determination table for a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice scenario determination table for a probability change / time saving mode. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect pattern determination process. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table for a probable change / time saving mode. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice effect decision process. It is a figure which shows the advance notice decision table before reach. It is a figure which shows the dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the step-up notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the development production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the determination effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the information table for a decision success production. It is a figure which shows the execution start timing and the end timing of a decision success effect. It is a figure which shows the vibration effect information table for jackpot symbol matching. It is a figure which shows the re-lottery effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the number of executions of a button vibration after the decision success production is started. It is a figure which shows the final production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the revival effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the continuous notice effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the continuous notice effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the button vibration advance notice effect and the line advance notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the production example when the development production is executed and develops into SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the production example when the development production is executed and develops into SPSP reach production. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production example which continued in FIG. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the decision effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect (battle effect). It is a figure which shows the effect example when the decision effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect (mission effect). It is a figure which shows the production example when the promotion is successful in the re-lottery production. It is a figure which shows the production example which continued with FIG. 68, FIG. 69, and FIG. 70. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the resurrection effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 when the setting is changed from a normal mode to a time saving mode. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 when the setting is changed from a normal mode to a time saving mode. It is a figure which shows the production example of the jackpot fluctuation effect based on the 1st start opening winning in the probability change mode. It is a figure which shows the production example which continued in FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows the production example when the operation means is operated while waiting for a customer. It is a figure which shows the various vibration effects performed in a specific effect. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect type determination table for the probability change mode which concerns on a change form. It is a rear view which shows the state which each unit is assembled to the base frame body. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of FIG. 80. It is a figure explaining the main board protection case which concerns on an example of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the main board protection case including a pedestal. It is a side view which shows the mode when the main board protection case is attached to a pedestal. It is a figure explaining the main board protection case which concerns on other example of this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the main board protection case of FIG. It is a figure explaining the state which removed the main board protection case of FIG. 85 from a pedestal. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the identification display on the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the identification display on the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main board case. It is the figure which looked at the seal part and the main ROM from the rear diagonally above. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main control board. It is a figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main board case which accommodates the main control board shown in FIGS. 95 and 96. It is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal of the main board case. It is a schematic diagram which shows the procedure of assembling the cutting member, the opening prohibition seal, and the cap to the sealing base part centering on the protruding piece of the upper case piece. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state just before assembling a cutting member, an opening prohibition seal, and a cap with respect to a sealing base part. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the opening prohibition seal is adhered to the sealing base part. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the cap is attached to the opening prohibition seal. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the cap is detached and the opening prohibition seal is broken. It is a surface view of an example of an opening prohibition seal, and a partially enlarged view. It is a figure which shows the component layout of the payout control board in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the payout control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout control board case. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of an image control board. It is a figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for the image control board. It is a figure which enlarged and showed a part of the printed wiring board used for the image control board. It is a front view explaining the structure of the effect control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect control board case. It is a figure for demonstrating another structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board explained with FIG. 115 is housed. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view including a pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 115. It is a figure explaining still another structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board explained with FIG. 118 is housed. It is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 119. It is a figure which shows the display transition of an image display device and a performance display part at the time of clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the display transition of the image display device, the performance display part, and the setting display part at the time of setting change when the gaming machine has a performance display part and a setting display part separately. It is a figure which shows the display transition of an image display device, a performance display part, and a setting display part at the time of setting change when a gaming machine has a performance display part and a setting display part separately. It is a figure which shows the display transition of the image display device and the performance display part at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine has a performance display part which also serves as a setting display part. It is a figure which shows the display transition of an image display device, a performance display part, and a setting display part at the time of setting confirmation when a gaming machine has a performance display part and a setting display part separately.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.
In the pachinko gaming machine as the gaming machine 1, an opening / closing frame 2B (game frame) is openably / closably attached to an outer frame 2A attached to the island structure of the game hall, and an opening / closing door 3 is openably / closably attached to the opening / closing frame 2B. ing. A window 3a is formed in the opening / closing door 3, and a transparent plate 3b is attached to the window 3a. The left end of the opening / closing door 3 is rotatably supported around the vertical axis center at the left end of the opening / closing frame 2B, and a key cylinder 3c for locking the opening / closing door 3 to the opening / closing frame 2B is attached to the right end of the opening / closing door 3. Has been done. A game board 4 is attached to the opening / closing frame 2B, a game area 4a through which a game ball can flow down is formed between the game board 4 and the transparent plate 3b on the front side thereof, and the game area 4a is opened / closed by the opening / closing door 3. ..

The opening / closing door 3 has an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker on the upper side of the window 3a, a frame lighting device 27 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a storage tray 5 (receiver) for storing game balls on the lower side of the window 3a. ) Is provided, and the storage tray 5 is provided with an effect button device 6A and a selection button device 6B that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects. Further, at the left end of the opening / closing door 3, an effect lever device 6C that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects is provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the opening / closing door 3 and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce music and sound effects. Further, the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 27 are provided on the peripheral portion of the window 3a, and the illumination is performed by changing the irradiation direction and the emission color of the light of each of the plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs). Performs light emission production. Further, the frame lighting device 27 is a notification LED controlled to light / blink when an opening / closing door 3 is opened or a payout abnormality in which the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 100 (see FIG. 4) occurs. It is equipped with.

The effect button device 6A includes an effect button 6a capable of performing a decision operation (operation input) and a button operation effect, an effect button detection switch 6b (see FIG. 4) for detecting a pressing operation on the effect button 6a, and the effect button device 6A. A button drive motor 6c (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6a into a normal state and a protruding state located above the normal state, and a vibration state in which the effect button 6a vibrates in a normal state and a predetermined mode. A button vibration motor 6d (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6d and a button light emitting LED 6e (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6a into a quenching state and a light emitting state for emitting light in a predetermined mode are provided. By operating the effect button 6a in a predetermined operation mode, the player can input predetermined information to the control unit (effect control unit 130 m) of the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 6a has a normal state (non-protruding state) (FIG. 2 (a)), which is a normal operation position, and a protruding state (FIG. 2 (b)), which protrudes to an operation position above the normal state. The state at the time of detecting the pressing operation can be changed to the pressing state (FIG. 2 (c)) in which the pressing operation is moved downward from the normal state.

The normal state is shown in FIG. 2A, in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the storage dish 5.
The protruding state is shown in FIG. 2 (b) at a position protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) upward from the surface around the storage dish 5.
The pressed state is shown in FIG. 2 (c) at a position slightly downwardly retracted from the surface around the storage dish 5.
The effect button device 6A has a structure in which the effect button 6a can be changed into a normal state, a protruding state, and a pressed state. When the effect button 6a in the normal state or the protruding state is pressed and enters the pressed state, the pressed operation is detected, and then when the pressed operation is released, the pressed state returns to the normal state. It should be noted that the effect button 6a directs the direction of movement between the position in the normal state (normal position), the position in the protruding state (protruding position), and the position in the pressed state (pressing position) in which the pressing operation is detected. The direction of advance / retreat of the button 6a is set.

As a predetermined operation mode of the effect button 6a, "single hit" for operating the effect button 6a once from the normal position or the protruding position to the pressed position, "long pressing" for continuing to operate the effect button 6a to the pressed position, and the effect button 6a. Is categorized as "continuous hitting" in which is continuously operated multiple times from the normal position to the pressed position. It should be noted that the effect button detection SW6b can detect any operation mode of "single hit", "long press", and "continuous hit". In the case of "long press", the duration of the long press operation is detected, and in the case of "continuous hit", the number of operations is detected.

The effect button 6a has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and when the button light emitting LED 6e emits light in a predetermined color (white, blue, red, rainbow, etc.), the light of the predetermined color is emitted to the outside of the effect button 6a. The effect button 6a is illuminated (light-emitting) by being transmitted.

The effect button 6a can vibrate in a predetermined effect mode (vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration pattern, etc.) by the driving force of the button vibration motor 6d. The effect button 6a can be operated even when the effect button 6a is vibrating.
When it is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 6a is vibrating, the player can confirm whether or not the effect button 6a is vibrating by touching the effect button 6a. ..

The selection button device 6B is a cross key button 6f (hereinafter referred to as a cross key 6f) (upper key button) as a selection button capable of performing an operation for selecting and operating an effect element (mode, music, volume, light amount, etc.). , Down key button, right key button, left key button) and a cross key detection switch 6g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 6f, and the player operates the cross key 6f. Predetermined information can be input to the control unit (effect control unit 130 m) of the game machine 1.

The effect lever device 6C defines the effect lever 6h capable of performing a determination operation (operation input) and the lever operation effect, the effect lever detection switch 6i for detecting the operation of the effect lever 6h, and the effect lever 6h as a normal state. A vibration motor 6j for changing to a vibrating state that vibrates in a mode, a lever light emitting LED 6k for changing a production lever 6h into a dimming state and a light emitting state that emits light in a predetermined mode, and a production lever 6h in a normal state and a normal state. A lever drive motor (not shown) is provided to change the state to a protruding state located above the state.

The effect lever device 6C has a structure in which the effect lever 6h can be changed into a normal state, a protruding state, and a tilted state.
The effect lever 6h has an operation rod that can be instructed and operated in multiple directions (for example, four directions of front, back, left and right, and eight directions including diagonal) by the player grasping and tilting the lever 6h. A trigger button (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the operation culm (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator touches when the player grips the operation culm).

When the player grasps the operation culm with the operating hand and tilts it, and pushes and pulls the trigger button with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger), the effect lever detection switch 6i tilts the operating culm and pushes and pulls the trigger button. When the operation is detected, predetermined information can be input to the control unit (effect control unit 130 m) of the gaming machine 1.
A vibration motor 6j is built in the operation culm of the effect lever 6h, and there are cases where the operation culm vibrates when it is tilted and cases where it vibrates without tilting.

The effect lever 6h can be changed between a normal state (non-protruding state: FIG. 1), which is a normal operating position, and a protruding state, which protrudes upward from the normal state, by the driving force of the lever drive motor.

A firing handle 7 is attached to the lower right side of the storage plate 5. When the firing handle 7 is rotated, the game balls introduced at the firing position are fired from the storage plate 5, and when a plurality of game balls are stored in the storage plate 5, the plurality of game balls are approximately 0. It is fired continuously at 6 second intervals. The launched game ball is guided by the guide rail 8 and introduced into the upper part of the game area 4a. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the launch stop button (not shown) provided on the launch handle 7. A vibration motor that vibrates the launch handle 7 may be provided inside the launch handle 7 to vibrate the launch handle 7.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 4a, in addition to a large number of obstacle nails K, a first starting port 10, a starting port device 11 having an opening / closing second starting port 11a, a gate 12, and an opening / closing type big prize A large winning opening device 13 having a opening 13a and a plurality of general winning openings 14 are provided in the arrangement shown in the figure so that a game ball can be entered (winning), respectively. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting port 10, the gate 12, and the plurality of general winning openings 14 have a first starting port detection switch 10a, a gate detection switch 12a, and a plurality of, respectively, for detecting a game ball that has entered. A general winning opening detection switch 14a is attached. In the embodiment, the terms "winning" and "winning" include "passing".

The start port device 11 opens and closes the second start port 11a, the opening / closing member 11b for opening / closing the second starting port 11a, the second starting port detection switch 11c for detecting the game ball winning in the second starting port 11a, and the opening / closing member 11b. The second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d for driving is provided, and the second starting port 11a can operate in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win.

A winning port lamp NR (FIG. 4) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 10 and the second starting port 11a to emit light in a predetermined manner is provided between the first starting port 10 and the second starting port 11a. It is possible to produce light emission by emitting light from the winning opening lamp NR.

The large winning opening device 13 is a large winning opening 13a, an opening / closing member 13b for opening / closing the large winning opening 13a, a large winning opening detection switch 13c for detecting a game ball winning in the large winning opening 13a, and a large opening / closing member 13b. The winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is provided, and the large winning opening 13a can operate in a closed state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the launch handle 7 to launch the game ball into the game area 4a, the game ball is launched by the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the launch handle 7. By adjusting the strength, it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "right-handed". In "left-handed", the game ball falls on the left game area 4a1 located on the left side of the center accessory 15, and in "right-handed", the game ball passes through the right-handed passage formed on the upper side of the center accessory 15. It moves to the right side gaming area 4a2 side located on the right side of the center accessory 15, and falls toward the downstream direction of the right side gaming area 4a2.

When a game ball launched into the game area 4a wins in any of a plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14, the winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 for each winning opening of the game ball. A set number of game balls (several to ten or more) were paid out to the storage plate 5 as prize balls, and none of the plurality of winning openings 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 was awarded. In this case, it is finally discharged to the outside of the game area 4a from the discharge port 28 formed in the most downstream portion of the game area 4a.

When a game ball fired in the game area 4a wins in the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a, a big hit lottery (special game determination) is performed, and when the big hit lottery is won, the big winning opening 13a opens. A game (special game) occurs. When the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery is performed, and when the winning lottery is won, an auxiliary game is generated in which the second starting port 11a is opened in a predetermined mode (opening time, opening / closing number of times).

A center accessory 15 is attached to the substantially center of the game board 4. The center accessory 15 is provided with a frame body (decorative frame body) 15a that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside, and the frame body 15a is fitted and mounted in an opening (not shown) formed in the game board 4. A warp device 15b capable of introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 4a into the frame body 15a is provided on the left side portion of the frame body 15a. A center stage 15c on which the game ball can roll is provided at the lower part of the frame body 15a, and the game ball introduced inside the frame body 15a by the warp device 15b passes through the warp passage of the warp device 15b to the center stage 15c. It rolls at and flows down below the frame body 15a.

A first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided on the central inner portion side of the effect space 15A defined inside the frame body 15a of the center accessory 15. On the upper side of the effect space 15A, there is a second image display device 18 (sub liquid crystal) consisting of a first movable effect member 17A imitating a "sword" and a liquid crystal display in a shape imitating the "signboard" of the title of the gaming machine 1. A second movable effect member 17B is provided. The second movable effect member 17B is arranged in front of the first movable effect member 17A. Further, on the right end side of the effect space 15A, a third movable effect member 17C imitating a "sword" having a size larger than the "sword" of the first movable effect member 17A is provided.

The first movable effect member 17A is composed of a sheath portion imitating a sheath and a blade portion housed in the sheath portion, and the blade portion is driven by a board drive device 17 (stepping motor) in the left-right direction. It is possible to move, and from the state where the blade part is housed in the sheath part, the blade part can be moved to the left and the effect operation of pulling out the blade part from the sheath part can be performed.

The second movable effect member 17B can be moved in the vertical direction by being driven by the panel drive device 17 (stepping motor), and moves downward from the upper side of the effect space 15A to move downward from the image display device 16. It is possible to perform the effect operation that appears on the front side of the screen.

The third movable effect member 17C is composed of a sheath portion imitating a sheath and a blade portion housed in the sheath portion, and the blade portion is driven by a board drive device 17 (stepping motor) in the vertical direction. It is possible to move, and from the state where the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion, the blade portion can be moved up and down to perform an effect operation in which the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion. In FIG. 1, the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion.

Further, the third movable effect member 17C is driven by a panel drive device 17 (stepping motor), and the blade portion can be tilted with the lower portion of the third movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum, and the blade portion can be tilted from the sheath portion 17. From the pulled-out state, it is possible to perform an effect operation such as tilting toward the front side of the screen center area of the image display device 16 and slashing the opponent with a sword.

Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C are each provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units), and a predetermined mode is provided during standby or during the execution of the effect operation. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect such as the blade and logo.

Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C each have predetermined modes (vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration) depending on the driving force of the accessory vibration motor of the panel drive device 17. It is possible to vibrate with a pattern etc.). The first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C can each execute the effect operation while vibrating. Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C can each vibrate in the standby position without performing the effect operation, and vibrate in the effect position moved from the standby position. It is possible.

The first image display device 16 performs various effect displays according to the progress (development) of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting effect performed while the special symbol variation display is not executed on the special symbol display described later, the variation effect and the jackpot game that perform the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display. There is a big hit production etc. performed during the execution of.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, a variable display area (left side area, center area, right side area) for displaying three effect symbols 16a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and the progress of the variable effect A mode display area or the like indicating the effect mode is formed.

The effect symbol 16a includes an identification unit consisting of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "1" to "9", and a character image attached to the periphery (neighborhood) of the identification unit (nearby). For example, there is an effect symbol composed of a decorative portion composed of predetermined decorative information (accompanying information) such as an animal character such as a cat or a dog) or a decorative frame image, and an effect symbol composed of only an identification portion.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 16a, the effect symbol 16a is configured to stop and display for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 16a such as "777", and the loss mode is another mode.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, and switching or rotation (rotation) on the spot, etc. May be.

Further, during the execution of the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, various effect images (moving images) such as a background image and a character are displayed according to the result of the big hit lottery, so that the big hit lottery can be performed. It is designed to increase the player's expectation of winning the result.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, the first hold icon display area 16b for displaying the number of first hold icons (for example, “◯”) corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1), the second For the second hold icon display area 16c for displaying the number of second hold icons (for example, "●") corresponding to the special figure hold number (U2), and for variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) being executed. The variation icon display area 16d or the like for displaying the corresponding variation icon (for example, “⊚”) is formed.

Further, on the screen of the first image display device 16, the first reserved number display area 16e for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the current second special symbol are displayed. The second hold number display area 16f for displaying the second hold number indicating the hold number (U2), the special symbol TZ which is variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol 16a are displayed. A special symbol display area for the purpose is formed.

The special symbol TZ is composed of only an identification unit consisting of code information of the numbers "1" to "9", and is displayed in a reduced size smaller than the effect symbol 16a. The variable display of the special symbol TZ in the special symbol display area has a certain display mode (numbers are switched in order) during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol 16a to the stop display. It is continuously displayed in the display mode), and is always displayed in a visually recognizable state without disappearing from the screen or being shielded by the effect operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C.
On the other hand, the variable display of the effect symbol 16a may become invisible from the screen as the effect progresses. The variable display of the special symbol corresponds to the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, and since it continues to be displayed in a visible state regardless of the progress of the effect, it also has a function as a variable display of the effect symbol.

Further, the display of the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 16e and 16f is not obscured by the effect operation of the movable effect member 17 or disappears from the screen as in the special symbol, and is always visually recognized. Displayed as possible.

The first hold icon display area 16b is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. On the fourth display unit, the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) is displayed.

The second hold icon display area 16c is partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d in the form of a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, and the first display unit. On the fourth display unit, the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) is displayed.

The second image display device 18 can be operated in a predetermined direction by being driven by the drive of the panel drive device 17. Specifically, between the standby position (first position) located near the upper end of the first image display device 16 and the effect position (second position) located near the center of the first image display device 16. By moving (up, down) in the vertical direction, the movement effect is performed. For example, the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 6a. The moving direction of the second image display device 18 may be left-right and front-back directions.

A first game information display device 19 for displaying game information regarding the progress of the game is provided on the lower left outside the game area 4a and outside the guide rail 8 on the outside of the game board 4.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the first game information display device 19 has a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in four inclined rows along the left end and the lower end of the outer guide rail 8 and the game board 4. have. These plurality of (32) LEDs (light emitting units) include a first special symbol first display 19a, a second special symbol first display 19b, a normal symbol first display 19c, and a first special symbol hold first display. Instrument 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed 1st display 19j, the status confirmation display 19k is configured.
As shown in FIG. 4, the first game information display device 19 is controlled by the main control board 110.

The first special symbol 1st display 19a is composed of 6 LEDs (light emitting units), and a big hit lottery for the 1st special symbol is performed on condition that a game ball wins (wins) in the 1st starting port 10. Then, in the first special symbol 1st display 19a, the variation display of the 1st special symbol in which 6 LEDs (light emitting units) blink at predetermined intervals or in order is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is shown after the lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the first special symbol in which the LED (light emitting unit) is lit in the combination (big hit mode, loss mode) is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is notified. In the case of a big hit, the type of big hit, which will be described later, can be identified by the combination lighting display of the six LEDs.

The second special symbol 1st display 19b is composed of 6 LEDs (light emitting units), and a big hit lottery for the 2nd special symbol is performed on condition that a game ball wins (wins) in the 2nd starting port 11a. Then, on the second special symbol 1st display 19b, 6 LEDs (light emitting units) blink at predetermined intervals or in order to perform variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the result of the jackpot lottery after a predetermined time elapses. The stop display of the second special symbol in which the LED (light emitting unit) is lit in the combination indicating the above (big hit mode, lost mode) is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is notified. In the case of a big hit, the type of big hit, which will be described later, can be identified by the combination lighting display of the six LEDs.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the big hit game in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol. The "big hit game" is an opening game, a round game in which the big winning opening 13a is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined mode, and a predetermined number of round games (for example, 4 times, 16 times, etc.) are completed. It means to perform an ending game indicating the end of the jackpot game.

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 13a in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 13a even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins, one round game ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage to the player.

The normal symbol 1st display 19c is composed of three LEDs (light emitting units), and when a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12, the normal symbol 1st display 19c is performed. Then, a variable display of a normal symbol in which three LEDs (light emitting units) blink at predetermined intervals or in order is performed, and after a predetermined time elapses, the LEDs are turned on in a combination (hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery. The stop display of the normal symbol is performed and the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is notified. In the case of winning, the type of winning, which will be described later, can also be determined by the combined lighting display of the three LEDs.

The first special symbol hold 1 display 19d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of first special symbol hold stored when a game ball wins in the first start port 10. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first special drawing reservations. It should be noted that the first special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

The second special symbol hold 1 display 19e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of second special symbol hold stored when the game ball wins in the second start opening 11a. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second special figure reservations. It should be noted that the second special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

The normal symbol hold first display 19f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is for displaying the number of normal symbol hold, which is the number of normal symbol hold stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of pending figures. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of reserved drawings can be stored up to four, the number may be less than four.

Regarding the number of 1st special symbol hold, 2nd special symbol hold number and normal figure hold number, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f Both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the number of holds is "0", only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the number of holds is "1", and so on. Only one LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of hold is "2", both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of hold is "3", and both LEDs (light emission) Part) flashes to notify that the number of pending numbers is "4".

The high-probability gaming state display 19g is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying that the high-probability gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state described later, and when the high-probability gaming state is reached. The LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting, the lighting display of the LED (light emitting unit) continues during the high-probability gaming state, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off when the high-probability gaming state ends.

The time-saving game state display 19h is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying that the time-saving game state is in the time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability game state). When the time-saving game state is reached, the LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light during the time-saving game state, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off when the time-saving gaming state ends.

In the high-probability time-saving game state, both the LEDs (light emitting units) of the high-probability game state display 19a and the time-saving game state display 19h are turned on. In the low-probability time-saving game state, the LED (light emitting unit) of the time-saving game state display 19h lights up. In the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the LEDs (light emitting units) of the high-probability game state display 10a and the time-saving game state display 19h do not light up.

The round number display 19i is composed of seven LEDs (light emitting units), and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big hit state (special game state) occurs, and the number of rounds is set in a predetermined mode at the start of the big hit game. The LED (light emitting unit) starts lighting at, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light during the jackpot game, and the LED (light emitting unit) turns off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, the 4th to 6th LEDs (light emitting parts) from the top light up, and if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, the 1st and 3rd from the top. The sixth and sixth LEDs (light emitting parts) light up. That is, the number of rounds is displayed by a combination of turning on and off each of the seven LEDs (light emitting units) predetermined for each number of rounds.

The right-handed first display 19j is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for displaying whether or not the so-called “right-handed” state of launching a game ball into the right game area 4a2 is recommended. The LED is lit when the game state is "short-time game state", or when a jackpot game (special game) is being performed, that is, when "right-handed" is recommended. However, when right-handed is not recommended (that is, so-called "left-handed" is recommended), the LED is turned off.

The right-handed first display 19j starts lighting the LED (light emitting part) at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game regardless of the type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot), and the LED (light emitting part) starts to light during the jackpot game. The light emitting unit) is continuously lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off when the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, which shifts after the end of the big hit game, is completed. Further, if the jackpot lottery is won during the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, the LED (light emitting unit) continues to light. Further, if the game does not shift to the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state after the big hit game, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off after the big hit game is completed. That is, once the LED (light emitting unit) is turned on, the right-handed first display 19j continues to light the LED (light emitting unit) until the gaming state in which the right-handed LED (light emitting unit) is to be turned on ends. ..

The status confirmation display 19k is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and is for indicating that it is set to the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later, and is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the transition is made, the LED is turned on, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the LED is turned off. As described above, since the status confirmation display 19k indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is. The status confirmation display 19k may be installed in any place on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but which mode is set? May be displayed recognizable. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 19k may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 19k may be blinked. And vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 19k is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol 1st display 19a, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st. Since the display 19e, the normal symbol hold first display 19f, the status display 19g, 19h, the round number display 19i, etc. are turned off, even if one or more LEDs of these displays are turned on. good.

As shown in FIG. 1, game information relating to the progress of the game is outside the game area 4a and below the first game information display device 19 at the lower left outside the guide rail 8 outside the game board 4. A second game information display device 20 for displaying the above is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the second game information display device 20 has a plurality of (10) LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in a triangular shape. These plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) include a first special symbol second display 20a, a second special symbol second display 20b, a normal symbol second display 20c, a first special symbol holding second display 20d, and a first. 2 The special symbol holding second display 20e, the normal symbol holding second display 20f, and the right-handed second display 20g are configured.
As shown in FIG. 4, the second game information display device 20 is controlled by the effect control board 130.

The first special symbol second display 20a is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) blinks as the first special symbol changes in the first special symbol first display 19a. Is started, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues blinking during the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol first display 19a, the LED is turned on or off to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.
When the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variation display is started after the end of the jackpot game.
If the first special symbol is lost in the big hit lottery, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The second special symbol second display 20b is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) blinks as the second special symbol changes in the second special symbol first display 19b. Is started, and the LED (light emitting part) keeps blinking during the variable display of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped on the second special symbol first display 19b, the LED is turned on or off to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol.
When the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variation display is started after the end of the jackpot game.
If the second special symbol is lost in the big hit lottery, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The display of the first special symbol 2nd display 20a or the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20b is displayed in the center area of the first effect symbol 16a displayed in the left side area of the screen of the first image display device 16. Since it is the fourth effect symbol following the displayed second effect symbol 16a and the third effect symbol 16a displayed in the right area area, it may be called the fourth effect symbol.
The fluctuation start timing and fluctuation stop timing of the first and second special symbol second displays 20a and 20b are synchronized with the fluctuation start timing and fluctuation stop timing of the effect symbol 16a displayed on the first image display device 16. ing.

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol 1st display 19a is started, and the effect control board Display control data is created based on the setting of special symbol variation display data in the effect control unit 130 m of 130, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the first The effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display on the special symbol second display 20a is started and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped. , Display control data is created based on the setting of the special symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20 to display the first special symbol second. The fluctuation of the vessel 20a stops.
The display mode of the second special symbol second display 20b is also the same as the above-mentioned display mode of the first special symbol second display 20a.

In addition, the mode (lighting or extinguishing) of the special symbol 1st display 19a, 19b when the special symbol is stopped is determined according to the special symbol variation pattern designation command, and the effect control is performed according to the end of the variation display of the special symbol. The board 130 (effect control unit 130 m) may stop at a predetermined display mode of the effect symbol.

The normal symbol 2nd display 20c is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) starts blinking as the normal symbol changes in the normal symbol 1st display 19c, and the normal symbol starts blinking. The LED (light emitting part) keeps blinking during the fluctuation display of. Then, the LED turns on or off as the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1st display 19c stops, and the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is notified.
When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is won, the LED (light emitting unit) is lit, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be lit until the next variation display is started after the winning game is completed.
If the lottery for winning a normal symbol is lost, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting unit) continues to be turned off until the next variable display is started.

The effect control board 130 receives a command for specifying a normal symbol variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 19c is started, and the effect control of the effect control board 130 is performed. Display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol variation display data in the unit 130 m, and the created display control data is output to the normal symbol second display 20c, so that the normal symbol second display is displayed. When the variation display of 20c is started and the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped, the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130m of the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol confirmation command. Display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the normal symbol second display 20c fluctuates. Stops.

The first special symbol holding second display 20d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned first special symbol holding first display 19d, and a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 10. The purpose is to display the number of 1st special figure reservations, which is the number of 1st special figure reservations stored in the case of a ball), and is lit or blinks in an manner indicating the number of 1st special figure reservations. It should be noted that the first special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

Regarding the first special figure hold number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the hold number is "0", and only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the hold number is "1". That is, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of hold is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of hold is "3". Both LEDs (light emitting units) are blinked to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of first special symbol hold increases or decreases, and the effect control unit 130 m of the effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol hold display data. Display control data is created based on the setting of, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20 to display (light up) the first special symbol hold second display 20d. , Blinking or turning off) is performed.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasure (off) timing of the first special symbol hold 2nd display 20d are synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of the 1st hold icon displayed on the 1st image display device 16. , It is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the first reserved number display area 16e.

The second special symbol holding second display 20e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned second special symbol holding first display 19e, and a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 11a. It is for displaying the number of the second special figure hold, which is the number of the second special figure hold stored in the case of a ball), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of the second special figure hold. It should be noted that the second special figure hold is stored up to four, but may be less than four.

Regarding the second special figure hold number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the hold number is "0", and only one LED (light emitting part) is turned on and the hold number is "1". That is, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of hold is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of hold is "3". Both LEDs (light emitting units) are blinked to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of second special symbol hold increases or decreases, and the effect control unit 130 m sets the second special symbol hold display data. Display control data is created based on the above, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20 to display (light, blink or turn off) the second special symbol hold second display 20e. Is done.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasure (off) timing of the second special symbol hold second display 20e are synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of the second hold icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , It is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the second reserved number display area 16f.

The normal symbol hold second display 20f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-mentioned normal symbol hold first display 19f, and is stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It is for displaying the number of reserved figures, which is the number of reserved figures, and is lit or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of reserved drawings can be stored up to four, the number may be less than four.

The effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of normal symbol hold increases or decreases, and displays based on the fact that the normal symbol hold display data is set by the effect control unit 130 m. The control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the normal symbol hold second display 20f is displayed (lit, blinked, or turned off).

Regarding the number of holdings in the normal figure, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the number of holdings is "0", and only one of the LEDs (light emitting part) is turned on and the number of holdings is "1". That, only the other LED (light emitting part) is lit and the number of holdings is "2", and both LEDs (light emitting part) are lit and the number of holdings is "3", both of them. The LED (light emitting unit) blinks to indicate that the number of holds is "4".

The right-handed second display 20g is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and when the gaming state becomes the "high probability time saving gaming state" or the "low probability time saving gaming state", the second starting port 11a is set in the right gaming area 4a2. Since the board structure provided with the LED is recommended for "right-handed" for the purpose of winning the game ball to the second starting port 11a, the LED is started to light up, and the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving is performed. The LED continues to light until the game state ends, while when the game state is the "low probability non-time saving game state", the first starting port 10 is provided in the left side game area 4a1 due to the board structure. 1 The LED does not light because "left-handed" for the purpose of winning the game ball to the starting port 10 is recommended.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when controlling a game in a low-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability time-saving game state, and the effect control unit 130m strikes right. A display control command is created based on the display data being set, and the created display control command is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the display of the right-handed second display 20g is started. , The effect control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game state is changed, and the game state is not the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state in the effect control unit 130 m. When it is determined that the right-handed erasure data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the right-handed second display 20 g is displayed. To finish.

When the right-handed second display 20g is in the "big hit game state", the right-handed second indicator 20g is "right-handed" for the purpose of winning a game ball to the big winning opening 13a due to the board structure provided with the big winning opening 13a in the right game area 4a2. Is the recommended state, so the LED is turned on, and the LED is kept on until the jackpot game state is completed.

Specifically, when the jackpot game (opening) is started, the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130 m sets the right-handed display data. When a display control command is created based on the above, and the created display control command is output to the second game status display device 20, the display of the right-handed second display 20 g is started and the game status is changed. The effect control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 130 m determines that the game state is not a low-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or a jackpot game state. The right-handed erasure data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game status display device 20, so that the display of the right-handed second display 20g is terminated.

Here, there is a notation of "right-handed" in the vicinity (upper side) of the right-handed second display 20g, and "right-handed" is recommended when the LED (light emitting part) of the right-handed second display 20g lights up. It is clearly shown that it is in a state of being. Therefore, the right-handed display is easier for the player to see than the right-handed first display 19j of the first game information display device 19 in which nothing is written.

The second game information display device 20 may be provided closer to the first image display device 16 than the first game information display device 19. In this case, since the second game information display device 20 is in a prominent position with respect to the player, the second game information display device 20 is easier to see than the first game information display device 19.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the effect control board 130 that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the effect control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be sent to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control unit 110A of the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c serving as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 12a, a first starting opening detection switch 10a, a second starting opening detection switch 11c, a second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, and a large winning opening. Detection switch 13c, big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, magnetic detection sensor 58a, radio wave detection sensor 58b, RAM clear switch 58c, setting key switch 58d, out ball detection switch 58e, first special symbol first display 19a, second special Symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st display 19f, high probability gaming state A display 19g, a time-saving game status display 19h, a round number display 19i, a right-handed first display 19j, a status confirmation display 19k, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are connected. ing.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main RAM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. Thereby, in order to control the control process according to the detection signal from various input devices (detection switch, detection sensor, etc.) and various output devices (solenoid, various indicators 19a to 19k of the first game information display device 19, etc.). Control processing, control processing for transmitting and receiving various control commands, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine 1 (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like.

The information display 113 (performance display monitor) connected to the main control board 110 displays a plurality of (for example, four) 7-segment displays for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped. It is composed of vessels. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays, and the set value and the numerical value of the performance information are shown by the remaining two 7-segment displays. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information is configured.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.
The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output port of the payout control unit 121 has an open / close detection switch 31a of the open / close door 3, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 100, and a game from the payout device 100. A payout motor 100b for paying out the balls and a ball presence detection switch 101a for detecting that the game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 100 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input / output port, and the like. A ball feed solenoid 43, a touch sensor 7a, a firing volume 7b, a firing solenoid 26a, and the like are connected to the input / output ports of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 7 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 7a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 43 and the launch solenoid 26a to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 7 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 7b, the ball feed solenoid 43 is driven and the firing solenoid has a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 7. The 26a is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control board 130 displays an image based on the effect control unit 130 m that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command 130 m from the effect control unit 130 m. Image control unit 140 that controls audio output, and lamp control that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (solenoids, motors, etc.) based on the reception of effect control commands from the effect control unit 130m. The unit 150 is provided.

The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.
The input / output port of the effect control unit 130 m has an effect button detection switch 6b, a cross key detection switch 6 g, an effect lever detection switch 6i, a first special symbol second display 20a, a second special symbol second display 20b, and normal. The symbol 2nd display 20c, the 1st special symbol holding 2nd display 20d, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 20e, the normal symbol holding 2nd display 20f, and the right-handed 2nd display 20g are connected.

The sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130m receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing according to the detection signal of the above, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, various displays 20a to 20g of the second game information display device 20, etc.) are performed.

(Structure of image control unit)
Here, the configuration of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image control unit 140.
The image control unit 140 controls the image display of the image display devices 16 and 18 and the sound of the sound output device 9, so that the control CPU 141, the control RAM 142, the control ROM 143, the CGROM 144, the crystal oscillator 145, the VRAM 146, and the VDP (Video Display Processor) ) 200 (drawing control unit) is provided. The VDP 200 includes a voice control circuit 300 including a voice ROM including a voice control unit (voice LSI) for controlling the voice output in the gaming machine 1.

The general CPU 141 instructs the VDP 200 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 144 on the image display devices 16 and 18 based on the effect pattern designation command to be described later received from the effect control unit 130 m. Such an instruction is given by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.
Further, when the integrated CPU 141 receives the V blank interrupt signal or the drawing end signal from the VDP 200, the integrated CPU 141 performs interrupt processing as appropriate.

The control CPU 141 also instructs the voice control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 to output music or voice based on predetermined voice data to the voice output device 9 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 130 m. ..
The control RAM 142 is built in the control CPU 141, functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the control CPU 141, and temporarily stores the data read from the control ROM 143.

Further, the control ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, and is used to generate a control processing program of the control CPU 141, a symbol arrangement information in which the symbol number of the effect symbol 16a and the type of the effect symbol 16a are associated with each other, and a display list. The display list generation program, animation pattern information for displaying the animation of the production pattern, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores the combination of the animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. are stored in the animation scene information. is doing.

The CGROM 144 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., which are a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of images (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of an image. Further, the CGROM 144 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 144 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. In addition, a large amount of voice data is also stored in the CGROM 144.

The crystal oscillator 145 outputs a pulse signal to the clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200, and by dividing the pulse signal, the system clock and image display devices 16 and 18 for the VDP 200 to control the clock generation circuit 205. A synchronization signal or the like for synchronizing with is generated.

The VRAM 146 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. Further, the VRAM 146 draws or displays an image, a display list storage area 146a for temporarily storing the display list output from the integrated CPU 141, and an expanded storage area 146b for storing the image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206. It has a first frame buffer 146c and a second frame buffer 146d for the purpose. Palette data is also stored in the VRAM 146. The first and second frame buffers 146c and 146d alternately switch between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and is based on reading image data from either the first frame buffer 146c or the second frame buffer 146d (display frame buffer) based on an instruction from the control CPU 141. Therefore, a video signal (RGB signal or the like) is generated and output to the image display devices 16 and 18. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the VDP 200 is not only an image processor but also has an audio output function.

The VDP200 includes a control register 201, a CG bus I / F202, a CPUI / F203, a clock generation circuit 205, an extension circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, and a voice control circuit 300. And have.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and drawing control and display control are performed by writing and reading data to the control register 201. The control CPU 141 can write and read data to and from the control register 201 via the CPUI / F203.
The control register 201 includes a system control register that makes basic settings necessary for the VDP 200 to operate, a data transfer register that makes settings necessary for data transfer, and drawing that makes settings for drawing control. There are 6 types of registers, a bus interface register that makes settings necessary for bus access, an extension register that makes settings necessary for decompressing compressed images, and a display register that makes settings for display control. It has a register.

The CG bus I / F202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 144, and image data from the CGROM 144 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I / F202.
Further, the CPUI / F203 is an interface circuit for communication with the control CPU 141, and the control CPU 141 outputs a display list to the VDP200, accesses a control register, and various types from the VDP200 via the CPUI / F203. The control CPU 141 inputs an interrupt signal.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices.
Specifically, data transfer between the control CPU 141 and VRAM 146, data transfer between CGROM 144 and VRAM 146, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of VRAM 146 are performed.
The clock generation circuit 205 inputs a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 145 and generates a system clock that determines the arithmetic processing speed of the VDP 200. Further, a clock for generating a synchronization signal is generated, and the synchronization signal is output to the image display devices 16 and 18 via the display circuit 208.

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 144, and stores the decompressed image data in the expansion storage area 146b.
The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control by a display list composed of drawing control commands.
The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating the color data of the image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 146, and the generated video signal (the generated video signal). This is a circuit that outputs an RGB signal) to the image display devices 16 and 18. Further, the display circuit 208 also outputs synchronization signals (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing the image display devices 16 and 18 to the image display devices 16 and 18.
In the present embodiment, as the video signal, the RGB signal obtained by converting the digital signal into an analog signal is output to the image display devices 16 and 18, but the video signal may be output as the digital signal.
The memory controller 209 controls to switch between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" when the control CPU 141 gives an instruction to switch the frame buffer.

The voice control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on the command transmitted from the effect control board 130, and controls the voice output in the voice output device 9.
The voice control circuit 300 outputs music or voice using the voice data stored in the CGROM 144. In this case, the CGROM 144 includes a sound source ROM for storing audio data. The voice control circuit 300 is not included in the VDP 200 and may be independently provided in the image control unit 140.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port. ..
A panel drive device 17, a panel lighting device 23, a frame lighting device 27, a button drive motor 6c, a button vibration motor 6d, and a button light emitting LED 6e are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp control base 150.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to light emission effect and accessory effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, the panel drive device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the panel lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the button drive motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, the button light emitting LED 6e, the lever vibration motor 6j, and the lever light emitting Control processing of LED 6k is performed.

The lamp ROM 150b has lighting / blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 130 m, and operation patterns of the movable effect members 17A to 17C. Data, the protrusion operation pattern of the effect button 6a, the vibration operation pattern data of the effect button 6a, the vibration operation pattern data of the effect lever 6h, and the like are stored.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 161 and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120). , Production control board 130, various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of (power failure) is provided.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. And supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described.
The gaming states that can be taken as a gaming machine are "low-probability gaming state" or "high-probability gaming state" as a state related to a special symbol jackpot lottery, and "non-time-saving gaming" as a state related to the operation of the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a. There is a "state" or a "short-time game state". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the state related to the operation of the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a (non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are related to each other. It can also be made independent. in short,
(1) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state",
(2) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state"
(3) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state",
(4) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state",
Can be provided.
In this embodiment, the gaming states (1) to (3) above can be obtained.
The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability gaming state" and the "non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set to the present embodiment. In the above, it is referred to as "normal gaming state".

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery of the special symbol performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. For example, it means a game state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" means a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1 / 59.8. ..
Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state", and the gaming state is advantageous for the player. It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is referred to as "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is ". It is a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set shorter than the "time saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 11a is short when the player wins the game. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, and a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol first display, but after the variable display of the normal symbol is started, for example, Stop display after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 11a is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-" in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12. It refers to a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to be shorter than the "time-saving gaming state" and when a winning is won. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery is set. For example, it is set as high as 127/128.
Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the second starting port 11a is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving gaming state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 11a, so that the player can advantageously advance the game without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbol. Is set to. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbol is advantageous. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the winning probability may be set to, for example, 0/128 in the winning lottery of the normal symbol.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 14.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for performing a jackpot determination based on the special figure determination information acquired by winning a game ball to the starting ports 10 and 11a. Specifically, FIG. 6 (1) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for performing a jackpot determination based on the special symbol determination information acquired by winning a game ball to the first starting port 10. 6 (2) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for performing a jackpot determination based on the special symbol determination information acquired by winning the game ball to the second starting port 11a, FIG. 6 (2). In the table of 1) and FIG. 6 (2), the probability of being determined to be a big hit (big hit winning probability) is the same.

As shown in FIGS. 6 (1) and 6 (2), the jackpot determination table shows the probability game state, the jackpot determination acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. The jackpot determination value for determining the random value (special figure determination information) and the jackpot determination result are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a referred to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (1) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (2), and acquired the current stochastic gaming state. Based on the random value for jackpot determination, it is determined whether the jackpot is "big hit" or "missing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (1), one jackpot determination random number value of "3" is determined to be "big hit" in the low probability gaming state. .. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the 10 jackpot determination random values of "3", "7" ... "128", and "250" are determined to be "big hits". If it is a random value for jackpot determination other than the above, it is determined to be "missing". Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 299, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The probability is increased by 10 times to 10/300.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot determination result. Specifically, FIG. 7 (1) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol at the time of a jackpot, and FIG. 7 (2) is a special symbol determination table at the time of loss. It is a special symbol determination table for loss referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7 (1), in the special symbol determination table for big hits, the type of the starting port when the game ball wins in the starting port and the game ball in the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. The jackpot symbol judgment value (special symbol judgment random value) for determining the special symbol judgment random value for the jackpot acquired when the ball enters, the judgment result (type of special symbol), and the special symbol ( The special symbol stop symbol data) and the effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol are associated with each other.

As shown in FIG. 7 (2), the special symbol determination table for loss includes the type of the starting port when the game ball wins in the starting port, and the game ball in the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. Loss symbol judgment value ((special symbol judgment random value), judgment result (special symbol type), and special symbol for determining the special symbol judgment random value for loss acquired when the ball enters the ball (Special symbol stop symbol data) is associated with an effect symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the special symbol. It should be noted that a plurality of lost special symbols can be determined even in the case of loss. As described above, a plurality of lost special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other.

The specific first special symbol for loss shown in FIG. 7 (2) is shifted to a time-saving gaming state in which the gaming state is easily won by the second starting port 11a in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. It is a design that serves as an opportunity. The specific first special symbol for loss has a lower probability of being selected than the first special symbol for loss, and is set to a probability of 1/150. Even if the specific first special symbol is selected, the stochastic gaming state remains the low-probability gaming state and is not shifted to the high-probability gaming state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting port in which the game ball has won and the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. It will be decided. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command as the information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined based on the determined type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). Here, in the effect symbol specification command, one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the fluctuation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, since the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game is completed are determined by the type of the special symbol for the jackpot (stop symbol data), the type of the special symbol is the type of the jackpot game. It can be said that the game state after the big hit game is determined.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of a jackpot game when a jackpot determination result is determined as a jackpot determination result. In the jackpot game control table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), the opening time of the jackpot game, the opening designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 13a are determined. The big winning opening open / close control table information for the game, the ending time of the big hit game, and the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a will refer to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 and determine the opening time, the winning opening opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the special figure stop symbol data. Since the number of round games in the jackpot game is determined by determining the type of the jackpot opening / closing control table, FIG. 8 supplementarily describes the number of round games in the jackpot game. There is.

(Large winning opening opening / closing control table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table referred to in the case of a big hit as a big hit determination result. In the big winning opening open / close control table, the maximum number of round games in the big hit game, the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening 13a in one round game, the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening 13a in each round game, and each The opening time of the large winning opening 13a for one opening of the round game and the closing interval time for closing the large winning opening 13a after the end of the round game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a specifies the type of the large winning opening open / close control table based on the special figure stop symbol data. Specifically, when the special figure stop symbol data is "01" or "04", the first large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 01) is specified, and the first large winning opening opening / closing control table is specified. The first big hit game is executed with reference to, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "02" or "05", the second big prize opening open / close control table (TBL.No.02) is specified, and the first When the second big hit game is executed with reference to the two big winning opening open / close control tables and the special figure stop symbol data is "03" or "06", the third big winning opening open / close control table (TBL. No. 03) is specified, and the third big hit game is executed with reference to the third big winning opening opening / closing control table.

According to the first large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 01), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open / close the large winning opening 13a a plurality of times (K = 3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds) Performs a big hit game of 10 rounds (R).
However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 13a before the maximum number of open times (K) is reached, one round game will be completed. Then, when the game of 10 rounds is completed, the first big hit game is completed. The first jackpot game is a jackpot game with a higher degree of advantage because the number of rounds is larger than that of the second and third jackpot games.

According to the second large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 02), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open the large winning opening 13a for up to 29.5 seconds per round (R). Perform the second jackpot game.
However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 13a by the time the opening time elapses, one round game is completed. Then, when the four rounds of the game are completed, the second big hit game is completed.

According to the third large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No. 03), the opening / closing member 13b is operated to open / close the large winning opening 13 a plurality of times (K = 3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds) The third big hit game of 4 rounds (R) is executed.

Since the opening and closing mode of the big winning opening 13a is the same in the first big hit game and the third big hit game, the prize ball is won by the third closing time of the big winning opening 13a in the fourth round. For example, the first image display device 16 can execute a promotion effect suggesting whether or not the possible round games are increased.

Specifically, in the first jackpot game, after performing a promotion success production that makes it appear that the number of round games that can win prize balls has been successfully increased in the final phase of the promotion production, 5 of the 5 rounds of the big prize opening 13a. After the 6th round, when the prize ball can be won, the jackpot game will be advanced. On the other hand, in the third jackpot game, the jackpot game ends after executing the promotion failure effect that makes it appear that the increase in the round games that can win the prize ball has failed in the final phase of the promotion effect. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion production is raised.

(Game status setting data table)
FIG. 10 (1) is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting a game state after the jackpot game is completed. In the game state setting data table, the special figure stop symbol data, the winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot lottery, the time-saving game flag indicating that the game state is in the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state can be executed. The number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of a special symbol, the high-probability game flag indicating that the game is in a high-probability gaming state, and the number of times of variable display of a special symbol that can be executed in the high-probability gaming state are shown. It is associated with the high probability number of games (X).

Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a non-time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a low-probability gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), and based on the special figure stop symbol data and the winning state data, the time saving game flag, the time saving game number (J), and the high probability. The game flag and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

When the high-probability gaming state is set, the high-probability gaming number (X) may be set to 50,000 times, but in the high-probability gaming state, the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is 10/300. Therefore, since the next jackpot winning is substantially confirmed, the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game are advantageous jackpot games for the player whose next jackpot game is confirmed.
When the low-probability time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) is set, 100 times are set as the number of time-saving games (J), but there is no upper limit, that is, the low-probability time-saving game until the big hit is won. The state (a time saving game state) continues to be set.

In FIG. 10 (2), the specific first special symbol (specific loss symbol) for loss, which is predetermined by the variable display of the first special symbol, is stopped without winning the big hit in the low probability non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the game state setting data table for setting the later game state (c time saving game state).

In the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (2), the special symbol stop symbol data, the symbol stop game state data indicating the game state when the specific lost symbol is stopped, and the time reduction game state are shown. A game flag, a time-saving game number (J) indicating the number of times of variation display of a special symbol that can be executed in the time-saving game state, a high-probability game flag indicating that the game is in a high-probability game state, and a high-probability game flag that can be executed in the high-probability game state. It is associated with the high-probability game number (X) indicating the number of times of variation display of the special symbol.

Since the stop symbol data "20" is the specific first special symbol for loss, the time-saving game flag is set by shifting the gaming state from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state. However, since the probability gaming state remains the low probability gaming state and is not shifted to the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming flag is not set.
When the low-probability time-saving game state is set, 1200 times are set as the number of time-saving games (J), but there may be no upper limit.

If the specific first special symbol (specific loss symbol) stops during the time-saving gaming state after shifting from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state triggered by the specific first special symbol, a new time-saving gaming state is entered. Switch (the maximum number of times during counting is reset, and the maximum number of times is newly set to 1200).

FIG. 10 (3) shows a game state (b time-saving game state) in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol for loss reaches a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the game state setting data table for changing and setting to.
As shown in FIG. 10 (3), in the game state setting data table, the number of symbol fluctuations, the game state data at the time of reaching the number of fluctuations indicating the game state when the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is reached, and the time-saving game A time-saving game flag indicating that the game is in a state, a time-saving game number (J) indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that can be executed in the time-saving game state, and a high-probability game flag indicating that the game is in a high-probability game state. It is associated with the high-probability game number (X) indicating the number of variable displays of the special symbol that can be executed in the high-probability game state.

The number of symbol fluctuations indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol of loss for shifting to the time-saving gaming state in which the gaming state is in a state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 11a in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. It is a thing.
Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the variation display of the first special symbol of loss (or the variation display of the first special symbol of loss and the variation display of the second special symbol of loss) are continuously 750 times. When executed, the gaming state is changed from the non-time saving gaming state to the time saving gaming state (b time saving gaming state). However, the stochastic gaming state remains the low-probability gaming state and is not shifted to the high-probability gaming state.
When the low-probability time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) is set, 1200 times are set as the number of time-saving games (J), but there may be no upper limit.

The number of changes in the special symbol is counted from the time when the low-probability non-time-saving game state is reached after the jackpot game is executed (that is, from the time when the low-probability game state is reached). .. Therefore, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed 750 times after shifting to the low-probability time-saving game state (b time-saving game state), the count number is 1500 times, so that a new time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) ) Does not occur, and the two time-saving game states do not overlap.

If the specific first special symbol stops during the time-saving game state after shifting to the low-probability time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 750 times, a new one is added. Switch to the time-saving game state (c time-saving game state) (the upper limit number of times during counting is reset, and the upper limit number of times is newly set to 1200 times).
Even if the specific first special symbol is stopped during the time-saving game state (c time-saving game state), it may not be switched to the new time-saving game state (c time-saving game state).

As shown in FIGS. 10 (2) and 10 (3), when the specific loss symbol is stopped without winning the jackpot in the low probability non-time saving game state, or the special symbol of loss without winning the jackpot. When the number of fluctuations of the above reaches a predetermined number of times, the game shifts from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), and the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a. It becomes a game state that is easy to play.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving gaming state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving gaming state.
FIG. 12 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and Reach judgment random number value, first special figure hold number (U1) or second special figure hold number (U2), special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, special figure fluctuation pattern as judgment result, special symbol The fluctuation time of is associated with the special map fluctuation pattern specification command indicating the special map fluctuation pattern.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, and refers to the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), the reach determination random number value, and the first special figure hold number (U1). ) Or the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the second special figure hold number (U2) and the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command according to the special figure fluctuation pattern is issued to the effect control board 130. It is designed to be sent to.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the content (effect mode) of the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is determined according to the variation pattern designation command (big hit determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the effect contents that can be executed by the variable effect are described as a reference.

As the effect contents shown in the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, "normal variation", "shortening variation", "ultra-shortening variation", and "long variation" are three effect symbols 16a separated. It means that it fluctuates at high speed and stops without reaching.

Further, "reach" is a possibility that a jackpot game is executed in which a part of the combination of the jackpot effect symbols 16a for notifying that the jackpot is a jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 16a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes the player expect that there is. For example, when the combination of the symbol matching of "777" is set as the combination of the jackpot effect symbols 16a for notifying that it is a jackpot, the same effect symbols 16a temporarily stop at "7" in the left side region and the right side region. The remaining effect symbol 16a is fluctuating in the central region.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 16a sways slightly or the effect symbol 16a is deformed slightly to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 16a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 16a fluctuates in the center area, and the reach with the lowest jackpot expectation. It is a production.

Further, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach productions having a higher expectation of big hits than normal reach, and development productions are executed from the normal reach productions, and then executed. For example, the two effect symbols 16a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 16, and a special reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16. .. In addition, "special SP reach" is performed with a special effect than "SP reach".

Further, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP" 7 "reach" are special reach effects having a higher expectation of big hits than super reach, and are executed after the normal reach effect or the super reach effect. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 16a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 16, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16 is used. It is designed to produce a more special reach than "SP Reach". In "SPSP reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a other than "7", and in "SPSP" 7 "reach", the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and is executed after the normal reach production. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 16a are all the same and fluctuate at a low speed in a state of being aligned, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16. And "SPSP" 7 "reach", a special reach production (reach production with a big hit confirmed) is performed.

In addition, "special reach" is a reach in which either a normal reach effect that is more special than "normal reach", an SP reach effect that is more special than "SP reach", or an SPSP reach effect that is more special than "SPSP reach" is executed. It has become.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is that when the number of reserved first special figures increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is shortened. While it becomes easier to determine the fluctuation, even if the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving game state, the shortened fluctuation is not determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting left than when hitting right in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is that even if the number of reserved first special figures increases to 1 to 3 during the time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is used. While the (super) shortening variation is not determined, if the number of reserved 2nd special symbols increases to 1 to 3 during the time-saving gaming state, the (long) shortening variation is likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol. Be done. By doing so, it is possible to improve the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting right than when hitting left in the short-time game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The third feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is as follows.
In the case of a loss judgment result when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during a non-time saving game state, two special figure fluctuation patterns (variation time 4 seconds or 8 seconds (reach)) in which the fluctuation time differs depending on the number of holdings. (If none))) is determined, but if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the time-saving game state and the judgment result is a loss, the same special figure fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of holdings. (Variation time: 8 seconds) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate game according to the type of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is that the fluctuation time is different when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the non-time saving game state and the judgment result of the jackpot is different. One of a plurality of types of special figure fluctuation patterns (variation time: 40 seconds, 70 seconds, 90 seconds ...) is determined, but the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 10 during the time-saving game state and is a big hit. In the case of the determination result of, one of the special figure fluctuation patterns in which the types of fluctuation time is smaller than that in the non-time saving gaming state is determined. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate game according to the type of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, in the case where the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the time-saving game state and the determination result of loss is obtained, regardless of the number of holdings. One of two special symbol fluctuation patterns (variation time: 8 seconds and 40 seconds) with different fluctuation times is determined, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the special map fluctuation pattern (special reach) with a long fluctuation time. (Normal fluctuation) has a higher rate of determination. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate game according to the type of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 13 (1) is a non-time-saving game for preliminarily determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a during the non-time-saving game state. It is a pre-judgment table for the state.
FIG. 13 (2) is for a time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a during the time-saving gaming state. It is a preliminary judgment table.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the pre-judgment table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value are displayed. , The special map schedule fluctuation pattern as a determination result and the look-ahead designation command indicating the special map schedule fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol fluctuation pattern" can specify the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 13, and is based on a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for determining a special figure variation pattern. The pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command (starting opening winning designation command) corresponding to the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 13 (2), the pre-judgment (look-ahead) is executed when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 in the time-saving game state, but it should not be executed. You may do it.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a table relating to a normal symbol and an opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a.
FIG. 14 (1) is a diagram showing a collision determination table for ordinary symbols. FIG. 14 (2) is a stop symbol determination table of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the winning lottery result of the ordinary symbol. FIG. 14 (3) is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table of ordinary symbols. FIG. 14 (4) is a diagram showing an opening mode determination table for the second starting port.

(Hit judgment table for ordinary symbols)
As shown in FIG. 14 (1), in the hit determination table, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the hit determination random value acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the determination result of the hit lottery are displayed. It is associated.
The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table and determines whether it is "hit" or "missing" based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random value for hit determination.

According to the hit determination table, in the non-time saving game state, one hit determination random value of "19" is determined to be a hit, and in the time saving game state, 19 pieces of "0" to "18". The random value for hit determination is determined to be a hit. Therefore, the rate of being determined to be a hit is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Ordinary design determination table)
As shown in FIG. 14 (2), in the stop symbol determination table, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the winning symbol determination random value acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the type of the normal symbol ( The stop symbol data) is associated with a normal symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the normal symbol.
The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table, and causes the normal symbol first display 19c to stop and display the normal symbol based on the current game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for the winning symbol. And the normal figure stop symbol data is decided. Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol designation command as information indicating the type of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) and transmitted to the effect control board 130. ..

(Fluctuating pattern determination table for ordinary symbols)
As shown in FIG. 14 (3), the fluctuation pattern determination table shows the presence / absence of a time-saving game state, the result of hit determination (win lottery), and the fluctuation of the normal map acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12. A random value for pattern determination, a fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and a command for specifying a normal symbol fluctuation pattern transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are associated with each other.
The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table, and determines the variation time of the normal symbol based on the presence / absence of the time-saving gaming state, the result of the winning lottery, and the random value for determining the variation pattern of the normal map. Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined fluctuation time and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Opening mode determination table for the second starting port)
As shown in FIG. 14 (4), the opening mode determination table of the second starting port 11a includes a normal symbol (stop symbol data) and a maximum number of times (S) of opening the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b). , The first opening time and closing time of the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time. It is associated.
The main CPU 110a refers to the opening mode determination table, and based on the stop symbol data, the maximum number of times the second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b) is opened, the first opening time and closing time, the second opening time and closing. Determine the time.

In the opening mode determination table, the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2) is more advantageous to the player than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). The opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is more advantageous to the player than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). There is.
Since the most advantageous normal symbol stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is determined when a hit occurs in the time-saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving game state in the time-saving game state. The second starting port 11a (opening / closing member 11b) is operated so as to be.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the main control board 110.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 ms), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

First, in step S101, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. Next, in step S102, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal electric opening time counter. Performs time control processing for updating various timer counters such as update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of subtracting "1" from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal power release time counter.

In step S103, the main CPU 110a includes a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for normal symbol determination, and a random number for normal symbol variation pattern determination. Performs random number update processing of numerical values. Specifically, "1" is added to each random number counter to update the random number counter. If the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0", and if the random number counter makes one round, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value random number at that time.

In step S104, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process for updating the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S105, whether or not the main CPU 110a has an input to each of the first start port detection switch 10a, the second start port detection switch 11c, the gate detection switch 12a, the large winning opening detection switch 13c, and the general winning opening detection switch 14a. Performs input control processing to determine whether or not. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S106, the main CPU 110a has acquired special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. Judgment (random value for judgment, random value for judgment of fluctuation pattern), fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening / closing of the big winning opening 13a, setting of the game state, etc. conduct. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S107, the main CPU 110a determines the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 12, displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, opens and closes the second starting port 11a (auxiliary game), and the like. Performs Fuden control processing.

In step S108, the main CPU 110a refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs a process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120. I do. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 100.

In step S109, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process for detecting the presence or absence of a magnetic error or a radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 58a and the radio wave detection sensor 58b. When the occurrence of a magnetic error or a radio wave error is detected, a magnetic abnormality error detection command or a radio wave abnormality error detection command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the door open state based on the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a, and if detected, transmits a door open error detection command to the effect control board 130.
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the jamming of the game ball in the passage where the game ball is discharged from the storage portion of the game ball based on the detection signal from the saucer full detection switch 32a, and if detected, the dish full error detection command. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when it is detected that the error state is canceled by the state of the input signal and the detection signal, the main CPU 110a transmits an error release command to the effect control board 130. Further, the effect control board 130 transmits a signal for notifying the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 of error detection and error cancellation.
The main CPU 110a does not transmit an error release signal depending on the type of error generated in the gaming machine 1. That is, the error release signal is transmitted when the dish is full, the door is open, and the ball is jammed, but the error release signal is not transmitted when the illegal radio wave is detected.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a has external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, drive control data output to the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 11d, the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d, and the first special symbol. 1st display 19a, 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b, normal symbol 1st display 19c, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 19e, normal symbol hold 1st Data creation such as 1 display 19f, high probability game status display 19g, time saving game status display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, status confirmation display 19k, etc. Perform processing.

In step S111, the main CPU 110a is the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the various winning openings 10, 11a, 14 during the low probability non-time saving game state, and the low probability non-time saving game state. Counts game performance information such as the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e regardless of the game state. Performs game ball counting processing for. The total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected even if the set value is changed (regardless of the set value), so these are counted. By setting it, it becomes possible to calculate the performance information excluding the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S112, the main CPU 110a calculates a normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal middle out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs, and is set in the storage area of the main RAM 110c. A normal base value calculation process is performed in which the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of the base storage area. The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored. The second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the normal base value of the four game sections including the present is saved in each area.

In step S113, the main CPU 110a has a performance for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values for the four game sections calculated in step S112 above and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performance for setting display data Performs display data setting processing.

In step S114, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process for outputting the external output data created in step S110, the drive control data signal, and the performance display data signal created in step S113. Further, an output process for a display device for outputting a signal such as display control data created in step S110 is performed. Further, a command output process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is performed.

In step S115, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Input control processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S121, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 14a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 14. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a adds predetermined data to the general winning opening counter used for the prize ball and updates it.

In step S122, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch 13c is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 13a. When the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 13c, the main CPU 110a adds and updates predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball, and also wins the large winning opening 13a. Large winning opening ball entry counter (C) for counting the game balls that have been played The counter in the storage area is added and updated.

In step S123, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 10.

In step S124, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 11b.
When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input, the main CPU 110a performs the same processing as in step S123.
However, in this second start port detection switch input process, "1" is added to the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and the extracted jackpot determination random value, special symbol determination random value, and reach determination are performed. The random value for use is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first start port detection switch input process and the second start port detection switch input process differ only in the storage area for storing various data, and all other processes are the same.

In step S125, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process for determining whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 12.
In step S126, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this prize confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the prize confirmation detection switch (not shown) has been input, and "1" is subtracted from the ball entry counter (D) to update (D ← D). -1) Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter (D) is within the range of the predetermined determination value (lower limit value <D <upper limit value), and if it is outside the range of the determination value, Assuming that an abnormal prize has occurred, the error specification command for abnormal prize is set in the transmission data storage area for production. If it is within the range of the determination value, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, the error designation command for abnormal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning notifies the abnormal winning error and indicates that the abnormal winning error has occurred. Notify.

(1st start port detection switch input processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a first start port detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S131, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is input (step S131; Yes), the process is transferred to step S132, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 10a is not input (step S131; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S132, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

Next, in step S133, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved numbers set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is less than 4. When the number of reserved numbers set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (step S133; Yes), the process is transferred to step S134 and the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is stored. If the number of reserved pieces set is not less than 4 (step S133; No), the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S134, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.
In step S135, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and acquires it in the empty storage unit. Stores the random value for jackpot judgment.
In step S136, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a special symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and enters the vacant storage unit. The acquired random number value for a special symbol is stored.

In step S137, the main CPU 110a acquires a game random value (a reach determination random value and a variation pattern determination random value), and is a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area. Is searched, and the acquired random number values for games (random value for reach determination and random value for fluctuation pattern determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.
In step S138, the main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process. The first start for showing the determination information of the first start port in advance based on each random number value acquired in the above steps S135 to S137 with reference to the advance determination table (not shown) corresponding to the current gaming state. Determine the winning information.

In step S139, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command based on the first start winning information determined in the first pre-determination process of step S138 in the production transmission data storage area.

As a result, the first start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start opening winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start opening winning designation command is the first start. Analyzes the mouth prize designation command, and a predetermined advance notice effect is performed from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start mouth prize designation command to one or more variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice for executing the command or a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon.

However, the first pre-determination process is determined only according to the gaming state at the time when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 10. Therefore, if the game state is changed before the first hold reserved by the ball is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the first pre-determination process. ..

In step S140, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area, and is the first special corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) updated in step S134. Set the symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S141, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol hold display data for displaying the first hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the first special symbol hold first display 19d in a predetermined processing area. Then, the input process of the first start port detection switch is completed. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the first special symbol is output. The first hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 19d.

(Second start port detection switch input processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a second start port detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S151, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is input (step S151; Yes), the process is transferred to step S152, and the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 11c is not input (step S151; Yes). No), the second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S152, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

Next, in step S153, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the ball entry counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the second starting port 11a and updates (D ← D + 1).
In step S154, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is in progress. If the auxiliary game is in progress (step S154; Yes), the process is transferred to step S159, and if the auxiliary game is not in progress (step S154; No), the process is transferred to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the illegal entry counter (E) for monitoring the illegal entry into the second starting port 11a and updates (E ← E + 1).
In step S156, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal entry counter is larger than the specified number (10). If the number is greater than the specified number (step S156; Yes), the process is transferred to step S157, and if the number is less than the specified number (step S156; No), the process is transferred to step S160.

In step S157, the main CPU 110a sets the illegal entry error designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect, assuming that an illegal entry has occurred. As a result, the illegal entry error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the illegal entry error designation command notifies the illegal entry error and an illegal entry error occurs. Notify that you have done so.

In step S158, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal entry counter (E) to "0".
In step S159, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second start port entry counter (L) and updates (L ← L + 1).

Next, in step S160, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved numbers set in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is less than 4. When the number of holdings set in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area is less than 4 (step S160; Yes), the process is transferred to step S154 and the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area is stored. If the number of reserved pieces set is not less than 4 (step S160; No), the second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S161, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores it.
In step S162, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for jackpot judgment.
In step S163, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a special symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and enters the vacant storage unit. The acquired random number value for a special symbol is stored.

In step S164, the main CPU 110a acquires a game random value (a reach determination random value and a variation pattern determination random value), and is a storage unit that is vacant in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area. Is searched, and the acquired random number values for games (random value for reach determination and random value for fluctuation pattern determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.
In step S165, the main CPU 110a performs a second pre-determination process. The second start for showing the determination information of the second start port in advance based on each random number value acquired in the above steps S162 to S164 with reference to the advance determination table (FIG. 13) corresponding to the current gaming state. Determine the winning information.

In step S166, the main CPU 110a sets the second start opening winning designation command based on the second start winning information determined in the second pre-determination process of step S165 in the production transmission data storage area.

As a result, the second start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start opening winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start opening winning designation command is the second start. Analyzes the mouth prize designation command, and a predetermined advance notice effect is performed from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second start mouth prize designation command to one or more variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice for executing the command or a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon.

However, the second pre-determination process is determined only according to the gaming state at the time when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 11a. Therefore, if the game state is changed before the second hold reserved by the ball is processed, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the second pre-determination process. ..

In step S167, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and the second special corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) updated in step S161. Set the symbol memory specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S168, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol hold display data for displaying the second hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the second special symbol hold first display 19e in a predetermined processing area. Then, the input processing of the second start port detection switch this time is completed. As a result, when the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the second special symbol is output. The second hold number is displayed on the symbol first display 19e.

(Gate detection switch input processing)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a gate detection switch input process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input.

When it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input (step S171; Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 in step S172.
When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is not input (step S171; No), the main CPU 110a ends the gate detection switch input process.
In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, and the upper limit number of holdings of the right of the variation display of the normal symbol is set to "4".

When it is determined in step S172 that the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 (step S172; Yes), in step S173, the main CPU 110a is stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area. The value obtained by adding "1" to the hold number (G) is stored as a new normal symbol hold number (G). When it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is not less than 4 (step S172; No), the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S174, the main CPU 110a acquires a hit determination random value, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol hold storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for collision detection.

In step S175, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for symbol determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit in the vacant storage unit. Stores the random value for symbol determination.

In step S176, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and vacant storage unit. The random value for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map acquired in is stored in.
As described above, the hit determination random value, the symbol determination random value, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination random value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area.

In step S177, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area, and produces a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) updated in step S173. Set in the transmission data storage area.

In step S178, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol hold display data for displaying (lighting or blinking the LED) the normal symbol hold number on the normal symbol hold first display 19f in a predetermined processing area, and this time. Gate detection switch Ends the input process. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The number of reserved figures is displayed on the vessel 19f.

(Special figure special electric control processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure special electric control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S181, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data. Next, the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S182.

In step S183, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0 (step S183; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S184).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 0 in step S183 (step S183; No), in step S185, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 1.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S185 (step S185; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol variation processing (step S186).

In step S185, when the special figure special electric processing data = 1 (step S185; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187.
In step S187, if the special figure special electric processing data = 2 (step S187; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the special symbol stop processing (step S188).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 2 in step S187 (step S187; No), in step S189, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 3.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game processing (step S190).
When the special figure special electric processing data = 3 in step S189 (step S189; No), in step S191, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data = 4.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 in step S191 (step S191; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing (step S192).
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is not set in step S191 (step S191; No), the main CPU 110a ends the special figure special electric control process.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol storage determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S201, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Here, when the variation of the special symbol is being displayed, that is, when the special symbol time counter is not "0" (step S201; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated and the special symbol time counter is "0" (step S201). ; No), the process is transferred to step S202.

In step S202, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is "1" or more, and determines that the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is not "1" or more. If this is the case (step S202; No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S204, and if it is determined that the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area is “1” or more (step S202; Yes), the step. The process is transferred to S203. As a result, the second special symbol storage area is given priority processing over the first special symbol storage area.

In step S203, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area and stores it.
In step S204, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (step S204; No), the process is transferred to step S215, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is ". If it is determined that the value is 1 ”or higher (step S204; Yes), the process is transferred to step S205.
In step S205, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area and stores it.

In step S206, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold number (U) storage area subtracted in steps S202 to S205. Specifically, the data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit.

Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is stored in the special symbol hold storage. It will be erased from the area.

In step S207, the main CPU 110a is based on the data (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206. Execute the jackpot judgment process.

In step S208, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol data determined in step S207 in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S209, the main CPU 110a performs a fluctuation pattern determination process.
In the variation pattern determination process, first, the variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is determined with reference to the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, in the case of the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 11 is determined, and in the case of the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Determine the pattern determination table. After that, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern determination table with reference to the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the variation pattern determination random value.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S211 the game state at the start of the fluctuation is confirmed, and the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.
In step S212, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol first display devices 19a and 19b. That is, the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the first special symbol first. The variable display of the device 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b is started.

First, in step S213, when the main CPU 110a starts the variation display of the special symbol as described above, the special symbol time counter is set with the variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S208. Set it on the counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S214, the main CPU 110a sets 00H to the customer waiting state determination flag. That is, the customer waiting state determination flag is cleared. The customer waiting state determination flag = "00H" indicates that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner or is in a big hit game. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and is not in the jackpot game (non-game state), the customer waiting state determination flag = "01H" is stored. When the customer waiting state determination flag = "01H" is stored, the customer waiting state specification command is set in step S217 described later, and it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 that neither the special symbol variation display nor the jackpot game is in progress. Will be done.

In step S215, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol storage determination processing.
In step S204, when the main CPU 110a determines that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "0", that is, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2). If none of the above is reserved, the main CPU 110a determines in step S215 whether or not 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag.

When 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and when 01H is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; No), the process is transferred to step S217.
In step S217, the main CPU 110a sets 01H to the customer waiting state determination flag so that the customer waiting state designation command is not set many times in step S218 described later.
In step S218, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

(Big hit judgment process)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot determination process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S221, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 10. When the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first start port (step S221; Yes), the process is transferred to step S222, and when it is determined that it is not the first start port (step S221; No), the process is transferred to step 223. ..

In step S222, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S223, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.
In step S224, the main CPU 110a refers to the current stochastic gaming state and the jackpot determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, and the selected jackpot determination table, and "big hit". It is determined whether it is "missing" or "missing".

In step S225, when the main CPU 110a determines "big hit" (step S225; Yes), the process is transferred to step S226, and when it is determined to be "missing" (step S225; No), the process is transferred to step S227.
In step S226, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for big hits. On the other hand, in step S227, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for loss.

In step S228, the main CPU 110a selects the type of the start port from which the jackpot determination is to be performed, the jackpot symbol determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, and the selected table. By collating, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) is determined. The determined special symbol is used to determine the operation mode for opening and closing the big prize opening 13a in the big hit game process described later, and is used to determine the game state after the big hit game is completed.
In step S229, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S228 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S241, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S212 has elapsed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the fluctuation time has not elapsed. When it is determined (step S241; No), the current special symbol variation processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), the processing is transferred to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 110a stops the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S228 on the first special symbol first display 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b. Display. Specifically, the special symbol stop display data is set in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 19a or the second special symbol 1st display 19b, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result. Will be.

In step S243, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S244, when the main CPU 110a starts the stop display of the special symbol as described above, the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 250 counter) is set in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted by "1" every 2 ms in step S110.
In step S245, the main CPU 110a sets "2" in the special figure special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S251, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S244 has elapsed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the symbol stop time has elapsed. If it is determined that the case (step S251; Yes), the process is transferred to step S252, and if it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S251; No), the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S252, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the time-saving game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the time-saving game state), and the time-saving game flag. When the time saving game flag is "ON" in the storage area (step S252; Yes), the process is transferred to step S253, and when the time saving game flag is "OFF" in the time saving game flag storage area (step S252; No). ), The process is transferred to step S258.

In step S253, the main CPU 110a is updated by subtracting "1" from the number of time-saving games (J) stored in the time-saving game number (J) storage area.
In step S254, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new number of time-saving games (J) is "0", and determines that the number of time-saving games (J) is "0" (step S254; Yes). ), The process is transferred to step 255, and when it is determined that the number of time-saving games (J) is not "0" (step S254; No), the process is transferred to step S258.

In step S255, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game flag set in the time-saving game flag storage area to "OFF". As a result, the time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state.

In step S256, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game state erasing data for erasing (turning off the LED) the display (LED on) of the time-saving game state display 19h in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time-saving game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, whereby the time-saving game state indicator is displayed. The display of 19h will be erased.

In step S257, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed erasing data for erasing (turning off the LED) the display (LED on) of the right-handed first display 19j in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the right-handed erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. The display of 19j will be erased.

In step S258, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the high-probability game state). When the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (step S258; Yes), the process is transferred to step S259, and the high-probability game flag is "OFF" in the high-probability game flag storage area. If so (step S258; No), the process is transferred to step S263.

In step S259, the main CPU 110a is updated by subtracting "1" from the high-probability game count (X) stored in the high-probability game count (X) storage area.
In step S260, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new high-probability game count (X) is "0", and determines that the high-probability game count (X) is "0" (step S260). Yes), the process is transferred to step 261 and when it is determined that the high probability number of games (X) is not "0" (step S260; No), the process is transferred to step S263.

In step S261, the main CPU 110a turns the high-probability game flag installed in the high-probability game flag storage area "OFF". As a result, the high-probability gaming state ends and the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state.

In step S262, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability gaming state erasing data for erasing (turning off the LED) the display (LED on) of the high-probability gaming state display 19g in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the high-probability game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, whereby the high-probability game state is set. The display of the display 19g will be erased.

In step S263, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state, and sets the game state designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S264, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, when it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot symbol (stop symbol data = 01 to 06), and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot symbol. (Step S264; Yes), the process is transferred to step S266, and when it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (step S264; No), the process is transferred to step S277.

In step S277, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a specific lost symbol, or whether or not the variable display of the lost special symbol has reached a predetermined number of fluctuations. Specifically, whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is a specific lost symbol (stop symbol data 20: specific first special symbol), or whether or not the first and lost symbols are lost. In step S265, when it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has reached 750 times in succession and it is determined that the symbol is not a specific lost symbol or the predetermined number of fluctuations has not been reached (step S277; No). When the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric processing data, ends the current special symbol stop processing, and determines that the specific lost symbol or the predetermined number of fluctuations has been reached, the processing is transferred to step S278.

When it is determined that the specified lost symbol or the number of fluctuations of the first and second special symbols of the loss has reached 750 times in succession (step S277; Yes), in step S278, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process. I do. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIGS. 10 (2) and 10 (3), the time-saving game is stored in the time-saving game flag storage area based on the game state data when the symbol is stopped or the game state data when the number of fluctuations is reached. Performs the process of setting the flag.

In step S279, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game number setting process. With reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIGS. 10 (2) and 10 (3), a predetermined number of times (1200 times) is set in the time-saving gaming machine number (J) storage area.
Subsequently, in step S280, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state with reference to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S266, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the time-saving game flag storage area, and if the time-saving game flag is "ON" (step S266; Yes), step S267. When the time saving game flag is "OFF" (step S266; No), the process is transferred to step S268.

In step S267, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game state erasing data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time-saving game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the time-saving game state indicator is displayed. The display of 19h will be erased (LED will be turned off).

In step S268, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area, and if the high-probability game flag is "ON" (step S268; Yes). The process is transferred to step S269, and when the high probability game flag is "OFF" (step S268; No), the process is transferred to step S270.

In step S269, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability gaming state erasing data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the high-probability game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability game state is obtained. The display of the display 19g will be erased (the LED will be turned off).

In step S270, the main CPU 110a sets "3" in the special figure special electric processing data.
In step S271, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game number (X) storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, and the time-saving game number (J) storage area are cleared.

In step S272, the main CPU 110a sets the large winning opening open / close control table. Specifically, the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 is referred to, and the jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set.

In step S273, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S274, the main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot game (first jackpot to third jackpot) based on the jackpot opening / closing control table set in step S272, and opens according to the type of jackpot game. Set the specified command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the opening designation command of the jackpot game is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S275, the main CPU 110a sets the round number display data for displaying the round number of the jackpot game (LED lighting) on the round number display 19i in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the round number display 19i is displayed. The number of rounds will be displayed.

In step S276, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed display data for causing the right-handed first display 19j to display the right-handed display (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and performs the special symbol stop processing this time. To finish. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. Right-handed display will be performed at 19j.

(Big hit game processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot game process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S281, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. For example, if "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area, it is currently opening. Therefore, when the round game count (R) storage area is referred to and it is determined that the opening is currently in progress ( Step S281; Yes), the process is transferred to step S282, and when it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress (step S281; No), the process is transferred to step S286.

In step S282, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter set in step S273 has become "0", and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. When the opening time has not elapsed (step S282; No), the main CPU 110a ends the jackpot game process this time, and when the opening time has elapsed (step S282; Yes), the process shifts to step S283.

In step S283, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since the round game has not been performed even once, "1" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

In step S284, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area (K) to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the large winning opening 13a has not been opened yet, "1" is stored in the opening number (K) storage area. Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S285, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, the round designation command for the first open round is set.

In step S286, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening 13a is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is open (step S286; Yes), the process is transferred to step S287, and when it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is not open (step S286; No), The process is transferred to step S289.

In step S287, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 13a is satisfied. This "opening end condition" is that the value of the large winning opening ball entry counter (C) has reached the maximum number (for example, 9) or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). That) is applicable.
When the main CPU 110a determines that the "opening end condition" is satisfied (step S287; Yes), the process is transferred to step S288, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied (step S287; No). , End this jackpot game process.

In step S288, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process (interval process). Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the large winning opening 13a is closed. Further, with reference to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272 above, the closing time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of openings (K). Set it on the counter. Further, a large winning opening closing designation command indicating that the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the open state to the closed state is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the command for designating the closing of the winning opening is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S289, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening 13a is currently closed (during the interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is closed (step S289; Yes), the process is transferred to step S290, and when it is determined that the large winning opening 13a is not closed (step S289; No). The process is transferred to step S299.

In step S290, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening 13a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has become "0". When the closing time is completed (step S290; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S291, and when the closing time is not completed (step S290; No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S291, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not this round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening entry counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or the number of openings (K) has reached the maximum number of openings. When the main CPU 110a determines that the current round has ended (step S291; Yes), the process shifts to step S293, and when it determines that the current round has not ended (step S291; No), the process proceeds to step S292. Move the process.

In step S292, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Number of open times (K) "1" is added to the number of open times (K) stored in the storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S293, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round is over. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the current jackpot game. When the main CPU 110a determines that the final round is over (step S293; Yes), the process is transferred to step S297, and when it is determined that the final round is not completed (step S293; No), the process is transferred to step S294. ..

In step S294, the main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (K) storage area and the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game count (R) is stored in the round game count (R). Is added by "1" and updated (R ← R + 1).

In step 295, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 13b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 13a is opened. In addition, referring to the large winning opening open / close control table set in step S272, the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is set to the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and opening times (K). Set to.

In step S296, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S297, the main CPU 110 performs an ending transition process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open number (K) storage area, the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game number (R) storage area to clear the value of each storage area. In addition, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data.

In step S298, the main CPU 110a sets the ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S299, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress, and if the ending is in progress (step S299; Yes), the process is transferred to step S300, and if the ending is not in progress (step S299; No). The jackpot game process this time is finished.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (step S300; Yes), the process is transferred to step S301 and the ending time has not elapsed. If it is determined (step S300; No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.
In step S301, the main CPU 110a sets "4" in the special figure special electric processing data and ends the current big hit game processing.

(Special game end processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a special game (big hit game) end process by the main control board 110.
In step S321, the main CPU 110a loads the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area and the game information in the game state buffer.

In step S322, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process. Specifically, with reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), a high probability at the end of the jackpot game based on the special figure stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. Performs processing for whether or not to set a high-probability game flag in the game flag storage area. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is any one of "01", "02", "04", and "05", the high-probability game flag is set (turned on) in the high-probability game flag storage area.

In step S323, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process. Specifically, with reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), the number of high-probability games (X) is based on the special figure stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. ) Set the storage area a predetermined number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the high probability game count (X) storage area.

In step S324, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), the time-saving game is stored in the time-saving game flag storage area based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. Process whether to set the flag. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", a flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area.

In step S325, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game number setting process. With reference to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), a predetermined number of times is stored in the time-saving game number (J) storage area based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer. Let me set it. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50,000 times are set in the time-saving game count (J) storage area.

In step S326, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state with reference to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S327, the main CPU 110a sets the round number erasing data for erasing the display (LED lighting) of the round number display 19i (LED turning off) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the round number display 19i The display will be erased.

In step S328, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the special game end processing this time.

(Fuzu Fuden control processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a general-purpose electric power control process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S331, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general-purpose electric processing data, and in step S332, calculates the branch destination address from the loaded general-purpose electric processing data.

In step S333, if the normal symbol processing data = 0 (step S333; Yes), the main CPU 110a performs the normal symbol variation processing in step S334, and ends the current normal drawing control processing. If the Fuzu Fuden processing data is not 0 (step S333; No), it is determined that the Fuzu Fuden processing data = 1, auxiliary game processing is performed in step S335, and the current Fuzu Fuden control processing is terminated. ..

(Ordinary symbol fluctuation processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol variation process by the main control board 110.
First, in step S341, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed (the normal symbol time counter is not "0") (step S341; Yes), the process is transferred to step S354 and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not being performed (the normal symbol time counter is "0"). In the case of (step S341; No), the process is transferred to step S342.

In step S342, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area that stores the normal symbol hold number is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is 1 or more (step S342; Yes), the process is transferred to step S343, and the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is not 1 or more. If it is determined (step S342; No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S343, the main CPU 110a is updated (G ← G + 1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area. In step S344, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area subtracted in step S343. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is normally stored in the symbol hold. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the hit determination random value, the hit symbol determination random value, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted.

In step S345, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process. Specifically, the current time-saving game state and the hit determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area are collated with the hit determination table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 14 (1). Judgment as to whether or not it is a hit (a lottery for winning a normal symbol) is performed.

In step S346, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, the figure shows whether or not the game is currently in the reduced working hours state, the result of the hit determination in step S345, and the random value for stopping the normal figure stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. The type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the stop symbol determination table of the normal symbol shown in 14 (2), and is set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

In step S347, the main CPU 110a sets the normal map designation command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol data determined in step S346 in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the general map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S348, the main CPU 110a performs a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, the figure shows whether or not the game is currently in the reduced working hours state, the result of the hit determination in step S345, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined by collating with the fluctuation pattern determination table of the normal symbol shown in 14 (3).

In step S349, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol determined in step S348 in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol determined in step S349 in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S351, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to display the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The variable display of the vessel 19c is started.

In step S352, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S353, the main CPU 110a sets the above-mentioned normal symbol hold display data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current normal symbol variation processing. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the normal symbol hold first. The number of reserved figures is displayed on the display 19f.

In step S354, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S350 is "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S354; Yes), the process is transferred to step S355, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has not elapsed (step S354; No). , End the normal symbol change processing this time.

In step S355, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol stop display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to stop and display the normal symbol determined in step S346 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the vessel 19c, and the player is notified of the determination result of the lottery.

In step S356, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol confirmation command indicating a stop display of the normal symbol in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S357, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol, and if it is a hit stop symbol (step S357; Yes), shifts the process to step S358 and moves the process to the hit stop symbol. If not (step S357; No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S358, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the normal drawing data and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 29.

In step S359, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 110a first sets the opening mode determination table of the second starting port in the main RAM 110c, and sets "1" in the opening count (S) stored in the open count (S) storage area. Add and update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second starting port 11a has not been opened even once, "1" is stored in the opening number (S) storage area. Then, in order to open the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 11a is opened. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S), and the normal symbol variation processing of this time is performed. To finish. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

(Auxiliary game processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an auxiliary game process on the main control board 110.
First, in step S361, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 11a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 11d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the second starting port 11a is open (step S361; Yes), the process shifts to step S362, and when it is determined that the second starting port 11a is not open (step S361; No). ), The process is transferred to step S367.

In step S362, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition of the second starting port 11a is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second start port entry counter (L) has reached the specified number (10), or the opening time in the current number of opening times (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0). ) Applies. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S362; Yes), the process is transferred to step S363, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S362; No), the auxiliary this time is performed. End the game process.

In step S363, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port closing process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second starting port 11a is closed. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359, the closing time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). .. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S364, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) is the number of times the second starting port 11a is opened in advance, or the value of the second starting port entry counter (L) is a specified number (10). (Individual) has been reached. When the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied (step S364; Yes), the process is transferred to step S365, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied (step S365; No), this time. Ends the auxiliary game processing of.

In step S365, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game end process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (S) storage area and the second start port entry counter (L) storage area of the second start port 11a to clear the value of each storage area.

In step S366, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the normal symbol processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S367, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second starting port 11a has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter has become "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has ended (step S367; Yes), the process is transferred to step S368, and when it is determined that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has not ended. (Step S367; No), this auxiliary game processing is terminated.

In step S368, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port opening process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 11d in order to open the opening / closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 11b is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 11a is opened. Further, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S) with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359.

(Explanation of command)
30 and 31 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.
One command is composed of 2 bytes in the command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. This command is composed of a 1-byte "MODE" as a first data unit and a 1-byte "DATA" as a second data unit. "MODE" indicates the type of command, and "DATA" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 by using one serial signal and using pacing synchronization.

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, the effect symbol designation command may indicate the type of the jackpot or the game state. I can say.

In this effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol determined when the variable display of the special symbol is started is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the effect symbol designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

This first special symbol storage designation command is controlled by the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in step S134 or step S206, the first special symbol storage corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is performed. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the first special symbol storage designation command, for example, the first special symbol storage 1 designation command and the first special indicating that the number of reservations stored in the first special symbol storage number (U1) storage area is "1". The number of reserved symbols (U1) There is a first special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reserved symbols stored in the storage area is "2".

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

This second special symbol storage designation command is controlled by the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area increases or decreases in step S161 or step S206, the second special symbol storage corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is performed. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the second special symbol storage designation command, for example, the second special symbol storage 1 designation command and the second special indicating that the number of reservations stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is "1". The number of reserved symbols (U2) There is a second special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reserved symbols stored in the storage area is "2".
In this embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol memory designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E2H", and the type of special symbol (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol). ), The DATA information is set, and if it is the first special symbol, "DATA" is set to "01H", and if it is the second special symbol, "DATA" is set to "02H". That is, as the special symbol confirmation command, there are a first special symbol confirmation command and a second special symbol confirmation command.

This special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 19a or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 19b in step S243, the special symbol confirmation command is the transmission data for effect of the main RAM 110c. Set in the storage area. Immediately after that, the special symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E2H" and "DATA" is set to "03H". This normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 19c in step S356, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 19a, and "MODE" is set to "E6H", and various types are used. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol first display 19a is started. The designated command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S210, the first special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special figure variation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the first special symbol variation pattern specification command, the first special symbol variation pattern 01 designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the loss with the variation time of 8 seconds in the non-time saving game state, the jackpot with the variation time of 40 seconds in the non-time saving game state. There is a first special symbol variation pattern 06 designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of.

The "second special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol first display 19b, and "MODE" is set to "E7H", and various types are used. DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command specifies the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol first display 19b is started. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S210, the second special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special figure variation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the second special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern 41 designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the loss with the fluctuation time of 10 seconds in the time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the time-saving gaming state. There is a second special symbol variation pattern 46 designation command corresponding to the pattern.
In this embodiment, the "first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" and the "second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special figure fluctuation pattern designation command".

The "starting opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)" is information indicating the result of pre-determining the jackpot determination result, and when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 10, "MODE" is "E8H". When set and based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information.

This start opening prize designation command (look-ahead designation command) is a start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start winning prize information (preliminary determination result) acquired when the game ball wins in the first start opening 10 or the second start opening 11a. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S139 or step S166, a start opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning information acquired by winning the starting opening 10 or 11a is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the start opening winning designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "open maximum count designation command" indicates the maximum number of winning balls (10) to the large winning opening 13a in one round game, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and "DATA". Is set to "0AH".
In this open maximum count designation command, the open maximum count designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when one round game is started. Immediately after that, the open maximum count designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game corresponding to each type of jackpot, "MODE" is set in "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. There is.

In this round designation command, when one round game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of started rounds is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the opening / closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a is opened in step S285 or step S296, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds at the time of opening is sent to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set. Immediately after that, the round designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a round designation command, when the first round game is performed, the first round designation command is transmitted, and when the second round game is performed, there is an open second round designation command.

The "large winning opening closing designation command (interval designation command)" indicates that the closing period (interval) of the large winning opening 13a between rounds is set, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and "DATA". Is set to "7FH".
This big winning opening closing designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the closing period (interval) of the big winning opening 13a between rounds is started. Specifically, in step S288, the large winning opening closing designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the large winning opening closing designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "opening designation command" indicates that a jackpot game (special game state) corresponding to various jackpots (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot) is started, and "MODE" is set in "EBH" and the jackpot is hit. DATA information is set according to the type.

In this opening designation command, when a jackpot game corresponding to various jackpots (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot) is started, the opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S274, the opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the opening designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the opening designation command, for example, there is an opening designation command for a probability variation jackpot in the case of a probability variation jackpot, and an opening designation command for a normal jackpot in the case of a normal jackpot.

The "ending designation command" indicates that the jackpot game corresponding to various jackpots (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot) has ended, "MODE" is set in "ECH", and DATA is set according to the type of jackpot. Information is set.

In this ending designation command, when the jackpot game corresponding to various jackpots (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot) is completed, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game end process in step S298, the ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the ending designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As the ending specification command, there is an ending specification command for a probability change jackpot in the case of a probability variation jackpot, and an ending specification command for a normal jackpot in the case of a normal jackpot.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 19c. "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the DATA is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Information is set.
In this normal map designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the normal map designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in step S347, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal map designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 19c, and "MODE" is set to "EEH" to match the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols. DATA information is set.
In this normal symbol fluctuation pattern specification command, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the normal symbol first display 19c is started, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the effect control board. It is sent to 130. Specifically, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in step S349, the normal symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the normal symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c. Will be done. Immediately after that, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA is set according to the number of reserved storages. Information is set.
In this normal symbol storage designation command, when the reserved storage number stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is switched, the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the hold storage number is transmitted to the effect control board 130. .. Specifically, when the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area increases or decreases in step S177 or step S345, the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the hold storage number after the increase or decrease is the main. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "game state designation command" indicates the game state of whether or not it is a high-probability game state and whether or not it is a time-saving game state. "MODE" is set to "FAH", and the low-probability game state is set. In addition, "DATA" is set to "10H" in the non-time-saving gaming state, and "DATA" is set to "11H" in the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. If so, "DATA" is set to "12H", and if it is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, "DATA" is set to "13H".

This game state specification command is used when the initialization process is executed, when the special symbol changes, when the special symbol changes, when the jackpot game starts and when the jackpot ends, when the specific lost symbol stops, and when the lost special symbol is lost. When the fluctuation display of the above reaches a predetermined number of fluctuations, a game state designation command corresponding to the set game state is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the RAM clear process (initialization process) is performed, when the variation display of the special symbol is started in the step S210, the high probability game flag, the number of high probability games, and the time saving game are started in the step S263. When the flag and the number of time-saving games (J) may have changed, when the time-saving game flag and the number of times of time-saving games (J) are set in step S279, the high-probability game flag and high probability in step S326. When the game count, the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game number (J) are set, the game state specification command corresponding to the set game state is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the game state designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In the "power-on designation command" and "power recovery designation command", when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command is sent to the effect control board 130 according to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized. Will be sent.
The "power-on designation command" indicates that the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "00H". Has been done. Specifically, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on and the information stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared.

The "power recovery designation command" indicates that turning on the power to the game machine 1 does not involve the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the game when "MODE" is set to "FBH" and the power is cut off. If the state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, "DATA" is set to "01H", and if the state is a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, "DATA" is set to "02H", and the high probability is high. "DATA" is set to "03H" in the gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, and "DATA" is set to "04H" in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. Specifically, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state has been entered in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed. "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "05H". It is set.
This customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state designation command is set in the customer waiting state in step S217, and then immediately set in the production transmission data storage area. The customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "setting value designation command" indicates the setting value set in the gaming machine 1, and specifically, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command is issued. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set in "FDH", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 11a, when it is detected by the magnetic detection switch 58a or the radio wave detection switch 58b, when it is detected by the prize confirmation detection switch (not shown), or when the opening / closing door 3 is used. An error designation command corresponding to an error type is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the saucer 5 is opened, when the saucer 5 is full, or when a payout abnormality occurs.

Specifically, when a magnetic / radio wave abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination process of step S109, when an abnormality winning is determined in the winning confirmation detection switch input process of step S126, an illegal entry is made in step S157. When the determination is made, when the payout control board 120 detects that the opening / closing door 3 is open, the saucer 5 is full, or the game ball is insufficient for payout, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is produced in the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As error specification commands, there are a magnetic anomaly error specification command corresponding to a magnetic anomaly and a full anomaly error specification command corresponding to the full tray 5.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set in "FEH", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.
In this error cancellation designation command, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the opening / closing door 3 is closed, the saucer 5 is full, and the payout abnormality is resolved.

Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects that the opening / closing door 3 is closed, the saucer 5 is full, and the shortage of game balls for paying out is resolved, the error cancellation designation corresponding to the type of error canceled is detected. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130m will be described.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the main process by the effect control unit 130 m.
When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S510, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits the timer interrupt process. Next, in step S520, the sub CPU 130a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b and initializes and sets the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c in response to the power being turned on.

At this time, the sub CPU 130a includes image display devices 16 and 18, audio output device 9, effect button device 6A (button drive motor 6c, button vibration motor 6d, button light emitting LED 6e), effect lever device 6C (lever vibration motor 6j, lever). Light emitting LED 6k), panel drive device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C, stepping motor, vibration motor), panel lighting device 23, frame lighting device 27, winning opening lamp NR, and the like are controlled. Then, after receiving the initialization OK signal for the initialization instruction signal from both the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the process is transferred to step S530.

In step S530, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption.
In step S540, the sub CPU 130a performs a random number update process for effect. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S540 is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by the effect control unit 130 m.
A clock pulse generation circuit for reset provided in the effect control unit 130 m generates a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (2 ms), reads a timer interrupt processing program, and executes the timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m. Will be done.

In step S601, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.
In step S602, the sub CPU 130a updates various timer counters used by the effect control unit 130m.
In step S603, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command transmitted from the main control board 110, the effect control unit 130m generates a command reception interrupt process and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, the analysis process of the command received in step S603 is performed.

In step S604, the sub CPU 130a includes the special symbol second display 20a, 20b, the normal symbol second display 20c, the special symbol hold second display 20d, 20e, the normal symbol hold second display 20f, and the right-handed second display. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the display 20g is performed.

In step S605, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process of transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Further, the display output process for outputting the signal of the display control data created in step S604 is performed.
In step S606, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing)
34 and 35 are flowcharts for explaining the command analysis process of the command received from the main control board 110 by the effect control unit 130m.
First, in step S610, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command is stored in the receive buffer. When the command is not stored in the receive buffer (step S610; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the command analysis process this time, and when the command is stored in the receive buffer (step S610; Yes), the sub CPU 130a goes to step S611. Move the process.

In step S611, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error designation command, and if it is determined to be an error designation command (step S611; Yes), processing is performed in step S612. If it is determined that the command is not an error specification command (step S611; No), the process is transferred to step S613.

In step S612, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process for notifying that an error related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification processing, the type of the error specification command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of the generated error is determined, the determined error notification effect is set in the error notification effect storage area, and the determined error notification effect is determined. The error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the above to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step S613, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error cancellation designation command, and if it is determined that the command is an error cancellation designation command (step S613; Yes), the sub CPU 130a determines in step S614. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not an error release designation command (step S613; No), the process is transferred to step S615.

In step S614, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification release process for canceling the error notification during execution. In this error notification release processing, the type of the error cancellation specification command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the resolved error type is cleared from the error notification effect storage area, and the release information of the resolved error notification effect is displayed in the image control unit. 140, in order to transmit to the lamp control unit 150, the error notification release designation command based on the resolved error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S615, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power-on designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a power-on designation command (step S615; Yes), step S616 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a power-on designation command (step S616; No), the process is transferred to step S617.

In step S616, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on, the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), and the information of the power-on effect for notifying that the power is turned on is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp. In order to transmit to the control unit 150, the power-on notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S617, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a power recovery designation command (step S617; Yes), the sub CPU 130a goes to step S618. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a power recovery designation command (step S617; No), the process is transferred to S619.

In step S618, the sub CPU 130a performs a power restoration process. In this process, in order to transmit the information of the power restoration effect for notifying that the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on and the power is turned on to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the power restoration notification designation command is subordinated. Set in the transmission buffer of RAM 130c.

In step S619, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state specification command, and if it is determined that the command is a customer waiting state specification command (step S619; Yes), step S619. When the process is transferred to S620 and it is determined that the command is not a customer waiting command (step S619; No), the process is transferred to step S621.

In step S620, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process. In this process, 30 seconds or 60 seconds after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the image display devices 16 and 18 display the customer waiting demo image, the power saving image, and the like.

In step S621, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; Yes), step S621. When the process is transferred to S622 and it is determined that the command is not a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; No), the process is transferred to step S623.

In step S622, the sub CPU 130a performs the special figure hold storage update process. In this process, the special figure hold storage number is analyzed from the special symbol storage designation command, and the analyzed special figure hold storage number is set in the special figure hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S623, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command), and determines that the command is a starting opening winning designation command (step S623). ; Yes), the process is transferred to step S624, and when it is determined that the command is not the start opening winning designation command (step S623; No), the process is transferred to step S627.

In step S624, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change notice determination process. In this process, based on the start winning information stored in the start winning opening designation command, the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon displayed on the image display device 16 is a special mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal mode. It is determined whether or not to do so and one of a plurality of special modes having different jackpot expectations.

Specifically, the result of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the command and the variation pattern are specified from the start winning opening designation command, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the special mode according to the jackpot expectation. Determine a change scenario to change from to another special aspect. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, blue in the special display mode 1, green in the special display mode 2, red in the special display mode 3, and a special character in the special display mode 4. Is set to. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of normal display mode (white) <special display mode 1 (blue) <special display mode 2 (green) <special display mode 3 (red) <special display mode 4 (special character icon). It has become. Then, an icon display designation command for displaying the icon corresponding to the determined change scenario on the first image display device 16 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S625, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect determination process. In this process, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols based on the start winning information (preliminary determination result, etc.) of the start winning opening designation command. At the same time, when executing, one or a plurality of advance notice effects are determined from a plurality of types of advance notice effects.

The "continuous notice effect" is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect by an effect button or a movable effect member) that suggests the expected degree of execution of a jackpot game over one or more variable effects (including a variable effect of a look-ahead target). It is a kind of pre-reading notice production that executes production).

In step S626, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect determination process. In this process, based on the start winning information (preliminary judgment result, etc.) of the start winning opening designation command, the lamp change effect by the winning opening lamp NR is executed over the variation display (variation effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols. Whether or not it is determined, and when it is executed, the type of change (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the light emitting mode of the winning opening lamp is determined.
"Lamp change effect" is a look-ahead that suggests the expectation of performing a jackpot game by changing the light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR (white → blue, blue → red, etc.) over one or more variation effects. It is a kind of notice production.
According to the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the change of the hold icon. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the effect of changing the icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In step S627, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special figure variation pattern specification command, and determines that the command is a special figure variation pattern specification command (step S627; Yes). , The process is transferred to step S628, and when it is determined that the command is not a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (step S627; No), the process is transferred to step S630.

In step S628, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining one variation effect pattern from a plurality of types of variation effect patterns with reference to the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 or FIG.

In step S629, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot advance notice effect based on the variation effect pattern to be executed.
The "big hit notice effect" is a pre-reach effect, a mid-reach effect, and a post-reach effect that executes a predetermined effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed during the variable effect or that the jackpot game is executed. Is.

In step S630, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an effect symbol designation command, and if it is determined that the command is an effect symbol designation command (step S630; Yes), step S631 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not the effect symbol designation command (step S630; No), the process is transferred to step S632.

In step S631, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect symbol determination process for determining the type of the effect symbol 16a to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 16 based on the special symbol information of the received effect symbol designation command. In the effect symbol determination process, the special symbol information of the effect symbol designation command is analyzed, the effect symbol data constituting the combination of the effect symbols 16a is determined according to the presence or absence of the jackpot and the type of the jackpot, and the determined effect symbol data is used. Set in the production symbol storage area.

In step S632, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol confirmation command, and if it is determined that the command is a special symbol confirmation command (step S632; Yes), step S633 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a special symbol confirmation command (step S632; No), the process is transferred to step S634.

In step S633, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, in order to stop and display the variation of the effect symbol, the data based on the effect symbol data determined in step S631 and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 16a are transmitted to the sub RAM 130c. Set in the buffer.

In step 634, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command, and if it is determined that the command is a normal symbol storage designation command (step S634; Yes), step. When the process is transferred to S635 and it is determined that the command is not a normal symbol memory designation command (step S634; No), the process is transferred to step S636.

In step S635, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the normal symbol hold storage number from the normal symbol storage designation command, and displays the analyzed normal symbol hold storage number on the normal symbol hold second display 20c. Is set in a predetermined processing area.

As shown in FIG. 35, in step S636, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal map variation pattern specification command, and determines that the command is a normal map variation pattern specification command. If (step S636; Yes), the process is transferred to step S637, and if it is determined that the command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern specification command (step S636; No), the process is transferred to step S638.
In step S637, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal map variation effect pattern determination process for determining one normal map variation effect pattern from a plurality of types of normal map variation effect patterns based on the received normal map variation pattern designation command. ..

In step S638, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command, and if it is determined that the command is a normal symbol confirmation command (step S638; Yes), in step S638. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a normal symbol confirmation command (step S638; No), the process is transferred to step S640.
In step S639, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal symbol fluctuation stop process. In the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing, in order to stop and display the normal symbol effect symbol, the effect symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol confirmation command and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol effect symbol are transmitted to the sub RAM 130c. Set in the buffer.

In step S640, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state specification command, and if it is determined that the command is a game state specification command (step S640; Yes), step S641 is performed. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the command is not a game state specification command (step S640; No), the process is transferred to step S643.
In step S641, the sub CPU 130a sets the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 130c.

In step S642, the sub CPU 130 performs an effect mode setting process for setting any of a plurality of effect modes A to G related to the execution of the variable effect.
The effect mode notifies the currently set gaming state in a predetermined notification mode.
Specifically, with reference to the effect mode setting table shown in FIGS. 36 (1) and 36 (2), it is notified that the current gaming state is the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Set any of the normal modes A to C, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, set the probability variation mode D or E to notify that the current game state is the high-probability time-saving game state, and set the low-probability time-saving game state. In the gaming state, the time saving mode F or G for notifying that the current gaming state is the low probability time saving gaming state is set.

In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, as a notification mode, for example, an effect image for notifying the current game information is displayed on the image display device 16 and / or is held to be displayed on the image display device 16. By making the notification mode of the icon image, the variable icon image, the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol image different from the notification mode in the other effect modes, the current game state (low probability non-time saving game state, low probability time saving game). The state, high probability time saving game state) is notified.

For example, in the normal mode A, a background image for normal use, which is an image of a mountain, and an effect design image of a display mode composed of a numerical value (identification part) and a character image (decorative part) are displayed, and for normal mode A. While the BGM of is output, in the probabilistic mode D, a background image for probabilistic change imagining the sea and an effect design image of a display mode consisting of only numbers (identification unit) are displayed, and the probabilistic change mode D is displayed. BGM is output. Further, in the time saving mode F, the background image for the time saving imagining the sky and the effect design image of the display mode composed only of the numbers (identification unit) are displayed, and the BGM for the time saving mode F is output. ..
In addition, the right-handed promotion image (the image of "right-handed →") is displayed in the probability variation modes D and E and the time-saving modes F and G, while the right-handed promotion image is displayed in the normal modes A to C. Not done.

If the game ball wins in the first starting port 10a in the probabilistic mode D, E (time saving mode F, G), the effect symbol image and the background image are displayed, but the hold icon image and the variable icon are displayed. The image is not displayed. That is, when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C, or when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, or when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C. When the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a during D to G, the reserved image and the variable icon image are more likely to be displayed.
If the game is played with the aim of winning the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G (left-handed game), the right-handed promotion image is continuously displayed, and "right-handed" is also displayed. The message "Please do" is displayed, and the voice "Please hit right" is output to notify that the current production mode is the probability change / time saving mode.

For example, as a predetermined switching condition for switching from the normal mode A to the normal mode B, for example, the predetermined number of guaranteed stays has elapsed, or the mode shifts after the predetermined number of guaranteed stays has elapsed. Winning a lottery can be mentioned. Specifically, when the normal mode A is set, the next game (21 from the start of the game in the normal mode A) is performed on condition that the number of times the game is played in the normal mode A is 20 times. Switch from the rotation) to the normal mode B. Alternatively, when the normal mode A is set, after the number of times the game is played in the normal mode A is 20 times, the predetermined game is started from the next game (21st rotation from the start of the game in the normal mode A). The mode transition lottery with the winning probability (for example, 1/5) is executed at each start of one game, and on the condition that the mode transition lottery is won, the game won in the mode transition lottery is changed from the normal mode A to the normal mode. It may be switched to B. The same applies to the probability variation mode and the time saving mode.

As shown in FIG. 36 (2), the time saving modes F and G are set according to the three game state setting triggers.
Specifically, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or when the jackpot game is not executed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the number of consecutive executions of the variable display of the special symbol of loss is executed. When the predetermined number of times (750 times) is reached and the b time-saving game state is set, or when the low-probability non-time-saving game state is set, the big hit game is not executed and the first special symbol of loss is stopped and displayed. When the c time saving game state is set, the time saving modes F and G are set. That is, the time saving modes F and G are set regardless of which of the time saving game state a, the time saving game state, and the time saving gaming state c are set.

As shown in FIG. 36 (2), when the time saving game state is set, the time saving mode entry effect is executed during the jackpot game (during the ending game) immediately before the time saving mode setting, and the “right-handed” is performed. Audio is output. Further, a card return promotion display for urging the player to return the prepaid card and alerting the player to forget to remove the prepaid card and a immersive caution display for alerting the player to be enthusiastic are performed.

b When the time saving game state is set, the time saving mode entry effect is executed when the time saving mode is set, and the “right-handed” voice is output. During the change display of the special symbol of the loss of the predetermined number of times (750th time) immediately before the time reduction mode setting, the time reduction mode entry effect is not executed and the "right-handed" voice is not output.

c When the time saving game state is set, the time saving mode entry effect is executed when the time saving mode is set, and the “right-handed” voice is output. The time saving mode entry effect is not executed and the "right-handed" voice is not output during the variable display in which the first special symbol of the loss specified immediately before the time saving mode setting is stopped and displayed.

When the time-saving game state is set, the time-saving modes F and G are set, and when the time-saving game state is set, or when the time-saving game state is set, the time-saving mode F, A time saving mode of a notification mode different from the notification mode of G (for example, an effect pattern image, a background image) may be set.

In step S643, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening designation command, and if it is determined that the command is an opening designation command (step S643; Yes), processing is performed in step S644. If it is determined that the command is not the opening designation command (step S643; No), the process is transferred to step S645.

In step S644, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot start effect pattern. In the jackpot effect pattern determination process, the jackpot start effect pattern is determined based on the opening designation command, the determined jackpot start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot effect pattern is input to the image control unit 140. , The corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the lamp control unit 150.

In step S645, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command, and if it is determined to be a round designation command (step S645; Yes), processing is performed in step S646. If it is determined that the command is not a round designation command (step S645; No), the process is transferred to step S647.

In step S646, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect pattern determination process during the round to determine the jackpot effect pattern. In the in-round effect pattern determination process, the in-round effect pattern is determined for each round to be started, based on the round designation command having information about how many round games are started. Then, the determined effect pattern during the round is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. ..

In step S647, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending designation command, and if it is determined to be an ending designation command (step S647; Yes), processing is performed in step S648. If it is determined that the command is not the ending designation command (step S647; No), the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S648, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In the jackpot end effect pattern determination process, the jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending specification command, the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined jackpot end effect pattern is input to the image control unit. The corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

(Continuous notice production decision processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a continuous advance notice effect determination process by the effect control unit 130 m.
When the start winning opening designation command (look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a executes the continuous advance notice effect determination process.

In step S651, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start winning opening designation command (look-ahead designation command), and grasps whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the type of the jackpot game, and the effect content (special figure scheduled variation pattern).
In step S652, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is currently feasible period, and if it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is feasible period (step S652; Yes), the process is performed in step S653. If it is determined that it is not the feasible period of the continuous advance notice effect (step S652; No), the process is transferred to step S665.

Examples of the continuous advance notice effect include an effect advance notice effect, an effect advance notice effect, a vibration advance notice effect, a look-ahead zone effect, and a combination of these a plurality of advance notice effects.
In the "feature motion advance notice effect", any one of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is designated at the timing immediately after the start of each variation effect in one or a plurality of variation effects or at the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. It is a predetermined effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation of the execution of the jackpot game by executing the accessory effect that is operated in the operation mode.

The "effect notice effect" is a predetermined color (blue, green, red) around or in the background of the effect symbol 16a at the timing immediately after the start of each variation effect in one or more variation effects or at the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. It is a predetermined effect that intermittently suggests the expected degree of execution of the jackpot game by executing the effect effect effect of displaying the effect image (effect effect image) of the above).

"Vibration notice effect (vibration notice at the start of fluctuation)" executes a vibration effect by the effect buttons 6a / movable effect members 17A to 17C in a predetermined effect mode at the timing immediately after the start of each variation effect in one or more variation effects. By doing so, it is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation of the execution of the jackpot game.
The effect mode of the button vibration notice effect by the effect button 6a is the vibration time of the button (long-term vibration, short-time vibration), the vibration intensity of the button (strong vibration, weak vibration), the button emission (white, red, rainbow emission), and the effect mode. It is composed of any one or more combinations of button vibration patterns (such as one vibration that repeats vibration in small steps).

The production modes of the accessory vibration notice effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C are the vibration time of the movable effect member (long-term vibration, short-time vibration), the vibration strength of the movable effect member (strong vibration, weak vibration), and the movable effect member. It is composed of any combination of light emission (white, red, rainbow light emission) and vibration pattern of the movable effect member (vibration is repeated in small steps, only one vibration, etc.).
It should be noted that the vibration warning effect may be performed by the effect button 6a and the movable effect members 17A to 17C. For example, when the effect button 6a vibrates strongly in a short time, the movable effect member 17A vibrates strongly in a short time.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation of the execution of the jackpot game by executing the effect in the zone in which the zone image is displayed from a predetermined timing in one or a plurality of variable effects.
The "executable period of the continuous notice effect" is that there is nothing to execute the continuous notice effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and the start opening prize designation command based on the winning of the first start opening 10 (look-ahead). When the designated command) is received, the player is in the low-probability non-time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, and when the start port prize designation command (look-ahead designation command) based on the winning of the second start port 11a is received. Is a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability non-time-saving game state.
As a continuous advance notice effect other than the above continuous advance notice effect, even if a light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the image display device 16 and the light guide plate emits blue or red light at the start of fluctuation, the light guide plate effect is executed. good. Expectations for big hits are higher when the light guide plate emits red light than when it emits blue light.

In step S653, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous advance notice effect type determination table (FIGS. 38 and 39) according to the current effect mode.
In step S654, the sub CPU 130a determines the type of the continuous advance notice effect (whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the type of the continuous advance notice effect to be executed) with reference to the continuous advance notice effect type determination table.

In step S655, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a continuous advance notice type for executing the continuous advance notice effect, and if it is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect (step S655; Yes), the process is transferred to step S656 and continuous. When it is determined that the advance notice effect is not executed (step S655; No), the process is transferred to step S665.
In step S656, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous advance notice scenario determination table according to the current effect mode, and shifts the process to step S657.

In step S657, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the character operation advance notice effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the character operation advance notice effect (step S657; Yes), step S658. If it is determined that the bonus operation advance notice effect is not executed (step S657; No), the process is transferred to step S659.
In step S658, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario of the accessory operation advance notice effect with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S659, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the effect advance notice effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the effect advance notice effect (step S659; Yes), the process is transferred to step S660. If it is determined that the effect advance notice effect is not executed (step S659; No), the process is transferred to step S661.
In step S660, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario of the effect advance notice effect with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S661, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the vibration advance notice effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the vibration advance notice effect (step S661; Yes), the process is transferred to step S662. If it is determined that the vibration warning effect is not executed (step S661; No), the process is transferred to step S662.
In step S662, the sub CPU 130a determines whether to execute the vibration effect by the effect button 6a or the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C, and also refers to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table to execute the vibration advance notice effect. The advance notice scenario is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.
It should be noted that the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be executed at a higher ratio than the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C, and the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C may be performed. , The ratio of execution may be higher than that of the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.

In step S663, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the look-ahead zone effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the look-ahead zone effect (step S663; Yes), the process is transferred to step S664. If it is determined that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed (step S663; No), the continuous advance notice effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step S665, when the sub CPU 130a executes the advance notice effect based on the start winning opening designation command (look-ahead designation command), the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario (notice scenario indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is not executed) of the continuous advance notice effect. Then, it is set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and the continuous advance notice effect determination process of this time is completed.

Examples of the notice effect executed based on the non-notice scenario set in step S665 include a button vibration notice effect at the time of winning, a lever vibration notice effect at the time of winning, and a lever operation notice effect.
The "winning button / lever vibration notice effect" is a vibration effect (effect) in which the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is vibrated in a predetermined effect mode at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 10 in the normal modes A to C. By executing the button 6a / vibration effect without displaying the validity period of the effect lever 6h or the operation promotion image), it is a warning effect that suggests the expectation of the execution of the jackpot game. It should be noted that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the lever vibration notice effect at the time of winning than in the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning.

In the case of the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a blinks in red. Further, the winning sound effect is output from the voice output device 9. In the normal modes A to C, the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning is the case where the SP / SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) rather than the case where the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). Is set so that it is easy to execute (execution rate is high). In other words, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high when the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning is executed.

In the case of the lever vibration warning effect at the time of winning, the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h vibrates strongly for only 2 seconds, and the effect lever 6h blinks in blue. Further, the winning sound effect is output from the voice output device 9. In the normal modes A to C, the winning effect lever vibration warning effect is when the SP / SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) rather than when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). It is set so that it is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher). In other words, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high when the lever vibration notice effect at the time of winning is executed.

In addition, based on the pre-judgment information (information of the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) determined in the pre-judgment table of FIG. Among them, it is set so that it is more difficult to execute when the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 and than when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a.
Further, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G is executed more than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C. It is set to be difficult.

(Continuous notice production type determination table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice effect type determination table referred to for determining the type of continuous advance notice effect in the normal modes A to C (low probability non-time saving gaming state (normal game state)).
FIG. 39 is a continuous advance notice effect referred to for determining the type of continuous advance notice effect in the probability variation modes D and E and the time saving modes F and G (high probability time saving game state, low probability time saving gaming state (specific gaming state)). It is a figure which shows the type determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the continuous advance notice effect type determination table includes a start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern), a selection rate (%) for each continuous advance notice effect type, and a continuous advance notice effect to be selected. The types are associated.

The types of continuous notice effects include "non-execution" that does not execute the continuous notice effect, "feature action notice effect" that executes one of multiple types of continuous notice effects, "effect notice effect", and "vibration notice". There are "Direction", "Look-ahead zone effect", "Effect advance notice effect & vibration advance notice effect", and "Character action advance notice effect & Look-ahead zone effect" in which two of multiple types of continuous advance notice effects are executed. ..

For example, in the normal mode, if the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is lost and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 84%, and 5 % Is the "effect notice effect", 4% is the "character movement notice effect", 4% is the "vibration notice effect", and 2% is the "look-ahead zone effect". % Will determine "effect notice effect & button vibration notice effect". That is, in the normal mode, when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 and the SP reach effect is executed, the continuous advance notice by one type of advance notice effect is rather than the continuous advance notice effect by multiple types of advance notice effect. Directing is easier to perform.

For example, in the probabilistic change / time saving mode, if the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is to execute the normal fluctuation effect of loss, "non-execution" is determined at 99% and 1 "Effect notice production" is decided by%.
That is, in the probabilistic change / time saving mode, when the normal fluctuation effect of loss is executed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 10, it is regulated, that is, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, and the execution is performed. It also includes a low percentage of being done.

In addition, in the probability change / time saving mode, if the first start opening winning designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is to execute the fluctuation effect of the loss accompanied by the special reach, "non-execution" is determined at 98%. 1% determines the "character movement notice effect", and 1% determines the "vibration notice effect". That is, in the probabilistic change / time saving mode, when the variable effect of the loss accompanied by the special reach is executed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 10, it is regulated, that is, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed. However, it also includes a low rate of execution.

Further, in the probabilistic change / time saving mode, when the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled change pattern) is to execute the change effect of the big hit, "non-execution" is determined at 85%. That is, in the probability change / time saving mode, even if the jackpot variation effect is executed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 10, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is restricted, that is, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed. It also includes the fact that the rate of execution is low.

In addition to the continuous advance notice effect described above, a background change advance notice effect or a story progress effect (for example, a countdown effect) in which the background image changes may be executed.
The "background change notice effect" is a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the execution of the special game by changing the background image in the order of the morning background stage, the daytime background stage, the evening background stage, and the night background stage.
The jackpot expectation of the background change notice is "morning background"<"daybackground"<"eveningbackground"<"nightbackground".

(Continuous notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for normal modes A to C (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)).
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice scenario determination table for probability variation modes D and E (high probability time saving game state (specific game state)) and time saving modes F and G (low probability time saving game state (specific game state)). be.

In the continuous advance notice scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols, the start winning opening designation command (look-ahead designation command) (special figure schedule fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario are associated. As a reference, the prior fluctuations (4 fluctuations before, 3 fluctuations before, 2 fluctuations before, 1 fluctuation before) in each scenario, and the production mode of the continuous notice effect in the fluctuations are described.

The "preliminary fluctuation" indicates a fluctuation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure judgment information stored before the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command. ..
The “variation” indicates a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command.

The mode of "weak notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice effect.
In the case of the character movement advance notice effect, the first movable effect member 17A emits blue light and the blade portion housed in the sheath portion moves to the left, and a weak motion with a small movement width is performed and a weak motion sound effect is produced. It is output. It should be noted that the effect lever 6h may be operated up and down as an effect of notifying the operation of the accessory. In this case, the effect lever 6h performs a weak operation with a small vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect preview effect, the blue effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 16a and the blue effect sound effect is output.
In the case of the button vibration warning effect, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates slightly for one second, and the effect button 6a blinks in white.
In the case of the accessory vibration notice effect, the accessory vibration motor for vibrating the first movable effect member 17A vibrates slightly for only one second, and the first movable effect member 17A blinks in white.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone sound effect is output.

The mode of "strong notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice effect. In addition, "strong notice" has a higher expectation of big hit than "weak notice".
In the case of the accessory movement notice effect, the third movable effect member 17C emits red light, and the blade portion housed in the sheath portion moves up and down to perform a strong motion with a large movement width, and a strong motion sound effect is emitted. It is output. It should be noted that the effect lever 6h may be operated up and down as an effect of notifying the operation of the accessory. In this case, the effect lever 6h performs a strong operation with a large vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect preview effect, the red effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 16a, and the red effect sound effect different from the blue effect sound effect is output.
In the case of the button vibration warning effect, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a blinks in red.
In the case of the accessory vibration notice effect, the accessory vibration motor for vibrating the first movable effect member 17A vibrates strongly for only 3 seconds, and the first movable effect member 17A blinks in red.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red thermal zone image is displayed and a thermal zone sound effect different from the zone sound effect is output.

The continuous notice scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice or a strong notice is not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), or during the advance change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set in.

It should be noted that, in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D and E, whether the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 or the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a, the probabilistic change / time saving used in FIG. Although the continuous advance notice scenario is determined using the continuous advance notice scenario determination table, a continuous scenario determination table for the first start port 10 and a continuous scenario determination table for the second start port 11a may be provided.
In the continuous scenario determination table for the first start port 10, the ratio of selecting a scenario in which the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect is smaller in both cases of loss and big hit than in the continuous scenario determination table for the second start port 11a is selected. Set high.
Further, in the continuous scenario determination table for the first start port 10, there is a scenario in which the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect is smaller in the case of loss or a big hit than in the continuous advance notice scenario determination table for the continuous advance notice scenario for the normal mode. The selection rate is set high.

The first feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that when a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effect is executed rather than when one type of continuous advance notice effect is executed. However, the expectation of a big hit is high. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that the probability variation modes D and E (time saving modes F and G) are more continuous advance notice effects than the normal modes A to C. Is easy to execute (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

It should be noted that, instead of making the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect different between the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, for example, the normal mode B has a continuous advance notice effect rather than the normal mode A. The execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the normal modes A and C, for example, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed in the probability change mode E rather than the probability change mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect may be different between the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G. By doing so, since the jackpot expectation of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the same effect modes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is the probability change / time reduction as compared with the case where the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the normal modes A to C. In modes D to G, when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the effect advance notice effect and the character operation advance notice effect) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, which tend to have more (super) shortening fluctuations than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the normal modes A to C. In the time saving modes D to G, when the SP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous advance notice effect (here, the effect advance notice effect, the character operation advance notice effect, the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous in the probability variation / time reduction mode in which the (super) shortening variation tends to be larger than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is the probability change / time reduction as compared with the case where the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the normal modes A to C (pre-reading result). When the SPSP reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the modes D to G, the continuous advance notice effect (here, the effect advance notice effect, the character operation advance notice effect, and the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation effect from becoming monotonous in the probability variation / time reduction modes D to G, in which the ultra-shortening variation tends to be larger than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the normal modes A to C (pre-reading result). When the full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in the time saving modes D to G, the continuous advance notice effect (here, the character operation advance notice effect and the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation effect from becoming monotonous in the probability variation / time reduction mode in which the ultra-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the normal modes A to C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that the normal modes A to C have a button vibration advance notice effect (effect button 6a) rather than the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. It is easy to execute the vibration effect without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) (high execution rate = different jackpot expectations). Therefore, in the normal modes A to C, where the stay period tends to be longer than the probability change / time saving modes D to G, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the button vibration warning effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become. Further, in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, the button vibration warning effect can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the button vibration warning effect may be more easily executed (execution ratio is higher) in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. Further, in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the normal mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the normal mode B or C, so that the button vibration warning effect is produced between the normal modes A to C. In the case of a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state, the button vibration warning effect is executed in the probability change mode D rather than the probability change / time reduction modes E to G. By making it easier, the execution ratio of the button vibration warning effect may be different between the probability change / time saving modes D to G. By doing so, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different when the button vibration warning effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, the accessory vibration advance notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C rather than the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. easy. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the jackpot game in the normal modes A to C, which tend to have a longer stay period than the probability change / time saving modes D to G, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

It should be noted that the probabilistic variation / time saving modes D to G may be easier to execute the accessory vibration warning effect (higher execution rate) than the normal modes A to C. Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the normal mode B or C, so that the character vibration notice is given between the normal modes A to C. The execution ratio of the effect may be different, and in the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, the probabilistic change mode D has a character vibration warning effect rather than the probabilistic / time-saving modes E to G. By making it easier to execute, the execution ratio of the accessory vibration warning effect may be different between the probability change / time saving modes D to G. By doing so, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different when the character vibration notice effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed in the normal modes A to C. A specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed in the probability change / time saving modes D to G (specific game state) than in the case of (look-ahead result) (look-ahead result). In the case, it is more difficult to execute the button vibration advance notice effect (character vibration advance notice effect) (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, the button vibration advance notice effect (character vibration advance notice effect) can be given a rarity, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

As the tenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, the accessory operation advance notice effect is executed in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G rather than the normal modes A to C. Easy (high execution rate). Therefore, in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, it is possible to give the character movement notice effect a rarity, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that the probability change / When the continuous advance notice effect that ends with one variable effect is executed in the time saving modes D to G, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice of the continuous advance notice effect. ) Is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that the continuous advance notice effect that ends with two variable effect effects is executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. When the continuous advance notice effect that ends with two variable effects is executed in the normal modes A to C, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is performed in the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice of the continuous advance notice effect. ) Is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that when the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (the number of holdings is 2 to 4), the probability changes. When the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the normal modes A to C, rather than the case where the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the modes D to G (specific game state). It is easier to execute the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) in the variable effect that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that when the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (the number of holdings is 2 to 4), it is normal. When the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the probabilistic mode D to G (specific game state) than when the continuous advance notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the modes A to C. It is easier to perform a normal variable effect without a reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is the normal mode rather than the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effect effects is executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. When the continuous notice effect over three variable effects is executed in A to C, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed in the variable effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous advance notice effect. easy. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is the probability variation / time saving mode as compared with the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the normal modes A to C. In the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three times of the variable effect is executed in D to G, it is easier to execute the normal variable effect without the reach effect in the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is the probability variation / time saving mode as compared with the case where the continuous advance notice effect over three variable effects is executed in the normal modes A to C. When the continuous notice effect over three variable effects is executed in D to G, the reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit in the variable effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous notice effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ) Is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that the same movable effect members 17A to 17C are used in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. Although it is possible to execute the object movement notice effect, the jackpot expectation when the accessory action notice effect is executed differs between the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The nineteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is the determination to be described later when the accessory operation advance notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. The ratio of operating any one of the movable production members 17A to 17C (100%) is higher than the ratio of operating all of the movable production members 17A to 17C used in the production (0%). .. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that it is a big hit even if the character movement notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is that when the button vibration advance notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the effect button 6a is used. The ratio of the effect button 6a in the normal state (0%) is higher than the ratio of the effect button 6a in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity that the effect button 6a is in the projecting state (it is in the projecting state only in the determined effect described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the strong notice of the button vibration warning effect, the effect button 6a may be vibrated as a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when the button vibration warning effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the effect button 6a is in the normal state rather than the ratio of the effect button 6a in the protruding state. It is better to make the ratio of.

The 21st feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 16a). In the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the character movement notice effect (weak movement of the first movable effect member 17A + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the effect notice effect (display of a blue effect image around the effect symbol 16a). Is executed when the weak warning of the button vibration warning effect (weak vibration of the effect button 6a for 1 second), which is executed without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image), is executed, than when is executed. , The expectation of big hits will be high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 22nd feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous advance notice effect (from the start of the change to the first of the effect symbol 16a). During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the character movement notice effect (strong operation of the second movable effect member 17B + red light emission) and a strong notice of the effect notice effect (display of a red effect image around the effect symbol 16a). The jackpot expectation is higher when the strong notice of the button vibration warning effect (strong vibration of the effect button 6a for 3 seconds) is executed than when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 23rd feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIG. 39 (1) is the high-probability time-saving game state / low-probability time-saving game after the big hit game based on the effect mode setting table shown in FIG. Even if the probability change / time saving mode is set according to the state, the time saving mode is set corresponding to the b time saving game state, or the time saving mode is set corresponding to the c time saving game state, the continuous notice effect is produced. The execution rate of is the same. Therefore, regardless of the setting trigger condition of the probability change / time saving mode, the playability is not different, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The 24th feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 39 (1) and 39 (2) is that the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. However, it is easier to execute the continuous advance notice effect when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11, and as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 (2), the probabilistic change / time saving mode D to G is the first. The continuous advance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the game ball wins the first start opening 10 during the normal modes A to C than when the game ball wins the first start opening 10. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate game effect according to the type of effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (1), the button vibration warning effect (character vibration warning effect) can be executed when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G. However, as shown in FIG. 39 (2), even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, it is difficult to execute the button vibration warning effect (character vibration advancement effect) ( It will not be executed in case of loss). That is, in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G, the button vibration warning effect (feature) when the game ball wins the second starting port 11a than when the game ball wins the first starting port 10a. Vibration notice production) is easy to execute.

Further, during the normal modes A to C, the mode is switched to the time saving modes F and G corresponding to the time saving game state b or c. When the game ball wins the second start port 10 during the time saving mode, the continuous notice effect is executed more than when the game ball wins the first start port 10a during the probability change / time saving mode D to G. Easy to do.

Further, during the normal modes A to C, the mode is switched to the time saving modes F and G corresponding to the time saving game state b or c. When the game ball wins the second start port 10 during the time saving mode, the button vibration warning effect is performed more than when the game ball wins the first start port 10a during the probability change / time saving mode D to G. It is easy to execute the character vibration notice effect). Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate game effect according to the type of effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the continuous advance notice effect, in addition to the continuous advance notice effect described above, the lamp change effect by any or all of the winning opening lamp NR, the panel lighting device 23, and the frame lighting device 27 may be executed. good. Further, the jackpot expectation is higher when the lamp change effect is executed by the winning opening lamp and the lighting device 23 for the panel (or the lighting device 27 for the frame) than when the lamp change effect is executed by the winning opening lamp. To be high.

Specifically, the ramp change effect includes a first notification that notifies the start port 10 at the timing when the game ball wins a prize, and a second notification that notifies the start port 10 at a symbol change start timing different from the first notification.

The first notification can execute the first aspect (the winning opening lamp blinks or emits blue light) and the second aspect (the winning opening lamp emits red light), and the second notification is the first aspect and the second aspect. It is possible to carry out a third aspect different from that (the winning opening lamp and the lighting device for the panel emit light, or the winning opening lamp and the lighting device for the frame emit light).
Alternatively, the first notification is the first aspect (the winning opening lamp blinks or emits blue light), the second aspect (the winning opening lamp emits red light), and the third aspect (the winning opening lamp and the lighting device for the board or the winning opening). The lamp and the lighting device for the frame emit light), and the second notification can execute the same first mode and the second mode as the first notification, but in the same third mode as the first notification. Does not change.

In addition, when "the first notification & button vibration notice effect of the lamp light emission effect" and "the second notification & button vibration notice effect of the lamp light emission effect" are provided as continuous notice effects (multiple types of notice effects are provided). (When executed), when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed in the variable effect of the advance notice, "the second notification of the lamp emission effect & the second notification of the lamp emission effect &" rather than "the first notification of the lamp emission effect & the button vibration advance notice effect". The "button vibration notice effect" may be easier to execute, and the "first notification of the lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect" may be more than the "second notification of the lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect". It may be easier to carry out.

As the continuous advance notice effect, in addition to the continuous advance notice effect described above, the loss effect pattern 16a (for example, "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 6 displayed in red" having different colors in one or a plurality of variable effects is displayed. The combination display mode of the normal loss of "(tiger)") may be stopped and displayed to execute a chance eye notice effect that intermittently suggests the expectation of the execution of the jackpot game. The jackpot expectation of the chance eye is "yellow" <"green" <"red".

Further, the chance eye notice effect and the button vibration notice effect may be executed based on FIGS. 38 and 39. In this case, when the loss effect symbol 16a (normal loss, reach loss) that does not suggest the jackpot expectation is stopped and displayed when the loss effect symbol 16a is stopped and displayed in the loss fluctuation effect, the button vibration warning effect is not executed. When the same-color loss effect symbol 16a suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is stopped and displayed, it can be said that the button vibration advance notice effect can be executed.

When the chance eye notice effect and the button vibration advance notice effect are executed, when the yellow or green loss effect pattern 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is weak for only 1 second. As it vibrates, the effect button 6a blinks white. On the other hand, when the red loss effect symbol 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a blinks in red.

(Variable effect pattern determination process)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control unit 130 m.
The sub CPU 130a executes the variation effect pattern determination process when the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer. In this variation effect pattern determination process, various effect devices (effect button device 6A, selection button device 6B, effect lever device 6C, panel drive device) including image display devices 16 and 18 are displayed during the variation display of the special symbol. 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), panel lighting device 23, frame lighting device 27), and a variable effect pattern indicating how to control the effect operation of the winning opening lamp NR are determined.

First, in step S801, the sub CPU 130a acquires the effect random value updated in step S540.
Next, in step S802, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43 or FIG. 44 with reference to the current gaming state and the effect mode.

In step S803, the sub CPU 130a is one of a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the variable effect pattern determination table set in step S802 and the effect random value acquired in step S801. To decide.
Next, in step S804, the sub CPU 130a sets a variation effect pattern designation command in the transmission data storage area in order to transmit the variation effect pattern determined in step S803 to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. When the variation effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150, the effect button device 6A, the selection button device 6B, the effect lever device 6C, the audio output device 9, based on the variation effect pattern designation command, The image display devices 16 and 18, the panel drive device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the panel lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, and the winning opening lamp NR are controlled.

In step S805, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect execution time (variation effect time) of the variation effect pattern determined in step S803 in the variation effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c. The fluctuation effect timer counter is subtracted by 1 every 4 ms in step S602. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining effect execution time (variation effect time) of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the variation effect, by the variation effect timer counter.
In step S806, the sub CPU 130a sets the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S807, the sub CPU 130a determines special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display 20a or the second special symbol second display 20b to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED). Set in the processing area of. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S604, and the created data is output in step S605, so that the first special symbol first. 2 The variable display of the display 20a or the second special symbol 2nd display 20b is started.

In step S808, the sub CPU 130a sets a special symbol variation display designation command for variable display of the special symbol TZ in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. The special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the image control unit 140 performs variation display of the special symbol TZ in the special symbol variation display area.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table for the normal mode, which is referred to for determining the variation effect pattern in the normal modes A to C.
FIG. 44 (1) shows a variation effect for the probability variation / time reduction mode (for the second special symbol) referred to for determining a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction modes D to G. It is a figure which shows the pattern determination table.
FIG. 44 (2) shows a variation effect for the probability variation / time reduction mode (for the first special symbol) referred to for determining a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction modes D to G. It is a figure which shows the pattern determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the variation effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and a type of the selected variation effect pattern. .. As a reference, the effect configuration (effect mode) in each variable effect pattern is described.

The "variable effect pattern" is an image display device 16, 18, an audio output device 9, an effect button device 6A, a selection button device 6B, and an effect lever device during variable display of a special symbol on the special symbol display devices 19a and 19b. This is an effect mode of variable effect performed by using various effect devices such as 6C, a panel drive device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), a panel lighting device 23, a frame lighting device 27, and a winning opening lamp NR.

The "normal variation" in the column of the effect configuration indicates that the effect symbol 16a performs a normal variation display (effect time: 8 seconds) in which a reach state does not occur.
"Long variation" means that the effect time is longer than the normal variation effect (effect time: 8 seconds) (effect time: 10 seconds), and a long variation display without reach is performed without a reach state. ..

The "shortened variation" indicates that the effect time is shorter than the normal variation effect (effect time: 8 seconds) (effect time: 4 seconds), and the shortened variation display without reach is performed without the reach state. ..
"Ultra-shortened variation" means that the effect time is shorter than the shortened variation effect (effect time: 4 seconds) (effect time: 3 seconds), and the ultra-shortened variation display without reach that does not generate a reach state is performed. ing.

"Pseudo" means that a pseudo continuous notice effect suggesting a jackpot expectation is performed by temporarily stopping and re-variating (pseudo-continuous effect) the effect symbol 16a once or multiple times during one variation effect. Shows.
The "pseudo-fanning" is a pseudo-fanning variation effect that is a result (pseudo-failure) indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed as a result of executing the fanning effect of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed. It is shown that.
"Pseudo 1" indicates that the first temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a is performed as a pseudo continuous notice.
The "pseudo 2" indicates that the second temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a is performed as a pseudo continuous notice.
The "pseudo 3" indicates that the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and re-variated (pseudo-continuous effect) for the third time as a pseudo continuous notice.

"Reach fanning" is to fan whether or not to temporarily stop at the effect symbol 16a that constitutes the reach, and if this effect succeeds, the reach is established, and if this effect fails, the reach is not established. It is shown that.
The "normal reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is performed.
The "normal" 7 "reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is performed in the reach state by the effect symbol 16a of "7".

The "SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is performed. A special production image or the like is displayed as the SP reach production, and for example, a battle production in which a ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle or a mission production in which a commanded mission is performed is performed.
The "special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is performed.

The “SPSP reach” indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is performed. A special production image etc. is displayed as the SP SP reach production, for example, a battle production or mission production different from the SP reach production, or a mission production developed from the battle of the SP reach production or a mission of the SP reach production. Is done.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is performed.
"Special reach A" indicates that a special reach effect is performed rather than a normal reach effect.
"Special reach B" indicates that a special SP reach effect is performed rather than the SP reach effect.
"Special reach C, D" indicates that a special SPSP reach effect is performed rather than the SPSP reach effect.
The "special reach E" indicates that a special reach effect is performed and the determined effect is not executed as compared with the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is executed is performed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SPSP reach effect is executed is performed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that full rotation reach is executed is performed.
The "decision" means that a decision effect suggesting whether or not the jackpot game is executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period. Shows.

The "re-lottery" is whether or not the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped in the jackpot display mode based on the jackpot determination result becomes a jackpot display mode that is advantageous to the player (an odd numbered symbol that becomes a probable variable jackpot from an even numbered symbol that is usually a jackpot). After fueling (whether or not it will be a match, whether or not it will be a "7" symbol match where the most advantageous jackpot game is executed from an odd number of symbols other than 7), it will be a promotion success production that will be an advantageous jackpot display mode. It shows that a re-lottery effect is performed in which any of the promotion failure effects that is not an advantageous jackpot display mode is executed.
"Resurrection" means that even if the reach production is executed and it becomes a failure production, either the resurrection failure production or the resurrection success production that suggests whether or not it will be a resurrection jackpot will be executed. Shows.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for normal modes A to C shown in FIG. 43, in the case of the special symbol 00 (loss), the variation effect pattern 03 (normal reach effect) and the variation effect pattern 05,06 (SP reach effect) are even numbers. 70% of the effect symbols 16a are reach effects, 30% are reach effects on odd-numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7", and 30% are reach effects on the "7" effect symbols 16a. Is 0%.

In the case of the special symbol 00 (loss) and the variable effect patterns 05 to 10 (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 55%, and the odd number other than "7". The ratio of reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 16a is 43%, and the ratio of reach effect to be performed by the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 2%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 13 and 14 (SP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 16a is 60%, and odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The ratio of reach production is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (probability variation jackpot) and variable effect patterns 17 to 21 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect performed by even numbered effect symbols 16a is 6%, and odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect is 90%, and the ratio of the reach effect of the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 4%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (probability change jackpot) and variable effect patterns 17 to 21 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of reach effect being performed with an even numbered effect symbol 16a is 60%, "7". The ratio of the reach effect being performed by the odd-numbered effect symbols 16a other than the above is 40%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 0%.

In the case of the special symbol 03 (normal jackpot) and the variable patterns 17 to 21 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 100%.

In the case of special symbol 04 (probability change jackpot), special symbol 05 (probability variation jackpot), special symbol 06 (normal jackpot) and variable effect pattern 30 (special SP reach effect), the reach effect is performed with an even number of effect symbols 16a. The ratio is 100%.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for the probability variation / time saving modes D to G shown in FIG. 44 (1), the special symbol 10 (loss) is the variation effect pattern 35 (normal reach effect) and the variation effect patterns 37 to 41 (SP reach effect). , SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the even-numbered effect symbol 16a is 60%, and the ratio of the reach effect being performed by the odd-numbered effect symbol 16a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 43 and 44 (SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbols 16a is 60%, and the odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The ratio of reach production is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 45,46 (SP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 20%, and the odd numbered effect symbol 16a other than "7". The ratio g of the reach effect is 30%, and the ratio of the reach effect of the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 50%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 47 to 51 (SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbols 16a is 3%, and the odd numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect is 2%, and the ratio of the reach effect of the effect symbol 16a of "7" is 95%.

In the case of the special symbol 04 (probability variation jackpot) and the variable effect pattern 52,53 (full rotation reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 20%, and the odd numbered effect symbols other than "7". The ratio g of the reach effect is 30% at 16a, and the ratio of the reach effect is 50% at the effect symbol 16a of "7".

In the case of the special symbol 05 (normal jackpot) and the variable effect patterns 54 to 59 (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect), the ratio of the reach effect being performed with the even numbered effect symbol 16a is 100%. ..

Although the reach effect is always executed in the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, a variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous effect is executed may be provided.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1) is the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP) with an odd number of effect symbols 16a (effect symbol 16a that becomes a probable change jackpot) other than "7". The ratio of the reach effect to be performed by the even-numbered effect symbol 16a (the effect symbol 16a which is usually a big hit) is higher than the ratio of the reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when an odd number of production symbols 16a other than "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1) is "7" rather than the ratio at which the reach effect is performed by the even-numbered effect symbol 16a (the effect symbol 16a which is usually a big hit). The ratio of the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is lower in the effect symbol 16a (the effect symbol 16a that is the most advantageous probability variation jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when the production symbol 16a of "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1) is the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP) with an odd number of effect symbols 16a (effect symbol 16a that becomes a probable change jackpot) other than "7". Reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is performed with the production symbol 16a of "7" (the production symbol 16a that is the most advantageous odd-numbered jackpot) rather than the ratio of reach production and SPSP reach production. The rate of odd numbers is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the delight of the player when the production symbol 16a of "7" is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1) is that the reach effect is not executed with the even-numbered effect symbols 16a or the odd-numbered effect symbols 16a other than "7". The jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation as to which type of effect symbol is used to execute the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1), the probabilistic variation / time saving modes D to G are more advantageous than those in the normal modes A to C. In the case of a big hit, the reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is easily executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the probability change / time saving modes D to G, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1) is that in the normal modes A to C, even if the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7", the jackpot is not confirmed. However, in the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G, the jackpot is confirmed when the reach effect is executed by the effect symbol 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the probability change / time saving modes D to G, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1) is that the SPSP reach effect is achieved in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. It is easy to execute the variable effect pattern of the jackpot where the success effect of revival is executed after the failure effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect in the probability variation / time saving mode from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2) is the loss variation in the case where the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the determination result of the loss. As an effect, the normal variable effect has a higher rate of being executed than the special reach loss variable effect (see FIG. 13 (2)). Therefore, the game ball is placed in the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C, as compared with the case where the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the loss fluctuation effect is executed. It is easier to execute the reach effect when the prize is won and the loss variation effect is executed.
Further, the type of the variation effect pattern in which the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the loss variation effect is executed is the first start port 10 during the normal modes A to C. The number of game balls is less than the type of variation effect pattern executed in the loss variation effect by winning a prize in the second starting port 11a during the winning or probability variation / time saving mode D to G. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform an appropriate game according to the current game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2) is that when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the jackpot variation effect is executed. , The special reach effect (special reach B) of the same effect mode is easily executed (the execution rate is high).
Further, the type of reach effect in which the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and is executed in the jackpot variation effect is the game in the first start port 10 during the normal modes A to C. The number of balls is less than the type of reach effect performed in the jackpot variation effect by winning the second starting port 11a during the winning or probability change / time saving mode D to G. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform an appropriate game according to the current game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2) is that when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the jackpot variation effect is executed. It is more difficult to execute the reach effect accompanied by the decision effect than when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a and the jackpot variation effect is executed during the probability change / time saving mode D to G.

The eleventh feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2) is that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the jackpot variation effect is executed. After the start of the fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed without the reach fanning and the reach effect being executed. Since the reachless jackpot fluctuation effect may be executed, the player can be amazed and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

The twelfth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 44 (1) and 44 (2) is the probability change / time reduction even if the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time reduction modes D to G. Even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a during modes D to G, the reach effect is executed, but compared to the case where the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G. However, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, it is easier to execute the reach fanning effect, so it is possible to execute the effect according to the current game state. Will be.

(Big hit notice production decision processing)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot advance notice effect determination process by the effect control unit 130 m.
The sub CPU 130a executes the jackpot advance notice effect determination process based on the variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process.

In step S810, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the variation effect this time.
In step S811, the sub CPU 130a determines a notice effect pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect that causes the player to expect the jackpot game to be executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before the reach in the current variation effect. Select the pre-reach advance notice determination table, and determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the type of advance notice pattern to be executed.

In step S812, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice effect is to execute the serif advance notice effect, and if it is to execute the serif advance notice effect (step S812; Yes), the step. If the process is transferred to S813 and the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed (step S812; No), the process is transferred to step S815.

The "speech notice effect" is an operation promotion image that generates an effective period during the variable effect (high-speed variable period) and prompts the player to operate the effect button 6a, and operates the effect button 6a during the effective period. According to the elapse of the valid period, the image display device 16 displays a dialogue image suggesting the expected degree of execution of the jackpot game, and the voice output device 9 outputs the voice corresponding to the dialogue image. It is a kind.

In step S813, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining the dialogue advance notice pattern of the dialogue advance notice effect, and determines the dialogue advance notice pattern.
In step S814, the sub CPU 130a sets the serif advance notice effect command corresponding to the serif advance notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue advance notice effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialogue advance notice effect according to the dialogue advance notice pattern is executed during the variation effect.

In step S815, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect, and executes the step-up notice effect (step S815; Yes). , Step S816, and if the step-up notice effect is not executed (step S815; No), the process is transferred to step S818.

The "step-up notice effect" is the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating an effective period during the variation effect (high-speed fluctuation period) and without displaying the operation promotion image. ) Is a type of jackpot advance notice effect that is executed by a step effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the execution of the jackpot game by progressing in a predetermined order until any step of the plurality of steps (stages) is reached.

In step S816, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining a step-up notice pattern for the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up notice pattern.
In step S817, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the variation effect.

In step S818, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, and is a variation effect pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect (step S818; Yes). , If the processing is not a variable effect pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect (step S818; No), the process is transferred to step S821.

In step S819, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern for the pseudo-continuous effect, and determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern.
In step S820, the sub CPU 130a sets the pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect according to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step S821, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes a reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect), and determines whether or not the variation effect pattern is a reach effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing (step S821; Yes), the process is transferred to step S822, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing reach effect (step S821; No), the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated. ..

In step S822, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, full rotation effect), and determines whether or not the variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing the development effect. If it is an effect pattern (step S822; Yes), the process is transferred to step S823, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing the development effect (step S822; No), the process is transferred to step S825.

In step S823, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the development effect pattern, and determines the development effect pattern.
In step S824, the sub CPU 130a sets the development effect command according to the development effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S825, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining a cut-in effect pattern indicating whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.
The "cut-in effect" is to generate an effective period during the variable effect (during the pre-reach effect or the reach effect) and display the operation promotion image, and to operate the effect button 6a during the effective period or to elapse the effective period. Correspondingly, the image display device 16 displays a cut-in image suggesting the expected degree of execution of the jackpot game, and the audio output device 9 outputs a cut-in sound effect corresponding to the cut-in image. It is a kind.

In step S826, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a cut-in effect pattern for executing the cut-in effect, and if it is a cut-in effect pattern for executing the cut-in effect (step S826; Yes), the step S827 is performed. If the process is not a cut-in effect pattern for executing the cut-in effect (step S826; No), the process is transferred to step S828.

In step S827, the sub CPU 130a sets the cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S828, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing the determined effect, and determines that the variable effect pattern executes the determined effect (step S828; Yes). ), When it is determined that the pattern is not a variable effect pattern for executing the determined effect (step S828; No), the process is transferred to step S831.

In step S829, the sub CPU 130a selects a determination effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining an effect pattern for the determination effect, and determines the determination effect pattern.
In step S830, the sub CPU 130a sets the decision effect command according to the decision effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determination effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determination effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S831, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect, and is a variable effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect (step S831; Yes). If the pattern is not a variable effect pattern for executing the re-lottery effect (step S831; No), the process is transferred to step S834.

In step S832, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern for the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern.
In step S833, the sub CPU 130a sets the re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S834, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a jackpot variation effect pattern for executing the final effect, and is a jackpot variation effect pattern for executing the final effect (step S834; Yes), the process is transferred to step S835, and if it is not a jackpot variable effect pattern for executing the final effect (step S834; No), the process is transferred to step S837.

The "fixed effect" means that before the three effect symbols 16a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the combination display mode showing the jackpot determination result (that is, before the special symbol determination symbol is confirmed and displayed as the jackpot symbol). It is a kind of jackpot notification effect that definitely notifies that the jackpot game is executed.

In step S835, the sub CPU 130a selects the final effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the effect pattern of the final effect, and determines the final effect pattern.
In step S836, the sub CPU 130a sets a definite effect command corresponding to the definite effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the final effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the final effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S837, the sub CPU 130a selects the revival effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining the revival effect pattern, and determines the development effect pattern.
In step S838, when the effect pattern for executing the resurrection effect is determined, the sub CPU 130a sets the resurrection effect command corresponding to the determined resurrection effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the revival effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the revival effect is executed during the variation effect.

Various effects determined by the jackpot notice effect decision process (pre-reach effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect), post-reach effect (development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, final effect) , Revival effect)), a vibration effect may be executed by the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h.
The production modes of the vibration effect are button / lever vibration time (long-term vibration, short-time vibration), button / lever vibration intensity (strong vibration, weak vibration), button light emission / lever light emission (white, red, rainbow light emission). , Button / lever vibration pattern (repeating vibration in small steps, only one vibration, etc.), Vibration operation of movable effect members 17A to 17C (weak vibration operation with small vibration width, strong vibration operation with large vibration width) Or it is composed of multiple combinations.

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a pre-reach advance notice determination table referred to when determining a advance notice pattern for the pre-reach advance notice effect.
As shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each advance notice pattern, and the selected advance notice pattern are associated with the pre-reach advance notice determination table.

There are three types of notice patterns for the pre-reach notice effect: "no notice", "line notice effect", and "step-up notice effect", in which the pre-reach notice effect is not executed. The jackpot expectation is no notice <line notice effect <step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the jackpot determination result, and the variable effect with a low jackpot expectation. It is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the pattern is determined. It is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that when the jackpot determination result is lost, the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. It's hard to be done. In the probability change / time saving mode in which the symbol fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and in the case of a variable effect pattern for executing normal reach and SP reach, the probability change / time is shorter than in the normal modes A to C. In modes D to G, it is more difficult to perform the pre-reach notice effect. In the probability change / time saving mode in which the symbol fluctuation time tends to be short, it becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach advance notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 46, the jackpot expectation is higher when the step-up advance notice effect is executed than when the dialogue advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the jackpot expectation may be higher when the dialogue notice effect is executed than when the step-up advance notice effect is executed.

The fifth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the first is during the normal modes A to C, as compared with the case where the game ball is won at the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G. When the game ball wins in the starting port 10, it is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect.
Further, in the probability change / time saving modes D to G, the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed when the game ball wins the second start opening 11a than when the game ball wins the first start opening 10. easy. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate game effect according to the current effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 and the jackpot variation effect is executed during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, the execution ratio of the pre-reach advance notice effect is determined according to the type of the reach effect to be executed. different. It is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the special reach B is executed than the special reach A, and it is easier to execute the pre-reach advance notice effect when the special reach C and D are executed than the special reach B.

The sixth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 46 is the execution ratio of the pre-reach notice effect in the time-saving mode set corresponding to the time-saving game state, and b set according to the time-saving game state. The execution ratio of the pre-reach advance notice effect in the time saving mode or the time saving mode set corresponding to the time saving game state is the same. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game may be executed in any of the time saving modes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a dialogue advance notice pattern determination table referred to when determining the dialogue advance notice pattern of the dialogue advance notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 47, the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a type of variation effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern, and a selected dialogue advance notice pattern. As a reference, the production configuration of each notice pattern is described.

The "valid period: single stroke / 3 seconds" in the column of the effect configuration indicates that the valid period in the dialogue advance notice effect ends when one single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or 3 seconds elapses.

The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column indicates that the effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period in the dialogue advance notice effect. Specifically, it is composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a and a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which the single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective by the length of the gauge. Operation promotion image is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column is, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed. It shows that the effect button 6a emits white light.
The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" button state indicates the normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.

In the "normal dialogue (character color: black)" in the dialogue image / audio column and text color column, normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters, and the normal dialogue is displayed. Indicates that the dialogue is output as audio.
"Chance dialogue (character color: black)" indicates that the chance dialogue at which the jackpot game may be executed is displayed in black characters and the chance dialogue is output by voice.

"Reach line (character color: black)" indicates that the reach line for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in black characters, and the reach line is output by voice.
"Reach line (character color: red)" indicates that the reach line for which the execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in red characters, and the reach line is output by voice.

"Heat dialogue (character color: red)" indicates that the heat dialogue that is likely to execute the jackpot game is displayed in red text and the reach dialogue is output by voice.
"Intense heat dialogue (character color: gold)" indicates that the intense heat dialogue that is very likely to be executed in the jackpot game is displayed in gold characters and that the intense heat dialogue is output by voice. ing.

"The correct line (character color: rainbow)" indicates that the correct line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the correct line is output by voice.
The jackpot expectation of each dialogue production mode is "normal dialogue (black)"<"chance dialogue (black) <"reach dialogue (black) "<" reach dialogue (red) "<" heat dialogue (red) "<" Intense heat dialogue (Friday) "<" Probability dialogue (rainbow) ".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means 1 from the operation of the effect button 6a, which is the time when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a starts displaying the dialogue, or the end of the valid period. It shows that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly over a second is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 1 second from the operation of the effect button 6a, which is the start of the dialogue display, or the end of the valid period. Which indicates that.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration"<"strongvibration".

The first feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a when a line with a high expectation of a big hit (more than a heat line) is displayed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the dialogue advance notice effect of the intense heat dialogue, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the thermal dialogue, is executed than when the dialogue advance notice effect of the heat dialogue is executed. In this case, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the dialogue advance notice effect of the heat dialogue is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 6a executed when a line with a high expectation of a big hit (more than a heat line) is displayed has a relatively short time. ing. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a dialogue with a high jackpot expectation (more than a thermal dialogue) is displayed is 2 according to the jackpot expectation. There are types. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the start timing and end timing of the vibration effect differ depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, but the effect button 6a is displayed during the valid period. Since the vibration period of the vibration effect when operated and the vibration period of the vibration effect when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period are the same vibration period (1 second), a big hit is expected depending on the vibration intensity. It is possible to suggest the degree and improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the dialogue advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is the vibration effect executed when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11a during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result of the jackpot is obtained. In the case of a game ball winning a prize in the second starting port 11a during the probabilistic change / time saving mode D to G, or when a big hit is determined, or during the normal mode A to C, the game ball is used in the first starting port 10. Is more difficult to execute than in the case of a big hit judgment result.

There are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the dialogue advance notice effect, but only the weak vibration effect or the strong vibration effect may be used, and the strong vibration effect is longer than the vibration time of the weak vibration effect. The vibration time of the may be lengthened.

Further, the jackpot expectation when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is the same in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G, but the normal modes A to C have the same degree of expectation. The jackpot expectation may be higher in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, or the jackpot expectation may be higher in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of production mode, and it becomes easier to raise the player's expectation of winning in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

Further, the valid period ends and the dialogue notice effect is executed by the operation of the effect button 6a or the lapse of the valid period. However, when the valid period ends without the effect button 6a being operated, the dialogue is executed. The advance notice effect may not be executed. If the dialogue notice effect is not executed, the vibration effect is not executed either.

In addition, although the valid period is generated (with the operation promotion image displayed) and the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, the dialogue advance notice effect is executed without generating the valid period (the operation promotion image is not displayed). You may try to do it. When the dialogue warning effect is executed without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image), only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be performed.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 48, the step-up notice pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the selected step-up notice pattern. It is attached. As a reference, the production configuration of each notice pattern is described.

“SU1 → SU2” in the column of the effect mode indicates that the first step effect and the second step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3 → SU4” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, the third step effect, and the fourth step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3 → SU4 → SU5” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, the third step effect, the fourth step effect, and the fifth step effect are executed in order.
“SU1 → SU2 → SU3 → SU5” indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect are executed in this order, and then the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step effect mode, the effect time of the step effect before the last step effect is 1 second, and the effect time of the last step effect is 3 seconds.

"Yes" in the effect sound column indicates that a step-up sound effect is output.
The 1st step sound effect in the 1st step production, the 2nd step sound effect in the 2nd step production, the 3rd step sound effect in the 3rd step production, the 4th step sound effect in the 4th step production, and the 5th step sound effect in the 5th step production. A 5-step sound effect is output. These first to fifth step sound effects are different sound effects from each other.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at" SU5 "" in the button vibration column means that the effect button 6a is subjected to a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. It shows that it will be done.

The jackpot expectation of each step-up effect mode is "SU1 → SU2" <"SU1 → SU2 → SU3" <"SU1 <SU2 <SU3 <SU4" <"SU1 <SU2 <SU3 <SU4 <SU5" <"SU1 < It is SU2 <SU3 <SU5 ".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is performed, the effect period of the effect button 6a is not generated (operation). (No display of promotion image) It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) having a high expectation of big hit is performed is a relatively short time. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is the effect mode (vibration intensity, vibration time) of the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) having a high expectation of big hit is performed. ) Is only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production mode in the step-up advance notice production in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the type of the vibration production without operating the production button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that in the case of a big hit, the probabilistic mode D to G has a lower expectation of a big hit than the normal modes A to C. Is difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the probability variation / time saving modes D to G are more likely to perform a weak vibration effect than the normal modes A to C when a big hit occurs. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G do not generate an effective period in the step-up notice effect than the normal modes A to C ( (No operation promotion image is displayed) The expectation of a big hit is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed without generating an effective period (without displaying the operation promotion image) in the step-up advance notice effect. A production sound (sound effect) is output. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the vibration effect due to the output of the effect sound, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the normal modes A to C, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed without generating an effective period in the step-up notice effect (no operation promotion image is displayed) than in the probability change / time reduction modes D to G. In that case, the expectation of a big hit may be high.

The eighth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is the vibration executed when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11a during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result of the jackpot is obtained. It is possible to execute a step-up notice effect accompanied by an effect. The step-up notice effect accompanied by this vibration effect is the case where the game ball wins a prize in the second start port 11a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit, or the first start port during the normal modes A to C. It is harder to execute than in the case of a big hit judgment result when a game ball wins in 10.

(Pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 49, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the selected pseudo-continuous effect pattern. It is attached. As a reference, the production configuration of each pseudo-continuous production pattern is described.

"Validity period: single stroke / 3 seconds" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo-continuous production ends when one single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or 3 seconds elapses.
The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a and a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective by the length of the gauge. An operation promotion image composed of is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column is, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed. It shows that the effect button 6a emits white light.
The "protruding button white" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. It shows that it is doing.
The jackpot expectation of each operation promotion image is "normal button white"<"protruding button white".

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" button state indicates that the effect button 6a is not protruding. , "Protrusion" indicates that the effect button 6a is in a protruding state.
The jackpot expectation of each button state is "normal"<"protruding".

The "pseudo-failure" in the column of the effect mode means that the normal effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-ream failure occurs without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-ream effect as the central effect symbol 16a. Is shown.
The "pseudo-success" indicates that the pseudo-symbol that suggests the execution of the pseudo-ream effect as the central effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-ream is successful.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means 1 second from the operation of the effect button 6a or the end of the valid period when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is stopped. It is shown that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 1 second from the operation of the effect button 6a when the pseudo symbol is stopped or the end of the valid period. It is shown that.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration"<"strongvibration".

"There is a bonus movement" in the column of the bonus movement in the pseudo-success indicates that any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C performs the motion and the light-emitting bonus motion effect in a predetermined mode.
"Character movement effect" means that any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C that have moved to the effect position after any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C has started moving from the standby position to the effect position is in the standby position. It is a production until the return to is completed.
Specifically, the first movable effect member 17A emits blue or red light, and the blade portion housed in the sheath portion moves to the left from the standby position. ..

"With effect sound" in the column of effect sound in pseudo-failure indicates that a failure sound effect is output.
"With effect sound" in the column of effect sound in pseudo-success indicates that a pseudo-success sound effect is output.

The first feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern having a high expectation of big hit ( (Display of operation promotion image) A vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that it is a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of big hits, and the vibration effect executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed is a relatively short time. ing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-ream success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern with high jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation. There are two types depending on the type. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, the same effect device (button vibration motor, movable effect member) is used in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time reduction modes D to G. Although it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect), the jackpot expectation is high when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of production mode, and it is easy to raise the player's expectation in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-ream effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is the case of executing the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the movable effect member and the pseudo-ream effect using the movable effect member and the button vibration motor. In some cases, continuous production (pseudo continuous successful production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the pseudo-continuous production and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect button 6a may be in a protruding state during the valid period when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern in which the full rotation reach effect is executed) with high expectation of big hit. However, it may not be in a protruding state.

Further, there are a weak vibration effect and a strong start effect as the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous success effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.
In addition, although the valid period is generated (the operation promotion image is displayed) and the pseudo-ream success effect and the pseudo-ream failure effect are executed, the valid period is not generated (the operation promotion image is not displayed). A pseudo-ream success effect or a pseudo-ream failure effect may be executed. Regarding the vibration effect to be executed in the pseudo-ream success effect, only the weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or the strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be used, or only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used. May be good.

Further, in the normal modes A to C, the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device (button vibration motor, movable effect member) was executed rather than the probability change / time reduction modes D to G. The jackpot expectation of the case may be high.
Further, in the normal mode B or C, the jackpot expectation when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device is executed may be higher than in the normal mode A. ..
Further, in the probabilistic mode D or E, the jackpot expectation when the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect) using the same effect device is executed is higher than that in the time-saving mode F or G. May be good.

Further, in the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream success effect), the character motion effect using the first movable effect member 17A is executed, but the character motion effect using the first movable effect member 17A is performed. , The execution rate of the accessory movement effect using the second movable effect member 17B may be increased, or the first movable effect member 17A may be used as compared with the accessory operation effect using the second movable effect member 17B. The execution rate of the used character movement effect may be increased.
In the accessory movement effect using the second movable effect member 17B, the second movable effect member 17B emits red light and moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the central region of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It is a production that returns to the standby position after performing a wide and strong operation.

Even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, even if the special reach effect is executed based on the loss determination result or the jackpot determination result, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. ..
That is, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C is more pseudo than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G. It is easy to carry out continuous production.

(Development production pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a development effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the development effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the type of the development effect to be determined, and the selection rate (%) of each development effect pattern. ), The selected development effect pattern is associated. As a reference, the production composition of each development production pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and a plurality of translucent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position. be.
"None" in the column of the effective suggestion effect indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and "Yes" means that the effective suggestion effect is executed, but the valid period does not occur after that. It is shown that it is an effective suggestion effect, and "yes" indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed and the valid period occurs after that.

"Validity period: long press / 4 seconds" indicates that the development effect gradually progresses by pressing and holding the effect button 6a, and that the development effect ends when the valid period of the development effect elapses for 4 seconds.
The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position and the operation valid period in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image showing the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "long press" is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect is produced. It is shown that the button 6a emits white light.
The "normal button red" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits red light. It is shown that.

The "button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" indicates that the effect button 6a is in a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude, and "protrudes". "" Indicates that the effect button 6a is in a protruding state.

The "SP notification" in the column of the development effect mode indicates that the SP development effect suggesting the development to the SP reach effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
The "SPSP notification" indicates that the SPSP development effect suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
The "full rotation notification" indicates that the full rotation development effect suggesting the development to the full rotation reach effect is executed as a result of the development effect.

The "SP development symbol" in the column of the image of the development effect content indicates that the SP development symbol suggesting the development to the SP reach effect is derived and displayed.
The "SPSP development symbol" indicates that the SPSP development symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is derived and displayed.
The "full rotation development symbol" indicates that the full rotation development symbol that suggests the development to the full rotation reach effect is derived and displayed.

The "development sound effect A" in the effect sound column of the development effect content indicates that the development sound effect A is output when the SP development symbol is derived and displayed.
The "development sound effect B" indicates that the development sound effect B is output when the SPSP development symbol is derived and displayed.
The "development sound effect C" indicates that the development sound effect C is output when the full rotation development symbol is derived and displayed.
The development sound effect A, the development sound effect B, and the development sound effect C have different sound effects.

"Weak movement" in the column of accessory movement means that the first movable effect member 17A emits blue light when various symbols are derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period), and the blade part housed in the sheath from the standby position. It shows that it returns to the standby position after performing a weak operation with a small operation width that moves to the left.
"Strong operation" means that the second movable effect member 17B emits red light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (at the end of the valid period) from the standby position to the front side of the central region of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It is shown that a strong motion effect of performing a strong motion with a large motion width of moving downward is executed.
The jackpot expectation of each character movement effect is "weak movement"<"strongmovement".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is weak for 1 second from the time when various developed symbols are derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various developed symbols are derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). There is.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration"<"strongvibration".

The first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is the effect when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is performed. A vibration effect is executed in which the effect period of the button 6a is generated and the effect button 6a is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the full rotation development effect, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the SPSP development effect, is executed than the case where the SPSP development effect is executed. , The vibration effect of the effect button 6a is easily executed.
Further, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the SPSP development effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that it is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification), which is a variation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation and has a high jackpot expectation, is performed. The vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production with a high effect while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the execution of the jackpot game to be confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in the fluctuation effect pattern having a high expectation of big hit. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A, or) is used in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / normal modes D to G. Although it is possible to execute a development effect (SPSP development effect, etc.) using the second movable effect member 17B), the effect device (button vibration motor) is used in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G rather than the normal modes A to C. 6d, the expectation of a big hit is high when the development effect using the movable effect members 17A to 17C) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability different depending on the type of production mode, and it is easy to raise the player's expectation in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.
There are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the development effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.

Further, the normal modes A to C are more advanced effects using the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or second movable effect member 17B) than the probabilistic / time reduction modes D to G. The jackpot expectation when (SPSP development production, etc.) is executed may be increased.
Further, in the normal mode B or C, the development effect using the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or second movable effect member 17B) was executed as compared with the normal mode A. The jackpot expectation of the case may be high.
Further, the probability variation mode D or E may have a higher expectation of big hit when the development effect using the same effect device is executed than the time reduction mode F or G.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C and the determination result of the loss is obtained, the probability change / time saving mode D Even if the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a during G and the determination result of loss is obtained, the development effect accompanied by the button vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the jackpot game may be executed until the loss determination result is notified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
On the other hand, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and a special reach is executed in the case of a loss judgment result (see FIG. 44 (2)), it develops. No production is performed.
If a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and a special reach is executed in the case of a loss determination result, a development effect may be executed. In this case, a development effect without a vibration effect is executed.

The sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the special reach D is obtained when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit. It is possible to carry out developmental effects that sometimes accompany vibrational effects. In the development effect accompanied by this vibration effect, when the game ball wins a prize in the second start port 11a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit, or in the normal mode A to C, the first start port 10 is used. It is harder to execute than in the case of a big hit judgment result when a game ball wins a prize.

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a cut-in effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern (reach type), the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the selected cut An in-effect pattern is associated with it. As a reference, the production configuration of each cut-in production pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, it is an effect of moving and displaying a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a on the first image display device 16 and collecting the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.

"Validity period: single hit / 4 seconds" means that the valid period in the cut-in notification effect ends when the effect button 6a is single-stroked once, or 4 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. It shows that it ends by.
The "operation promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position and the operation valid period in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image showing the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press" is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light is displayed, and the effect is produced. It is shown that the button 6a emits white light.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating an effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits red light. Shows.
The "protruding button rainbow" means that, as an opaque effect button image, a button image imitating an effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. Shows.

The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period.
The "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 6a is in a normal state in which it does not protrude.
The “protruding” indicates that the effect button 6a is in a protruding state.

The "blue cut-in" in the image column of the cut-in effect mode indicates that the cut-in image of the blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 16.
The “green cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the green frame is displayed on the first image display device 16.
The “red cut-in” indicates that the cut-in image of the red frame is displayed on the first image display device 16.
The jackpot expectation of each cut-in image is "blue cut-in"<"greencut-in"<"redcut-in".

The "sound effect A" in the effect sound column indicates that the cut-in sound effect A is output when the blue cut-in is displayed.
The “sound effect B” indicates that the cut-in sound effect B is output when the green cut-in is displayed.
The "sound effect C" indicates that the cut-in sound effect C is output when the red cut-in is displayed.
The cut-in sound effect A, the cut-in sound effect B, and the cut-in sound effect C have different sound effects.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a starts displaying the cut-in image (when the effect button 6a is operated or the valid period ends). It is shown that a weak vibration effect of weak vibration is executed for 3 seconds from the beginning.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor 6d vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (when the effect button 6a is operated or the valid period ends). Indicates that it will be executed.
The jackpot expectation of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect"<"strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that when a cut-in image having a high expectation of a big hit is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated. (Display of operation promotion image) It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image with high jackpot expectation is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively long. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot expectation is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when the cut-in image having a high expectation of big hit is displayed (the cut-in effect is executed) is expected to be a big hit. There are two types depending on the degree. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The vibration effect executed in the cut-in effect includes a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect, but only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.
In addition, although the cut-in effect is executed by generating a valid period (with the operation promotion image displayed), the cut-in effect is executed without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image). You may do so. When the cut-in effect is executed without generating the valid period, only the weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or the strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be used, or only the weak vibration effect for 1 second or the strong vibration effect for 1 second. It may be only.

The fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C and the judgment result is lost, or the probability change / time saving mode Even if the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a during D to G and the determination result is lost, the cut-in effect accompanied by the button vibration effect is executed during the reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the jackpot game may be executed until the loss determination result is notified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
On the other hand, if the game ball wins in the first starting port 10a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the special reach E is executed in the case of a loss determination result, the first during the normal modes A to C. 1 When the game ball wins in the starting port 10a and the reach effect is executed in the case of the judgment result of loss, or in the probability change / time saving mode D to G, the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a and the judgment of loss is made. In the case of the result, it is more difficult to execute the cut-in effect accompanied by the button vibration than when the reach effect is executed.

The fifth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is the probability change / time reduction mode in the case where the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time reduction modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit. From the case where the game ball wins the second starting port 11a during D to G and the judgment result is a big hit, or when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal modes A to C and the judgment result is a big hit. However, it is difficult to perform a cut-in effect accompanied by a vibration effect.

The sixth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is the probability change / time reduction mode in the case where the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time reduction modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit. Effective suggestion effect and effect button 6a suggesting that a valid period may occur more than in the case of a jackpot judgment result when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a during D to G. It is difficult to execute the operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of.

(Determining production pattern determination table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a determination effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determination effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the determined effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern (reach type), the effect mode of each reach effect, and the selection rate (%) of the effect mode of each reach effect. ), A determined effect pattern corresponding to the selected effect mode is associated. As a reference, the production configuration of each determined production pattern is described.

"Battle A to C" in the column of the effect mode of the reach effect is an effect in which a ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle (the enemy characters appearing in battles A to C are different). At the end of the battle, during the valid period, the final attack (kick attack / punch attack / lariat) for the ally character to defeat the enemy character accompanying one single hit operation of the effect button 6a or one tilt operation of the effect lever 6h. (Attack) is delivered, and if the enemy character collapses, the battle wins, and if the enemy character does not collapse, the battle is defeated.

"Mission A" is an effect in which a large rock is gradually destroyed in association with the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a. If the rock can be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be successful, and if the rock cannot be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be unsuccessful.

"Mission B" means that the level value of the level meter (speedometer) of the running motorcycle is gradually increased and changed (for example, 0 → 1 → 2 ... 10) in association with the long press operation of the effect button 6a. (MAX) 10 levels). If the level value of the level meter reaches MAX during the valid period, the mission is successful, and if the level value of the level meter does not reach MAX during the valid period, the mission fails.

The "effective suggestion effect" in the effect composition column is an introductory effect that suggests that an effective period may occur. Specifically, the semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 6a and the semi-transparent effect lever image imitating the effect lever 6h are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and the semi-transparent effect button is directed to a specific position. It is a production that collects images and translucent production lever images.

In the case of the jackpot determination result, a vibration effect (for example, strong vibration for 2 seconds) that strongly vibrates the effect button 6a when the effective suggestion effect is performed may be performed. In addition, even if the execution rate of the vibration effect in the effective suggestion effect is higher when the jackpot symbol with odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed than when the jackpot symbol with even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed. good. When the vibration effect is executed during the effective suggestion effect, it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high.

The "valid period" in the column of the effect configuration means that the effective period in the determined effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single stroke operation / continuous stroke operation / long press operation) or the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilt operation). ), Or the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is not operated and 5 seconds elapse to indicate the end.

The "type of operation means" in the column of the validity period indicates the type of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) for which the operation is effective during the validity period, and if it is the "effect button", the effect button 6a It is shown that the operation is effective, and if it is the "effect lever", the operation of the effect lever 6h is effective.

The "operation promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period. Specifically, the operation of the opaque effect button image or the opaque effect lever image displayed at a specific position and the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is effective without executing the effective suggestion effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestion effect. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (5 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press, repeated hit, long press or close" is displayed.
The operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, or with the lapse of the valid period (5 seconds) without operating the operating means. ..

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. Indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating an effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits red light. Shows.
The "protruding button rainbow" means that, as an opaque effect button image, a button image imitating an effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. Shows.

The "normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating a predetermined size effect lever 6h is displayed as an opaque effect effect lever image.
The "large lever rainbow" indicates that a lever image imitating an effect lever 6h larger than a predetermined size is displayed as an opaque effect lever image.
The jackpot expectation of each operation promotion effect is "normal button white"<"protruding button red"<"normallever"<"protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow".

The "state of the operating means" indicates the state of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, and the "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. , If it is the effect lever 6h, it is a normal state in which it is not protruding, and "projection" means that it is a projecting state if it is the effect button 6a, and if it is the effect lever 6h, it is a projecting state. It shows that there is.
The jackpot expectation of the state of the operating means is "normal"<"protruding".

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column means that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruding state to the pressed position, and "continuous hit" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. "Long press" means that the effect button 6a is continuously pressed to the press position, and "tilt" means that the effect lever 6h is in the normal state. It shows that it is tilted from the position to the front and back.

The "decision failure effect" in the column of the determined effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
The "decision success effect" indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed.
The "failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark color image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and the "success image" means a success effect image on the screen of the first image display device 16. Is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button / lever vibration column is 1 after the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful effect. A strong vibration effect (determined successful vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of seconds is executed, and a lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6c is determined and 4 from the start of the successful effect. It shows that a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second is executed after the strong vibration over a second.

"Rainbow emission (11 seconds)" in the button / lever emission column means that the button emission LED 6e for emitting the effect button 6a is determined and succeeds. It emits rainbow light over a long period of time), and the lever light emitting LED 6k for making the effect lever 6h emit light is determined. It shows that it emits rainbow light.

"None" in the column of accessory operation indicates that the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
"Yes" in the column of the accessory operation is an accessory operation effect (determined operation effect) in which the movable effect members 17A to 17C operate and emit light in a predetermined mode. The execution period of the character motion effect (determined motion effect) is 10 seconds from the start of the determined success effect.
The "feature motion effect (decision motion effect)" means that after the movable effect members 17A to 17C start moving from the standby position to the effect position all at once, the movable effect members 17A to 17C at the effect position move to the standby position. It is a production until the return of is completed.
It should be noted that the effect of the accessory movement is performed from the start of movement of the movable effect members 17A to 17C from the standby position to the effect position until the movable effect members 17A to 17C start the return from the effect position to the standby position. May be.

More specifically, an effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left and an effect operation in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the image display device 16. And the effect operation in which the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C moves up and down is performed all at once (decision operation), and after each movable effect member 17A to 17C emits rainbow light, each movable effect member 17A to 17C emits light. Return to the standby position. The bonus movement effect in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C perform the effect operation all at once is executed when a determined effect among a plurality of types of jackpot notification effects is performed.

On the other hand, in the pseudo-continuous effect and the development effect, the effect operation (weak operation) by the first movable effect member 17A or the effect operation (strong operation) by the second movable effect member 17B is performed. That is, in the pseudo-continuous production and the development production, the character movement effect different from the character operation effect in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C perform the effect operation all at once is executed.

“None” in the effect sound column indicates that the effect sound (sound effect) is not output from the audio output device 9.
The "success sound effect" indicates that the success sound effect is output from the voice output device 9 as an effect sound. As for the success sound effect, the success sound effect A is output in the case of the decision success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target, and the success sound effect different from the success sound effect A in the case of the decision success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target. Sound effect B is output.
It should be noted that the success sound effect may be the same between the decision success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target and the decision success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target, and the success when the effect button 6a is in the normal state. Even if the sound effect, the success sound effect when the effect button 6a is in the protruding state, the success sound effect when the effect lever 6h is in the normal state, and the success sound effect when the effect lever 6h is in the protruding state are different. good.

"Non-light emission" in the lamp emission column means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "rainbow emission" means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 are rainbows. It shows that it emits light.

In this way, the determined success effect is an image display effect by the success effect image, an accessory movement effect by the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, a button vibration effect by the effect button 6a, and a button in which the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. It is composed of a series of effects, that is, a light emission effect, a lamp emission effect in which the lamps of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, and a sound effect in which a success sound effect is output from the voice output device 9. The effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated during the determined valid period.
On the other hand, in the decision failure effect, the character motion effect, the vibration effect, the button light emission effect, the lamp light emission effect, and the sound effect are not executed.

Since the effect button device 6A and the effect lever device 6C are provided on the storage plate (receiver) 5, when the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven, the vibration plays the role of a transmission member. It is transmitted to the effect lever 6h via the plate 5. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor 6j that vibrates the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a via the storage pan 5.

That is, if a vibration effect that vibrates the other operating means is executed while the player is operating one operating means by the operating hand, the vibration is transmitted to the operating hand of the player via the other means. It is designed to be transmitted.

Further, since the effect button device 6A, the effect lever device 6C, and the firing handle 7 are provided on the storage plate 5 attached to the opening / closing door 3 having the window 3a, the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven. Then, the vibration is transmitted to the firing handle 7 via the opening / closing door 3 and the storage tray 5 which play the role of a transmission member. Further, when the lever vibration motor 6j that vibrates the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a via the storage pan 5. A vibration motor may be provided on the launch handle 7 to vibrate the launch handle 7 itself.

It should be noted that the effect button device 6A may be provided with a decorative body unit that is connected to the inside of the button body of the effect button 6a so as to be relatively operable, and a drive mechanism that operates the button body and the decorative body unit individually or in conjunction with each other. good. In this case, the button body is assembled so as to move up and down relative to the decorative body unit. Further, the decorative body unit is provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units). Further, a cover portion which is arranged so as to surround the outer surface of the button main body portion and the decorative body unit and moves up and down is provided.
For example, when a spherical decorative unit is provided, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a in which the decorative unit emits red light is displayed in the operation promotion effect, and a successful determination effect is achieved by a single hit operation of the effect button 6a. From the start of execution, the decorative unit that emits red light due to the drive of the drive mechanism rotates for 4 seconds, then rotates again for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second, and the button body (directing). Button 6a) vibrates strongly (4 seconds → 5 seconds).
The decorative unit may be used instead of the effect lever 6h.

The first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the determination success effect is executed, a vibration effect (decision success) in which the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is vibrated by generating a determination effective period. Vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the effective period is the longest effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h vibrates over the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect generated during the fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the uplifting feeling of the player at the time of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a has a longer period (10 seconds including the pause period) than the vibration period of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h (10 seconds including the rest period). 11 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the effect button 6a (effect lever 6h) during the determination validity period is the same in the determination success effect regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the protruding state. The vibration effect of the vibration effect mode (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of whether the state of the effect button 6a during the determined valid period is the normal state or the protruding state, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible.

The sixth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is whether the determination success effect associated with the operation of the effect button 6a is executed or the determination success effect associated with the operation of the effect lever 6h is executed. , The vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the decision success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of the type of the operating means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined successful effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) regardless of the type of reach effect. .. That is, regardless of whether the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed or the jackpot effect symbol 16a with odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed, the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect. Are the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol 16a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the determination success effect accompanying the operation of the operation means is executed, the operation mode of the operation means (single hit operation / continuous hit operation / length of the effect button 6a). The vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) regardless of the push operation, the tilt operation of the effect lever 6h) and the type of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed regardless of the operation mode of the operation means and the type of the operation means in the determined valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the jackpot symbol of "7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed rather than the jackpot symbol of even-numbered symbol alignment or "7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed. It is easier to execute the decision success effect accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h. Therefore, it is possible to give a rarity to the successful decision production accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the ratio of the determination success effect of the effect lever 6h to be executed is the same in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, but in the normal mode. The probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G may have a higher rate of execution of the decision success effect accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h than the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to C, or may be higher than the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G. However, in the normal modes A to C, the rate at which the decision success effect accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h may be executed may be higher.

It should be noted that at least two or more operating means may be used as the above-mentioned determined successful vibration effect. Specifically, the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h, the effect button 6a and the firing handle 7, or the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h and the firing handle 7 are used to perform a successful vibration effect (strong vibration for a long time). .. As a result, it is possible to execute a successful vibration effect that can give a strong impact.

For example, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, a successful vibration effect determined by the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h, and the firing handle 7 is executed.
In the case of a 4R probability variation jackpot, a successful vibration effect determined by the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h is executed.
In the case of a 4R normal jackpot, a successful vibration effect determined by the effect button 6a and the firing handle 7 is executed.

The tenth feature of the determination effect determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10a during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the determination result is a big hit, the operation of the operating means is performed. The accompanying decision effect (effect success image, decision success vibration effect, decision operation by the movable effect members 17A to 17C) is executed.
If the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit, the execution rate of the reach effect (special reach D) accompanied by the decision effect is low ( (See FIG. 44 (2)). Compared to the case where the game ball wins a prize and the jackpot judgment result or the game ball wins in the second starting port 11 during the probability change / time saving mode D to G and the jackpot judgment result, the decision effect involving the operation of the operating means is performed. Hard to execute.
When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the determination result is a big hit, a determination effect that does not involve the operation of the operating means may be executed.

The eleventh feature of the decision-making effect decision table shown in FIG. 52 is that when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10a during the probability variation / time saving modes D to G and the judgment result is a big hit, the reach accompanied by the decision-making effect. Since the execution rate of the effect (special reach D) is low (see FIG. 44 (2)), the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probability change / time saving modes D to G, and the judgment result of the jackpot is In this case, the effective suggestion effect and the effective suggestion that the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a during the probability change / time saving modes D to G and the valid period may occur more than in the case of the big hit judgment result. It is difficult to execute the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 6a during the period.

(Information table for successful decision production)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an information table for determining success effect, which is referred to when executing the determination success effect.
The decision success effect (image effect, character movement effect, vibration effect, button light emission effect, lamp light emission effect, and sound effect) is the effect content of the reach effect that involves the operation of the operation means during the determined valid period during the SPSP reach effect (the effect of the reach effect). Based on the battle / mission), when it is started when the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) is started, and when it is started after the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) is started. There is.

When Battle A or Battle B is executed as an SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during the execution of Battle A or Battle B (at the end of the game), and one single operation of the effect button 6a is performed. An operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image, character image of "press") is displayed.
Then, when the single hit operation of the effect button 6a is started during the determined valid period, the determined success effect is started. On the other hand, if the single hit operation of the effect button 6a is not performed during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

When Battle C is executed as an SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during the execution of Battle C, and an operation promotion image (opaque effect lever image) that encourages one tilting operation of the effect lever 6h. , Gauge image, text image of "close") is displayed.
Then, when the one-time tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is started during the determined valid period, the determined success effect is started. On the other hand, if the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is not performed during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

When mission A (Mission of destroying Oiwa) is executed as an SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during the execution of mission A, and an operation promotion image (opaque) that prompts the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a. The effect button image, gauge image, and character image of "continuous hit") are displayed.
Then, when the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a is started during the determined valid period and then Oiwa is completely destroyed, the determined success effect is started. On the other hand, if the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a is not performed during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

When mission B (successful mission to reach the level meter MAX) is executed as an SPSP reach effect, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started during the execution of mission B, and an operation for prompting a long press operation of the effect button 6a is performed. The promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image, "long press" character image) is displayed.
Then, when the level value of the level meter reaches MAX after the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started during the determined valid period, the determined success effect is started. On the other hand, if the effect button 6a is not pressed and held during the determined valid period, the determined successful effect is started at the end of the determined valid period.

In this way, the decision success effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated during the valid period.
In addition, the start timing of the successful decision effect in the case of the battle effect based on the single hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, and the successful decision effect in the case of the battle effect based on the continuous hit operation or the long press operation of the effect button 6a. The start timing of is different.

Therefore, even for the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect), in the case of a battle effect based on a single single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, the single stroke operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed. When it is started (due to the start of operation of the operating means), the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started. On the other hand, if the single hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is not performed, the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started at the end of the determined valid period.

Further, in the case of a mission effect based on a continuous press operation or a long press operation of the effect button 6a, when the mission is successful after the continuous press operation or the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started (not caused by the start of the operation of the operating means). Strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) will be started. On the other hand, if the continuous striking operation or the long press operation of the effect button 6a is not performed, the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started at the end of the determined valid period.

Further, in the case of the mission A based on the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a, a strong vibration effect for 1 second is performed immediately after the continuous striking operation of the effect button 6a is started and immediately before the Oiwa is completely destroyed.
Further, in the case of mission B based on the long press operation of the effect button 6a, when the level value of the level meter reaches the level value immediately before reaching MAX after the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started, a strong vibration effect for 1 second is produced. Is executed.

In the case of mission B based on the long press operation of the effect button 6a, the level value of the level meter reaches a predetermined specific value (2, 4, 6, 8) after the long press operation of the effect button 6a is started. The vibration effect (weak vibration) may be performed for each, or the effect mode (vibration period, vibration intensity, etc.) of the vibration effect may be different. For example, when the level value of the level meter is the first specific value (“2”), the vibration mode of the vibration effect (“bull” with a vibration time of 0.2 seconds) and the second specific value (“4”). In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration effect (“blur” with a vibration time of 0.3 seconds) may be different.

When a battle effect based on a continuous hit operation or a long press operation of the effect button 6a is executed, a successful effect is determined when the battle is won after the continuous or long press operation of the effect button 6a is started (decision successful vibration effect). Is started.
That is, even if the production content (battle effect) of the same reach effect is used, the start timing of the determined success effect (determined successful vibration effect) differs depending on the operation mode of the effect button 6a.

(Execution start timing and end timing of decision success production)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an execution start timing and an end timing of a determination success effect (success image, determination success vibration effect, determination accessory effect) depending on the presence or absence of operation of the operating means.
FIG. 54 (1) is a diagram showing the execution start timing and end timing of the determination success effect (determination success vibration effect) when the button operation is not performed during the valid period. FIGS. 54 (2-1) and 54 (2-2) show the execution start timing and end of the determined success effect (success image, determined successful vibration effect, determined object effect) when the button operation is performed during the valid period. It is a figure which shows the timing.

Comparing FIGS. 54 (1), (2-1) and (2-2), the decision success effect is executed regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not operated during the valid period.
Further, the execution start timing of the determined success effect differs depending on the operation timing (timing depending on the presence or absence of operation) of the effect button 6a during the valid period (timing of T1 or T2).
The end timing of the determined success effect is the same regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period (timing of T7).
Therefore, the display start timing of the success effect image, the vibration start timing of the strong vibration effect, and the operation start timing of the accessory motion effect differ depending on the presence / absence and operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the success effect image is displayed. The period, the execution period of the strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect), and the execution period of the accessory movement effect are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (2-1), when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (timing of T2), it is higher than when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period (). (Timing of T3), since the display start timing of the success effect image is earlier, the display period of the success effect image becomes longer.
That is, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, the display of the success effect image is started at the start of the operation, and continues to be displayed until the determined success effect is completed.

Further, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (timing of T2), the vibration start timing of the strong vibration effect is earlier than when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period (timing of T3). Therefore, the execution period of the strong vibration effect becomes long (the execution period of the strong vibration effect is variable). Specifically, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds) by the vibration motor 6d is started at the start of the operation, and strong vibration (4) until the successful determination effect is completed. Seconds → 5 seconds) is repeated.
That is, when the execution period of the vibration effect is variable, the vibration effect is executed up to the same timing (timing at which the determined success effect ends) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing.

Further, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (timing of T2), the operation start timing of the accessory motion effect is higher than when the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period (timing of T3). Since the speed is increased, the execution period of the character movement effect becomes longer (the execution period of the character movement effect is variable). Specifically, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, the determination operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started at the start of the operation, and the timing before the end of the determination success effect (timing of T6). ), The movable effect members 17A to 17C remain in the effect position, and then the movable effect members 17A to 17C return to the standby position.
That is, when the execution period of the character motion effect is variable, the character motion effect is performed up to the same timing (timing at which the determined success effect ends) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 54 (2-2), the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the accessory operation effect are unchanged regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. May be good. Specifically, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the character motion effect ends at a timing (T5 timing) before the timing at which the determined success effect ends. , Only the success effect image will continue to be displayed.
That is, when the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the accessory motion effect are unchanged, the strong vibration effect and the accessory motion effect are terminated according to the presence / absence and operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period. The timing is different.

In the case of the above-mentioned cut-in effect, the execution period does not change regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period (similar to FIG. 54 (2-2)). Therefore, since the execution period of the vibration effect does not change, the start timing and the end timing of the vibration effect correspond to the operation timing of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessively arousing the expectation of the player.

(Vibration production information table for pattern matching)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a vibration effect information table for symbol alignment, which is referred to when the jackpot effect symbol of symbol alignment is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot variation effect.
The "big hit symbol alignment" is an even-numbered symbol of "222", "a jackpot display mode" by the effect symbol 16a of a decorative display mode (display mode in which the numbers are surrounded by a decorative frame) mainly composed of characters such as numbers. It indicates that an odd numbered symbol of "777") is formed and stopped and displayed.
It should be noted that the jackpot display mode may be formed by the effect symbol 16a of the highly decorative display mode (7 and the pig character) composed of numbers and characters, and the display may be stopped.

In the jackpot variation effect, the jackpot variation effect pattern that involves the operation of the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h during the reach effect is executed to align the jackpot symbols, and the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is operated during the reach effect. There is a jackpot variable effect pattern in which a decision effect that does not involve is executed and the jackpot symbols are aligned.

The jackpot variable effect pattern in which the determined effect without the operation of the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is executed during the reach effect and the jackpot symbols are aligned is the SP reach jackpot variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern 14: Fig. 43).
Specifically, the image display effect by the effect image, the character movement effect by the third movable effect member 17C, and the effect button 6a are performed without a valid period determined at the end of the SP reach effect (no operation promotion image is displayed). From the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds), the button light emission effect in which the effect button 6a emits rainbow light, the lamp emission effect in which the lamps of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, and the sound output device 9. A series of determination of the sound effect for outputting the success effect sound After the success effect is executed, the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed with the D symbols aligned.

In the accessory movement effect by the third movable effect member 17C, the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C that emitted rainbow light was pulled out from the sheath portion and tilted to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. A decision operation is performed to return to the standby position later. The operation mode of this determination operation is different from the determination operation executed in the determination success effect accompanied by the operation of the operating means. It should be noted that the same operation mode as the deciding operation executed in the deciding success effect accompanied by the operation of the operating means may be used.

As shown in FIG. 55 (1), the decision success effect is executed during the reach effect, and the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode. Even when it is displayed (first timing), the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image) vibrates strongly for 4 seconds. A strong vibration effect is performed.

When the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode without executing the determined success effect during the reach effect (first timing). Even so, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates for 4 seconds without generating an effective period (without displaying the operation promotion image).

In this way, even if the determined effect is executed and the jackpot effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode, the valid period The vibration effect is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds) without generating the above (without displaying the operation promotion image).
Further, even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in either the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) or the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) display mode without executing the determined effect, the valid period is set. The vibration effect is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds) without generating it (without displaying the operation promotion image).
That is, the vibration effect executed when the jackpot symbols are aligned is the jackpot effect regardless of whether or not the determined effect is executed and in any of the display modes of even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) and odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”). Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, the vibration mode is the same (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 55 (2), when the effect symbol 16a of the jackpot symbol alignment at the second timing after the first timing is temporarily stopped and displayed, the vibration period of the vibration effect differs depending on the type of the symbol. There is.
A valid period is generated regardless of whether the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in any of the display modes of even-numbered symbol alignment (for example, "222") and odd-numbered symbol symbol alignment other than 7 (for example, "333"). A strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second without displaying the operation promotion image.
On the other hand, when the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode of "7" symbol alignment, the button vibration for vibrating the effect button 6a without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image). A strong vibration effect is executed in which the motor 6d vibrates strongly for 4 seconds.

(Re-lottery production pattern determination table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the re-lottery effect pattern determination table, the type of effect mode, the presence / absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the selected re-lottery effect Patterns are associated. As a reference, the production configuration of each re-lottery production pattern is described.

"Validity period: single hit / 3 seconds" indicates that the validity period in the re-lottery effect ends with one operation of the effect button 6a or when 3 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. ing.
Although the effective suggestion effect is not executed in the re-lottery effect, the effective suggestion effect may be executed. Further, when the promotion success effect is executed in the re-lottery effect, the vibration effect may be executed during the effective suggestion effect. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player even before the promotion success production is executed.

The "operation promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, the gauge is the remaining period of the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effect suggestion effect and the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective. An operation promotion image composed of a gauge image indicated by the length of and a character image of "press" is displayed.

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. Indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits red light. Shows.
The "normal button rainbow" means that, as an opaque effect button image, a button image imitating an effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. Shows.
The jackpot expectation of each promotion effect is "normal button white"<"normal button red"<"normal button rainbow".

The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period. The "normal" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 6a is in a normal state in which it does not protrude.

The "promotion failure effect" in the column of the re-lottery effect mode is a non-promotion symbol that does not become an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even-numbered symbol → even-numbered symbol, odd-numbered symbol other than “7” → It indicates that the odd-numbered symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped display).
The "promotion success effect" is a derivation display of a promotion symbol (for example, an even number symbol → an odd number symbol, an odd number symbol other than “7” → a “7” symbol) that becomes an effect symbol advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect. (Temporary stop display) is displayed.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect is executed.

"Rainbow emission (4 seconds)" in the button emission column means that the button emission LED 6e for emitting the effect button 6a is for 4 seconds (the effect button 6a is strong) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). It shows that it emits rainbow light over a period of time (longer than it is vibrating).

The "non-promotion sound effect" in the column of the effect sound indicates that the non-promotion sound effect is output when the non-promotion symbol is derived and displayed.
The "promotion sound effect" indicates that the promotion sound effect is emitted when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed.

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibration effect that generates an effective period and vibrates the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the player has been promoted to a jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the re-lottery effect is executed by generating a valid period (with the operation promotion image displayed), the re-lottery effect is performed without generating the valid period (without displaying the operation promotion image). You may want to do it.

(Number of button vibrations executed since the start of the successful decision production)
FIG. 57 shows from the start of the decision success effect in the jackpot variation effect in which the re-lottery effect is executed until the jackpot effect symbol is confirmed and stopped displayed (decision success effect, symbol alignment effect, re-lottery effect, symbol alignment effect, It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the button vibration of (the symbol fixed stop).

As shown in FIG. 57, there are cases where the even-numbered jackpot effect symbol 16a is displayed as a fixed stop display and cases where the odd-numbered symbol-matched jackpot effect symbol 16a is displayed as a fixed stop after the decision success effect is started. , The number of times the button vibration is executed is different.

Specifically, if the even-numbered symbol (“2” symbol) is not promoted to an odd-numbered symbol in the re-lottery effect and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols is definitely stopped, the decision success effect is started. The number of times the button vibration is executed until the symbol is fixed and stopped is three times.
If the odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol ("3" symbol) are not promoted to the "7" symbol in the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with the odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is fixedly stopped. , The number of times the button vibration is executed from the start of the decision success effect to the stop of the symbol determination is 3 times.

On the other hand, if the even-numbered symbol ("2" symbol) is promoted to the odd-numbered symbol ("7" symbol) in the re-lottery effect and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with the odd-numbered symbols is fixedly stopped, the decision success effect starts. The number of times the button vibration is executed from the time when the pattern is fixed to the time when the symbol is fixed is 4 times.
If the odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol ("3" symbol) are promoted to the "7" symbol in the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot effect symbol 16a with the "7" symbol match is confirmed and stopped, the decision is successful. The number of times the button vibration vibration is executed from the start of is to the stop of the symbol determination is 4 times.

In this way, the case where the promotion symbol that is the jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect rather than the case where the non-promoted symbol that is not the jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect. The number of times the button vibration is executed and the number of times the character effect is executed is larger from the start of the successful decision effect to the stop of the symbol confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and to enhance the joy of the player's jackpot winning, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if a non-promoted symbol that does not become a jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is temporarily stopped and displayed after the successful decision production, or if a jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is temporarily stopped and displayed, the successful decision vibration effect of the successful decision production The vibration effect mode is the same (vibration period of 4 seconds → 5 seconds with strong vibration).

Even if the jackpot symbol that is not advantageous to the player is temporarily stopped when the effect symbol with the same pattern is temporarily stopped after the successful decision production, the jackpot symbol that is advantageous to the player is provisionally. Even when stopped, the vibration mode of the button vibration is the same (vibration period of 4 seconds with strong vibration).

(Final production pattern decision table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a final effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern for a final effect.

As shown in FIG. 58, the definite effect pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a type of variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each definite effect pattern, and a definite effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the production configuration of each final production pattern is described.

"-" In the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the final effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the final effect is executed.
The "confirmed sound" in the column of the effect sound indicates that a definite sound for notifying that the jackpot game is executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for making the firing handle 7 emit light is a rainbow from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the effect symbol 16a stops and displays). It shows that it emits light.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the definite sound is output. It is shown that.

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the final effect is executed, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a without generating an effective period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the definite effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 7 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the strong vibration effect is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Resurrection production pattern determination table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a revival effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an effect pattern of the revival effect.

As shown in FIG. 59, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the reach type, the selection rate (%) of each resurrection effect pattern, and the selected resurrection effect pattern are associated with the effect mode. As a reference, the production composition of each revival production pattern is described.

In the "SP reach" column of the variable effect pattern column, if the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot and a resurrection effect pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect is selected, it is suggested that the battle win / mission will be successful in the SP reach effect. Victory / success suggestion effect is performed, and the effect symbol 16a with D symbols (only numbers) is temporarily stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, if the jackpot judgment result is a loss or a jackpot and the resurrection effect pattern that executes the resurrection effect is selected, the defeat / success suggestion effect that suggests that the battle is defeated / the mission fails in the SP reach effect is performed. The effect symbol 16a indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped and displayed.

The "valid period" in the column of the effect configuration means that the effective period in the revival effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single stroke operation / continuous stroke operation) or with the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilt operation). It indicates that the process ends or the effect button 6a / effect lever 6h is not operated and the process ends after 4 seconds have elapsed.

The "type of operation means" in the column of the validity period indicates the type of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) for which the operation is effective during the validity period, and if it is the "effect button", the effect button 6a It is shown that the operation is effective, and if it is the "effect lever", the operation of the effect lever 6h is effective.

The "operation promotion effect" is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image, and a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation valid period (4 seconds) in which the operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is effective by the length of the gauge. An operation promotion image composed of a character image of "press, repeated hits, or close" is displayed.
The operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, or with the lapse of the valid period (4 seconds) without operating the operating means. ..

The "normal button white" in the operation promotion effect column is a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is not protruding and emits white light as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. Indicates that white light is emitted.
The "normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating a predetermined size effect lever 6h is displayed as an opaque effect effect lever image.

The "state of the operating means" indicates the state of the operating means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, and the "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. ..

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column means that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruding state to the pressed position, and "continuous hit" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. It indicates that the pressing operation is continuously performed a plurality of times, and "tilting" indicates that the effect lever 6h is tilted in the front-rear direction from the position in the normal state.

The "revival failure effect" in the column of the revival effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
The "revival success effect" indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is executed.
The "failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark color image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and the "success image" means a success effect image on the screen of the first image display device 16. Is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds)" in the button / lever vibration column is a strong vibration effect (revival) in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful effect effect. The successful vibration effect) is executed, and the strong vibration effect (revival successful vibration effect) in which the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h vibrates strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the revival successful effect is executed. Which indicates that.

"Rainbow emission" in the button / lever emission column means that the button emission LED 6e for emitting the effect button 6a is determined and succeeds for 6 seconds from the start of the effect (a longer period than when the effect button 6a vibrates strongly). The lever light emitting LED 6k for emitting the effect lever 6h is determined to emit rainbow light over a period of 6 seconds (longer period than when the effect button 6a vibrates strongly) from the start of the successful effect. It is shown that.

"None" in the column of accessory operation indicates that the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
"Yes" in the column of the accessory operation indicates that the third movable effect member 17C performs the accessory operation effect of operating and emitting light in a predetermined mode.
Specifically, the third movable effect member 17C in the standby position emits rainbow light, and the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion to perform an effect operation of tilting to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16 and then to the standby position. The character movement effect is performed by the strong movement with a large movement width to return.

“None” in the effect sound column indicates that the effect sound (sound effect) is not output from the audio output device 9.
The "success sound effect" indicates that the success sound effect is output from the voice output device 9 as an effect sound. As for the success sound effect, the success sound effect A is output in the case of the revival success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target, and the success sound effect A is in the case of the revival success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target. A success sound effect B with different sounds is output.
It should be noted that the same success sound effect may be used for the revival success effect in which the effect button 6a is the operation target and the revival success effect in which the effect lever 6h is the operation target.

"Non-light emission" in the lamp emission column means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "rainbow emission" means that the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 are rainbows. It shows that it emits light.

The first feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when the revival effect is executed, a vibration effect (revival success vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is vibrated by generating an effective period is generated. ) Is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the revival jackpot will be achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the uplifting feeling of the player even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is whether the revival success effect associated with the operation of the effect button 6a is executed or the revival success effect associated with the operation of the effect lever 6h is executed. , The vibration mode of the vibration effect in the revival success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of operation means, it is possible to effectively notify that the game will be a resurrection jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when the revival success effect accompanying the operation of the operation means is executed, the operation mode of the operation means (single hit operation / continuous hit operation of the effect button 6a, effect lever). Regardless of the tilting operation of 6h), the vibration mode of the vibration effect in the revival success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the revival jackpot will be achieved regardless of the operation mode of the operation means during the valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59, the revival effect is more likely to be executed in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect in the probability variation mode from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the probability variation / time saving modes D to G play a game in the revival success effect than the normal modes A to C. It is easy for the jackpot symbol of the "7" symbol matching, in which the jackpot game that is most advantageous to the person is executed, to be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it becomes easy to raise the player's expectation in the probability change / time saving modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the revival effect can be executed even at the time of SPSP reach (for example, SPSP reach in which the determined effect is not executed), and the revival effect pattern is determined with reference to the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59.

(Example of production when continuous notice production and step-up notice production are executed)
An example of the effect when the button vibration advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) and the step-up advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

As shown in FIG. 60 (1), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbols 16a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ of "216" are set for a predetermined time. It is in the state of confirming stop display. Further, a hold number of "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 16e, and three hold icons "◎ (white)" are displayed in the first hold icon display area 16b. At this time, since it is not in the customer waiting state, the lamp light emitting effect is performed by the panel lighting device 23.

The symbol confirmation period in which the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped and displayed is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern to be executed and the jackpot determination result.
The variable display of the special symbol TZ is continuously performed in a fixed display mode during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display.
Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is a position considered so as to be easy to maintain a visible state even when the effect operation of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is performed on the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. For example, it is displayed in the vicinity of the lower left end of the display screen of the first image display device 16). As a more preferable embodiment, it is preferable that the first movable effect members 17A to 17C are not shielded by the effect operation and are always displayed in a visually recognizable state.

Similar to the special symbol TZ, the display of the reserved numbers in the first reserved number display area 16e and the second reserved number display area 16f is maintained in a visible state even when the effect operations of the movable effect members 17A to 17C are performed. It is displayed at a position considered for ease (for example, the edge of the display screen of the first image display device 16). In a more preferred embodiment, it is preferable that the display is always visible without being shielded by the effect operation of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 60 (2), when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, at least a part of the three effect symbols 16a performs a predetermined operation to display the variation of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a). The fluctuation start suggestion effect HS suggesting that is started is performed.

As the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, for example, the face of "dog, cat, tiger" in the decoration part of the three effect patterns 16a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" displayed as confirmed stop is enlarged. At the same time, a variation start operation is performed in which the eyes of the "dog, cat, tiger" are changed, and the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 16a) is started by a display mode different from the display mode of the effect symbol 16a that has been confirmed and stopped. It is suggested that it will be done.

Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the effect symbol 16a by performing the variation start suggestion effect HS, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the next symbol variation display will be started after the symbol determination is stopped. It will be possible.

With the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first reserved number display area 16e changes from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons shift toward the variable icon display area 16d. In addition, the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS.

Further, with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first effect of the button vibration notice effect over the three variation effects is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a vibrates slightly for 1 second, and the effect button 6a blinks white for a weak notice.

After that, when the hold icon (hold icon "◎" at the left end in the figure) that is the target of the button vibration notice effect changes to a blue icon immediately after the shift of the hold icon is completed, the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS ends, and the figure As shown in 60 (3), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR emits the same blue light as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 60 (4), after the fluctuation time elapses, the three effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode “2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)” indicating normal loss. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in combination with "245".

As shown in FIG. 60 (5), when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the next variation effect is started, and the variation start suggestion effect HS is performed.
With the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first reserved number display area 16e changes from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons are shifted toward the variable icon display area 16d. In addition, the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS.

Further, with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the second effect of the button vibration advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a is slightly vibrated for 1 second, and a weak notice is given that the effect button 6a blinks in white.

After that, when the hold icon (hold icon "◎" at the left end in the figure) that is the target of the button vibration notice effect changes to a red icon immediately after the shift of the hold icon is completed, the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS ends, and the figure As shown in 60 (6), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR emits the same red light as the red icon, and the lamp change effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 60 (7), after the fluctuation time elapses, the three effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode “3 (rabbit) 1 (cat) 2 (dog)” indicating normal loss. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in combination with "312".

As shown in FIG. 60 (8), when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the variation effect of the advance notice target is started, and the variation start suggestion effect HS is performed. With the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS, the first reserved number display area 16e changes from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon shifts toward the variable icon display area 16d. In addition, the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started with the start of the variation start suggestion effect HS.

Further, with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the third effect of the button vibration advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 3 seconds, and a strong notice is given to make the effect button 6a blink red.

After that, when the shift of the hold icon is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (9), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration effect continues. It becomes. After that, the strong vibration and red blinking of the effect button 6a stop, and the third effect of the button vibration warning effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the third effect of the button vibration advance notice effect, the first step effect (SU1) of the step-up advance notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (10). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a first step image showing how the bus arrives, and outputs a first step sound effect.

When the first step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (11), the process develops into the second step and the second step effect (SU2) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a second-step image showing how a female character gets off the arriving bus and the bus runs away, and outputs a second-step sound effect.

When the second step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (12), the process develops into the third step and the third step effect (SU3) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a third-step image showing how a male character appears and walks up to the male character in which the female character appears, and outputs a third-step sound effect. To.

When the third step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (13), the process develops into the fourth step and the fourth step effect (SU4) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fourth-step image showing how the female character and the male character approach each other, and outputs a fourth-step sound effect.

When the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (14), the process develops into the fifth step and the fifth step effect (SU5) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fifth-step image showing how the two characters are talking with a smile, and outputs a fifth-step sound effect.
Further, the weak vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is started while the effect button 6a is turned off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the operation promotion effect, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect sound when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are not output. The lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continuously performed.

When 1 second has passed from the start of the weak vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (15), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a stops, the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds after the end of the weak vibration effect. The fifth step production is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (16), the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed. become.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, after the number of holds displayed in the hold number display area 16e decreases with the start of the change effect (after the start of the change start suggestion effect). The button vibration warning effect is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable effect has been started, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the button vibration notice effect is being executed, which can improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 60, when the button vibration advance notice effect is executed, the effect button 6a is made to blink white, although the operation promotion effect is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the effect button 6a is not operated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the button vibration advance notice effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 61, the vibration effect is not executed during the first to fourth step effects of the step-up notice effect, but the vibration effect is executed during the fifth step effect, which has the highest expectation of a big hit. It has become like. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 61, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect is larger than the execution period (3 seconds) of the fifth step effect of the step-up notice effect. Is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the step effect, prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 61, the vibration effect executed at the time of the fifth step effect is not accompanied by the operation promotion effect, so that the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect button during the valid period are used. The effect sound (operation sound effect, operation sound effect of the movable effect member, etc.) when the 6a is operated is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect that does not accompany the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as pausing the lamp light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not emitted in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, the effect button 6a is set to a predetermined mode (for example, yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light by blinking or the like). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when button vibration notice effect and dialogue notice effect are executed)
An example of the effect when the button vibration advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) and the dialogue advance notice effect are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 62.

As shown in FIG. 60 (9) above, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration effect remains. After that, the strong vibration and red blinking of the effect button 6a stop, and the third effect of the button vibration warning effect ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (17), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the third effect of the button vibration warning effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (18), the valid period of the effect button 6a (single stroke 3). Seconds) will occur and the dialogue notice production will start. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining period of the valid period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. At the same time as being output, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is operated by a single stroke or the valid period elapses without being operated, the thermal dialogue "You can expect it" is displayed in the red character image SF as shown in FIG. 62 (19). At the same time, a voice (directing sound) corresponding to the heat dialogue is output. Further, the weak vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is started while the effect button 6a is turned off, but the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues.

When 1 second has passed from the start of the weak vibration effect, the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds after the end of the weak vibration effect, the dialogue advance notice effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (20), after the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is continuously performed, the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the normal effect is executed, or the normal reach is executed according to the variable effect pattern. The SP reach effect is executed after the effect is executed, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue advance notice effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice effect. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is not accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a, so that the operation promotion image is displayed. The display sound effect and the effect sound when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are not output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, the lamp light emission effect by the board lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect of the effect button 6a accompanied by the operation promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as pausing the lamp light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the effect button 6a is set in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white, blinking yellow, etc.) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue advance notice effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

If the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period, the dialogue notice effect may not be executed. Further, when the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed or may be executed.

(Example of production when pseudo-continuous production is executed)
An example of the effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side region, and the effect symbol 16a of "5 (koala)" is in the right side region. Temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the effect symbol 16a continues in the central region. As shown in FIG. 63 (2), the pseudo continuous effect is started without the valid period of the effect button 6a occurring (the operation promotion image is not displayed). Specifically, in the central region, a pseudo fanning effect is executed, which encourages whether or not the pseudo symbol (NEXT symbol) suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is temporarily stopped.

After that, when the fanning effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the central region and the success sound effect is output as the pseudo-continuous success effect.
As shown in FIG. 63 (4), the effect symbol 16a revariates (pseudo 2). After that, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 63 (5), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side region, and "5 (5)" is temporarily stopped in the right side region. Koala) ”has been temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the effect symbol 16a continues in the central region.

As shown in FIG. 63 (6), in the central region, a pseudo fanning effect is executed, which encourages whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is temporarily stopped. At this time, the valid period of the effect button 6a is generated, the operation promotion image GS (the opaque effect button image imitating the white light emission effect button 6a and the gauge image) is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image GS is displayed. Is output. In addition, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-stroked or not operated and the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 63 (7), as a pseudo-continuous success effect, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the central region and succeeds. Sound effects are output. Further, the effect button 6a is turned off, and the effect button 6a is vibrated for 1 second to start a weak vibration effect.

When 1 second has elapsed from the start of the weak vibration effect, the weak vibration of the effect button 6a is stopped and the weak vibration effect ends, as shown in FIG. 63 (8). Then, an effect notice effect is executed in which the blade portion housed in the sheath portion of the first movable effect member 17A that emits red light moves to the left, and the effect symbol 16a changes again (pseudo 3). ).

When the effect operation time (1 second) of the first movable effect member 17A elapses, the pseudo-ream success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 63 (9), the effect of "4 (chicken)" is produced in the left side region and the right side region. The symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in the reach state, and the normal reach effect is started. After that, the SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or the SPSP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 63, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect is executed. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 63, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-ream success effect is shorter than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo-ream success effect. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-ream success effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 63, the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and therefore is displayed when the operation promotion image is displayed. A sound effect and a sound effect (operation sound effect, success sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the pseudo-continuous production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 63, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 6a and the operation timing during the effective period. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 63, the lamp light emission effect by the board lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as suspending the effect emission due to the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect button 6a is set in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo continuous effect, the same timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (0.5 seconds after) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated during the pseudo-continuous effect to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 6a, the effect button 6a vibrates without being generated during the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect may be executed, or the effect period 6a may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and develops into SP reach production)
An example of an effect when the development effect is executed and the SP reach effect is developed will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

As shown in FIG. 64 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), the SP development effect is started. In the SP development production, "SPSP development" suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production, "SP development" suggesting the development to the SP reach production, and "cass" suggesting that the production does not develop (missing). After the roulette marked with "" is rotated in a predetermined direction and a fanning effect is performed to incite which of "SPSP development", "SP development", and "cass" is selected, "SPSP development", A development destination roulette production is performed in which either "SP development" or "cass" is determined.

When a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), it is notified that "SP development" is determined and the SP reach is developed. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (4), a transition effect in which the screen is whitened out is performed. As shown in FIG. 64 (5), the left and right effect symbols 16a rotate and move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the effect symbol 16a of only "4" is reduced. As shown in 6), the SP reach effect is started.

(Example of production when development production is executed and develops into SPSP reach production)
As shown in FIG. 65 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), the SPSP development effect is started. In the SPSP development production, "SPSP development" suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production, "SP development" suggesting the development to the SP reach production, and "full rotation" suggesting the development to the full rotation reach production. After the roulette marked with is rotated in a predetermined direction to incite which of "SPSP development", "SP development", and "full rotation" is selected, "SPSP development" and "SPSP development" are performed. A roulette effect will be performed in which either "SP development" or "full rotation" is determined.

When a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 65 (3), the effective suggestion effect YS suggesting that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective is started. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and the semi-transparent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 65 (4), the operation promotion image SG (specification) occurs as the effect period (long press 4 seconds) of the effect button 6a occurs. An opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light at the position, a gauge image, and a character image of "long press") are displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. In addition, the effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, if the effect button 6a is continuously pressed, the speed of the roulette is gradually slowed down, and when the long press time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period elapses, FIG. 65 ( As shown in 5), it is notified that "SPSP development" is determined and develops into SPSP reach, and the blade part housed in the sheath part of the first movable effect member 17A that emits blue light is to the left. A moving production operation is performed. Further, with the effect button 6a turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for 1 second. In addition, the lamp emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues.

As shown in FIG. 65 (6), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a is stopped, the weak vibration effect is ended, and the transition effect in which the screen is whitened out is performed. As shown in FIG. 65 (7), while the left and right effect symbols 16a rotate, they move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the effect symbol 16a of only "4" is reduced and displayed. As shown in (8), the SPSP reach effect is started. With the start of the SPSP reach effect, the hold icon and the icon are hidden.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, it is suggested whether or not the production has a high expectation of big hit depending on the type of development determined in the roulette production as the development production (expectation of big hit). is doing. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the types developed by the roulette production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the player's expectation for developing into a reach production with a high expectation of a big hit can be obtained by executing an effective suggestion production in the development production. It can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development effect. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the development effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the jackpot has been confirmed due to the long vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the vibration effect executed at the time of the development effect is accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a, so that when the operation promotion image is displayed. The display sound effect of the above and the effect sound (operation sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the development effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is continued even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing a process such as pausing the light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not emitted in the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the effect button 6a emits light in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. You may let it.

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing It may be executed until (after 0.5 seconds) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Further, although the effect period of the effect button 6a is generated during the development effect to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 6a, the vibration effect is executed without generating the effect period of the effect button 6a during the development effect. Alternatively, the effect period may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production in which cut-in production is executed during SP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 66, an example of an effect in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP reach effect and a big hit is obtained will be described.

As shown in FIG. 66 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the battle effect is executed as the SP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will use the attack technique to defeat.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), an effective suggestion effect YS suggesting that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for the cut-in effect is started. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and the semi-transparent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing before the predetermined time for which the valid period is set is reached, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c is operated, the effect button 6a begins to change to the protruding state (specific state).

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a of the above, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period, and a character image of "press" is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. Is output, and the protruding effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-struck or is not operated and the valid period elapses, the cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 66 (4). Specifically, the cut-in image KF of the red frame (“It's a big chance !!”) is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the cut-in sound effect C corresponding to the red cut-in is output. Further, the effect button 6a is turned off, and the effect button 6a is started to vibrate weakly for 3 seconds. The lamp emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues.

After that, one second after the output of the cut-in sound effect C ends, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the ally character defeats the enemy character. Deliver the final attack technique and hunt down the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 66 (6), when the effect symbols 16a of "4" are temporarily stopped in a state of being aligned (symbol alignment), the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect). The jackpot fixed vibration effect) is started, and the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are not output.

When 4 seconds have passed from the start of the strong vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 66 (7), the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C that emits rainbow light is pulled out from the sheath portion and is moved to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16. A series of successful effects (accompanied by the operation of the operating means) in which the tilting effect operation, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the strong vibration effect (successful vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. No decision success production) is executed.

When the return of the third movable effect member 17C to the standby position is completed, as shown in FIG. 66 (8), a victory confirmation effect (display of a victory image) indicating that the ally character has won the enemy character is performed. In addition, the strong vibration effect by the effect button 6a continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 67 (9), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 67 (10), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped is displayed as a definite stop is executed. To. Specifically, a scene change effect by an eye-catching display that catches the player's line of sight and draws attention in a form that temporarily changes the scene to a display state (for example, a character image) different from the stop display mode of the effect symbol 16a. Is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (11), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67 (12), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 66, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the cut-in effect, which suggests to the player that the jackpot expectation is high before the effective period occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 66, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in effect and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the cut-in effect. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 66, the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and therefore is displayed when the operation promotion image is displayed. A sound effect and a sound effect (operation sound effect, cut-in sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 66, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 continues even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image SG). ing. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the effect of the effect by not performing processing such as pausing the lamp light emission effect by the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (displaying the operation promotion image), and improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 66, when the effect symbols 16a in the display mode of only the numerical symbols are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (D symbol alignment), the vibration effect at the time of the cut-in effect is obtained. It has come to execute a strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the jackpot has been achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 67, the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is executed when the big hit effect symbol 16a with the same pattern is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reconfirm that the game has become a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect, big hit confirmation) executed at the time of temporary stop with three effect symbols 16a aligned or at the opening of the big hit game. Since the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) does not involve the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image SG or the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period. The production sound (operation sound effect, other sound effects) of the time is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during the vibration effect without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, when the SP reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained, the vibration effect is executed while the effect symbol 16a, which is the big hit, is temporarily stopped. The vibration effect is not executed during the fixed stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without misunderstanding that the fluctuation effect is still continued due to the vibration effect.

Although the effect button 6a is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the effect button 6a is set in a predetermined mode (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Further, the lamp light emitting effect by the panel lighting device 23 was continued during the effective period related to the cut-in effect, but the effect button 6a is operated or the effective period is set immediately before or from the start of the effective period. Until the lapse of time, the lamp light emitting effect of the panel lighting device 23 may be paused, and then the lamp light emitting effect of the panel lighting device 23 may be restarted. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image displayed on the first image display device 16 stand out, and to make the player recognize that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the cut-in effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (2 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In the production example shown in FIG. 66, the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect, but the cut-in effect is performed at the middle stage (first period) or the final stage (second period) of the SP reach effect, and the SP is performed. It seems that the effect button 6a is more likely to be in a protruding state (the rate of being in a protruding state is higher) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle of the reach effect. You may do it.

If the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period, the cut-in effect may not be executed. If the cut-in effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed or may be executed.

(Production example 1 when the determined production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
FIG. 68 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which a decision effect is executed during a battle effect in SPSP reach and a big hit is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 68 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the battle effect is executed as the SPSP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will use the attack technique to defeat.

In the middle of the battle, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), a chance-up effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of developing into an effect (winning effect) with a high expectation of a big hit is performed. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a character image of "CHANGE UP" in a red display color and a halo flash from behind the character image. Further, the strong vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a is blinked in white.

When the chance-up effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), a character image of "joint battle" indicating that the number of ally characters has become two is displayed. At the end of the battle, as shown in Fig. 68 (4), the dialogue image of "I'm going!" Is displayed in red, and the two ally characters perform the final attack technique to hunt down the enemy character. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), the effective suggestion effect YS suggesting that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for the determined effect is started.

Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and the semi-transparent effect button images are aggregated toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing before the predetermined time for which the valid period is set is reached, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c is operated, the effect button 6a begins to change to the protruding state (specific state).

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), an effective period (single stroke 5 seconds) of the effect button 6a occurs, and a protruding state of emitting red light at the specific position. An operation promotion image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a of the above, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period, and a character image of "press" is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. Is output, and the protruding effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-struck or is not operated and the valid period elapses, the determined success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 68 (7). Specifically, with the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emitting rainbow light, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left and the second movable effect member 17B stand by. An effect operation of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and an effect operation of moving the blade of the third movable effect member 17C upward are performed simultaneously (determined operation). Further, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined successful vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 4 seconds and then vibrated strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C return to the standby position and the successful effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 68 (8), the victory confirmation effect (victory) indicating the battle victory is shown. Image display) is performed. In addition, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (9), the effect is temporarily stopped in a state where three effect symbols 16a of "4" are aligned (symbol alignment), and the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect). The jackpot fixed vibration effect) is started, and the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are not output.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), the display is switched to the normal size “444” effect symbol 16a and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 71 (5), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped is displayed as a definite stop is executed. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (6), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71 (7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started. When the characters "BONUS" are displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.

(Production example 2 when the determined production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
FIG. 69 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which a decision effect is executed during the mission effect of SPSP reach and a big hit is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 69 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the mission effect is executed as the SPSP reach effect, and the "button is pressed and held". Then, get the level MAX !! ”is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 69 (2), an opaque effect button image imitating an effect button 6a that emits white light when an effect period (long press 5 seconds) occurs, and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period. Then, the operation promotion image SG composed of the character image of "long press" is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light.
Further, with level 0 as the initial value, a level meter for notifying the level value (Lv.1 to Lv.10) is displayed on a scale display of 10 levels from level 1 to level 10 (MAX).

The long press operation of the effect button 6a is started, and along with the long press operation, an ascending display is performed in which the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward the level 10 (MAX). Further, when the effect button 6a is pressed and held for a long time, a meter sound effect is output according to a change in the level value of the level meter. If the long press operation is not performed, the level value of the level meter is not displayed as rising.

As shown in FIG. 69 (3), the level value reaches level 5 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the long press operation of the effect button 6a. The effect button 6a continuously emits white light. After that, the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward level 10 (MAX) with the long press operation. As shown in FIG. 69 (4), when the level value reaches level 9, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 1 second while the effect button 6a is pressed and held for a long time.

After the end of the strong vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 69 (5), when the level value reaches the level 10 (MAX), the determined success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 69 (6). Specifically, with the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emitting rainbow light, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left and the second movable effect member 17B stand by. An effect operation of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and an effect operation of moving the blade of the third movable effect member 17C upward are performed simultaneously (determined operation). Further, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined successful vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 4 seconds and then vibrated strongly for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C return to the standby positions and the decision success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. 69 (7), the success confirmation effect (success) indicating the mission success. Display of the character image of) is performed. In addition, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (8), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the center is temporarily stopped in a state of being highlighted in front of the effect symbols 16a of "4" on the left and right (symbol alignment), and the effect is produced. A strong vibration effect (big hit fixed vibration effect) that causes the button 6a to vibrate strongly for 4 seconds is started, and the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the validity period of the effect button 6a, the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image SG and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are output. Not done.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), the display is switched to the normal size “444” effect symbol 16a and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 71 (5), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped is displayed as a definite stop is executed. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (6), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71 (7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed are displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the characters, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the determined effect, so that the effective period is generated and the big hit expectation is high. Can be suggested to the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the operation period (10 seconds) of the movable effect members 17A to 17C in the determined success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed at the time of the determined success effect. Is the same as. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the successful decision production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is a big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the vibration effect (determination success vibration effect) executed at the time of the determination effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), so that the operation is performed. The display sound effect when displaying the promotion image and the effect sound when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, success sound effect, operation sound effect of movable effect member, etc.) are now output. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the successful decision production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect example shown in FIG. 69 was a determined success effect executed when the effect button 6a was single-stroked during the valid period, but it is executed when the effect lever 6h is tilted during the valid period. In the case of the successful decision production, the same as the production example shown in FIG. 69.

In addition, although the lamp light emitting effect by the panel lighting device 23 was continued during the effective period related to the determined effect, the effect button 6a is operated or the effective period has elapsed immediately before the occurrence of the effective period or from the start of the generation. In the meantime, the lamp light emitting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be temporarily stopped, and then the lamp light emitting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be restarted. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation promotion image displayed on the first image display device 16 stand out, and to make the player recognize that the scene is tense, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the lighting device 23 for the board, and the effect button 6a were set to emit rainbow light at the time of the successful determination effect, but the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light while the board emits light. The lighting device 23 may be turned off, or the effect buttons 6a and the lighting device 23 for the panel may be turned off while the movable effect members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light.

Further, when the decision success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the lighting device 23 for the panel, and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is started first. The rainbow emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C and the panel lighting device 23 may be started after the start, or the effect button 6a and the panel may be started after the rainbow emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is started first. The rainbow emission of the lighting device 23 may be started.

Further, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the stop suggestion effect and the effect symbol 16a are temporarily stopped in a display mode including the character, and then the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped. In the case of a loss, the stop suggestion effect or effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped in a display mode including the character, and then the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped. In the case of a big hit, the stop suggestion effect or effect is produced. The effect symbol 16a may be fixedly stopped in the display mode of only the numerical symbol without temporarily stopping the symbol 16a in the display mode including the character.

(Example of production when promotion is successful in re-lottery production)
An example of the effect when the re-lottery effect is executed and the promotion is successful will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 68 (9) or FIG. 69 (8) is completed, as shown in FIG. It is stopped, and the strong vibration effect ends, but the rainbow emission of the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continues. Further, after 1 second has passed from that point, the lamp light emission effect by the panel lighting device 23 is restarted, and the effect button 6a is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (2), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, it is synchronously fluctuated in a state where three effect symbols 6a of "4" are aligned (for example, all kinds of numbers of the effect symbol 16a are lapped once ("1" → "2" ..... " 9 ”→“ 1 ”in the order of scroll display) can always be shown (varies synchronously for a predetermined time).

Further, it is composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen when the effect period 6a is valid (single stroke 3 seconds), and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period. The operation promotion image SG is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is operated by a single hit or the valid period elapses, a promotion success effect suggesting that the effect has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (3), the third movable effect member 17C emits rainbow light, the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion, and the effect operation of tilting to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed. It will be done. The success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the promotion sound effect is output. Further, the strong vibration effect (promotion successful vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 3 seconds. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

When the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C return to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 70 (4), the effect symbol 16a of "777" switched from the effect symbol 16a of "444" protrudes from the screen. It is temporarily stopped in the display mode of the enlarged size of.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (5), the effect symbol 16a of "777" returns to the normal size display mode and is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 70 (6), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped is displayed as a definite stop is executed. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (7), the effect symbol 16a of "777" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "777". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70 (8), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" indicating that the 10R jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the character, and the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is highlighted. Will be done. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

When the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow emission of the third movable effect member 17C, the lighting device 23 for the panel, and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is started first. After that, the rainbow emission of the third movable effect member 17C and the lighting device 23 for the board may be started, or the rainbow emission of the third movable effect member 17C may be started first, and then the effect button 6a and the lighting for the board are started. The rainbow emission of the device 23 may be started.

Although the vibration effect is executed at the time of the successful decision effect or the successful promotion effect, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the successful decision effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful promotion effect.
Alternatively, the vibration effect may be executed at the time of the promotion success effect, while the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the decision success effect.
Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed at the time of the successful decision effect and the successful promotion effect.

Since the operation mode of the character movement effect at the time of the successful decision production and the operation mode of the character movement effect at the time of the promotion success effect are different, the effect of each of the decision success effect and the promotion success effect is effectively improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when promotion fails due to re-lottery production)
An example of the effect when the re-lottery effect is executed and the promotion fails will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 68 (9) or FIG. 69 (8) is completed, as shown in FIG. 71 (1), three effect symbols 16a of "4" are aligned (D symbol alignment). It is temporarily stopped, and the strong vibration effect ends, but the rainbow emission of the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continues. After 1 second has passed from that point, the lamp light emission effect by the board lighting device 23 is restarted, and the effect button 6a is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (2), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, it is synchronously fluctuated in a state where three effect symbols 6a of "4" are aligned (for example, all kinds of numbers of the effect symbol 16a are lapped once ("1" → "2" ..... " 9 ”→“ 1 ”in the order of scroll display) can always be shown (varies synchronously for a predetermined time).

Further, it is composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen when the effect period 6a is valid (single stroke 3 seconds), and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effect period. The operation promotion image SG is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. In addition, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-struck or is not operated and the valid period elapses, a promotion failure effect suggesting that the effect button 6a is not promoted to the probabilistic jackpot is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (3), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is temporarily stopped in a display mode of an enlarged size so as to protrude from the screen, and a non-promotion sound effect is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), the effect symbol 16a of "444" returns to the normal size display mode and is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 71 (5), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped is displayed as a definite stop is executed. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (6), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "444". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 71 (7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the character image, and the character image of "BONUS" is highlighted. To. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.

(Example of production when revival production is executed)
An example of the effect when the revival effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72 (1), the effect symbol 16a of "4" in the left side area and the right side area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners at the upper part of the screen, the battle effect is executed as the SPSP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will use the attack technique to defeat.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 72 (2), the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and the defeat confirmation effect indicating the battle defeat is performed. At this time, the effect symbol 16a of "454" indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped in the reduced size display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), the pattern is switched to the normal size effect symbol 16a of "7 (pig) 7 (pig) 7 (pig)" including the decorative portion (character) and temporarily stopped. After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, a revival effect is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (4). Specifically, a moving image showing how the ally character defeated by the enemy character is about to stand up and a message image of "Stand up !!" are displayed for the ally character, and the validity period of the effect button 6a ( (4 seconds of repeated hits) occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the red light emission effect button 6a, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period, and a character image of "continuous hits" is displayed. Then, the display effect sound of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is repeatedly hit or is not operated and the valid period elapses, a resurrection success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed (resurrection jackpot) is performed. Specifically, when the ally character stands up and revives, as shown in FIG. 72 (5), the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C that emits rainbow light is pulled out from the sheath portion, and the screen of the first image display device 16 is displayed. A directing motion that tilts to the front side of is performed. The success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect A is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (recovery success vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 4 seconds. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.

Then, the strong vibration effect ends, but after the rainbow emission of the panel lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continues, the revival success effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (6), the display mode of the effect symbol 16a of "777" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) that vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is started, and the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect Button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), as shown in FIG. 72 (7), a stop suggestion effect TS suggesting that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped is displayed as a definite stop is executed. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (8), the effect symbol 16a of "777" is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "777". After the symbol determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72 (9), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp emission effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 6a vibrates strongly for 1 second is started, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" indicating that the 10R jackpot game is executed is displayed, and a halo flash is displayed from behind the character, and the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is highlighted. Will be done. After that, when the opening effect is completed, the first round game is started.
When the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.
Alternatively, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed only when the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, and the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may not be performed when the character image of "BONUS" is displayed. ..

(Probability change mission production)
During the jackpot game (round game), a probabilistic mission effect may be executed to determine whether or not the game will be in a high-probability time-saving game state. For example, in the 10R jackpot game, the valid period (5 seconds continuous hitting) of the effect button 6a occurs in the 4th round game, and the probabilistic mission effect (for example, the mission effect to challenge the panel destruction by the button repeated hits) is started.

During the valid period, the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. When the effect button 6a is operated and the panel is destroyed, or when the effect button 6a is not operated and the valid period elapses, the mission success effect is executed. In the mission success effect, the third movable effect member 17C emits rainbow light, the blade portion is pulled out from the sheath portion, and the effect operation of tilting to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed. Further, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the success sound effect is output. Further, the strong vibration effect (promotion successful vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. Further, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light.
In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that a high-probability time-saving game state occurs after the big hit game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
When the player can select either the probabilistic mode D or the probabilistic mode E corresponding to the high-probability time-saving gaming state by operating the effect button 6a and the cross key 6f, the effect button 6a is operated. However, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a is not executed.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 72, since the vibration effect (recovery success vibration effect) executed at the time of the revival success effect is accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect at the time of display and the effect sound (operation sound effect, success sound effect, operation sound effect of the movable effect member, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to perform a dramatic and impactful revival success production that turns the disappointment of the player's loss into joy, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 72, the execution period of the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful revival effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the successful resurrection effect, the same timing (for example, the timing when the effective period when the effect button 6a is not operated elapses) regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It may be executed until (4 seconds later) (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

(Production example 1 when the setting is changed from the normal mode to the reduced working hours mode)
FIG. 73 will be described with reference to an example of an effect in which the setting is changed to the time saving mode when the specific lost symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost variation effect in the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 73 (1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 73 (2), “1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 ( When the effect symbol 16a (specific loss symbol) of "Rabbit)" is displayed as a fixed stop display, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a is executed. Specifically, the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a is blinked in red. In addition, the time saving mode input sound effect is output, and the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit red light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (3), the character image of "Chance mode entry" indicating the confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player surely recognizes that the mode has been shifted to the time saving mode (low probability time saving gaming state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73 (4), from the right-handed image "right-handed →" (not shown) instructing to launch the game ball toward the right-hand side area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and the right-handed image. Is an image with an enlarged display size, and a right-handed image "Right-handed!" Prompting to shoot a game ball toward the right-hand side area 4a2 of the game area 4a is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. do.
In the chance mode (time saving mode), the same effect image (background image, effect symbol image, etc.) as in the normal time saving mode (low probability time saving game state after the big hit game) is displayed. In addition, a special effect image (special background image, special effect symbol image, etc.) corresponding to the chance mode may be displayed.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 73, the vibration effect is executed when the specific loss symbol is stopped in the loss fluctuation effect in the normal mode, thereby attracting the player's attention to the effect symbol 16a. can.
In addition, instead of the vibration effect by the effect button 6a, the accessory effect may be performed by the movable effect members 17A to 17C. In this case, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left while the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B emit red light, and the second movable effect member 17B is in the standby position. The effect operation of moving downward from the first image display device 16 to the front side of the center of the screen may be performed all at once.
Alternatively, the movable effect members 17A to 17C may perform a vibration operation. In this case, the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B each vibrate strongly for 3 seconds at the standby position.
In addition, as a specific loss symbol, instead of the predetermined loss effect symbol 16a of the above "1 (dog) 2 (cat) 3 (rabbit)", "time reduction" for notifying the transition from the normal mode to the time reduction mode. The character may be displayed in a time-saving symbol, a graphic symbol (for example, “★★★”), a display mode in which the effect symbol 16a and the graphic symbol are combined (for example, “1 ★ 2”), or the like.

(Production example 2 when the setting is changed from the normal mode to the reduced working hours mode)
FIG. 74 will describe an example of an effect in which the setting is changed to the time saving mode when the loss variation effect reaches a predetermined number of times in the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 74 (1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect symbol 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (2), “2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 ( The effect symbol 16a of "tiger)" is displayed as a fixed stop, and there are three remaining times until the time saving mode is entered.

As shown in FIG. 74 (3), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is started, the time-saving mode entry fanning effect is executed, in which the remaining three times are required until the effect symbol 16a is entered. Specifically, a countdown image "3" is displayed to notify that there are three remaining times until the time saving mode is entered, a count effect sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (4), the effect symbol 16a of "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)" indicating the loss is displayed as a definite stop, and the remaining two times until the time saving mode is entered. ..

As shown in FIG. 74 (5), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is started, a countdown image "2" is displayed to notify that there are two remaining times until the time saving mode is entered, and a count effect is displayed. Sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (6), the effect symbol 16a of "3 (rabbit) 1 (cat) 2 (dog)" indicating the loss is displayed as a definite stop, and there is only one remaining time until the time saving mode is entered. ..

As shown in FIG. 74 (7), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is started, a countdown image “1” is displayed to notify that there is only one remaining time until the time saving mode is entered, and a count effect is displayed. Sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (8), the effect symbol 16a of "5 (koala) 6 (tiger) 8 (fox)" indicating the loss is displayed as a definite stop, and the remaining 0 times until the time saving mode is entered, that is, , It becomes a time saving mode rush.

As shown in FIG. 74 (9), when the scroll display of the effect symbol 16a is disclosed, a countdown image “0” indicating that the number of fluctuations until the time saving mode is entered is reached, and a count effect is displayed. Sound is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light. Further, the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit white light.
Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (10), the effect at the time of entering the time saving mode is performed. In the effect when the time saving mode is turned on, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left while the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B emit red light, and the second movable effect member The effect operation of moving the 17B downward from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed all at once. In addition, the effect image is displayed, the time saving mode entry sound effect is output, and the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a for 1 second is executed.
In addition to the effect operation by the movable effect member, a scene change image that can be opened after the entire screen is closed by the shutter may be displayed as the effect when entering the time saving mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (11), the character image of "Chance mode entry" indicating the confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player surely recognizes that the mode has been shifted to the time saving mode (low probability time saving gaming state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74 (12), from the right-handed image "right-handed →" (not shown) instructing to launch the game ball toward the right-hand side area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and the right-handed image. Is an image with an enlarged display size, and a right-handed image "Right-handed!" Prompting to shoot a game ball toward the right-hand side area 4a2 of the game area 4a is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. do.

According to the effect example shown in FIG. 74, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to be in the time-saving mode by the time-saving rush mode fanning effect, and to attract the player's attention to the effect symbol 16a.
In addition, since it is possible to enhance the joy of the player for entering the time saving mode by the character production, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed. The effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a is blinked in red, or the effect button 6a is vibrated strongly for 5 seconds to light the effect button 6a in red.
In addition, a light guide plate may be arranged on the front side of the image display device 16 so that the light guide plate may emit light instead of the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 in the time saving mode rushing effect. The light guide plate may be made to emit light together with the light emitted from the panel lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27.

(Example of production of jackpot fluctuation production based on the first start opening prize in the probability change mode)
With reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, an example of an effect in which a jackpot variation effect based on a first start opening prize is executed in the probability variation mode will be described.

For example, after the 4R probability change jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 75 (1), the characters "Zan RUSH rush" are highlighted to notify that the probability change mode corresponding to the high probability time saving game state is entered. , Right-handed image "right-handed →" (not shown) instructing to launch a game ball toward the right side area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and time-saving remaining number image (not shown) showing the time-saving remaining number are displayed. .. Further, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "555".

After entering the probabilistic mode, the game ball continuously wins a prize at the second starting port 11a, and the winning sound "Piron ♪" is continuously output. Further, three second hold icons "◎" are displayed in the second hold icon display area 16c, and the hold number "3" is displayed in the second hold number display area 16f and the first hold number display area 16e. Although not shown in the state where the reserved number "0" is displayed, the variation display of the effect symbol 16a is started after the combination display mode "555" indicating the jackpot is displayed, and the variation of the special symbol TZ is started. The display is also started.

As shown in FIG. 75 (2), as the effect symbol 16a starts to change, the second hold icon “◎” displayed in the second hold icon display area 16c shifts to the change icon display area 16d. , The icon "◎" is displayed in the variable icon display area 16d, and the hold number in the second hold number display area 16f is subtracted from "3" to "2". In addition, the time-saving remaining number of times image is updated (subtracted display) (not shown).
In the probabilistic mode, the variation start operation executed at the start of the symbol variation display in the normal mode may not be executed, or the variation start operation may be performed at the start of the symbol variation display.

After the high-speed fluctuation display of the three effect symbols 16a is performed for a short time (2.0 seconds), the combination display mode "6 (frame) 3 (frame) 2 (frame)" in which the three effect symbols 16a show normal loss. At the same time, a temporary stop is displayed, and a momentary flame effect is displayed on the three numerical symbols. After the stop suggestion effect is executed (not shown), as shown in FIG. 75 (3), "6 (frame) 3 (frame)" ) 2 (frame) ”is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination display mode of“ 632 ”as the numerical symbol of the effect symbol 16a. The symbol confirmation period in which the effect symbol 16a is fixedly stopped and displayed is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern to be executed and the determination result of the jackpot.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (4), when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 when the reserved number in the second reserved number display area 16f is "0", the effect symbols 16a and the effect symbols 16a based on the winning are obtained. The fluctuation of the special symbol TZ is started. The variation display is executed in a mode notification mode (probability change mode background image, probability change mode BGM) for notifying that the mode is in the probability change mode. That is, regardless of whether the starting port of the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a is won in the probabilistic mode, the variable display is executed in the common mode notification mode.
On the other hand, even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 10, the first hold icon (including the first hold icon display area 16b) and the variable icon (including the variable icon display area 16d) are not displayed (that is, the variable icon display area 16d is included). , The icon change effect by the first hold icon and the variable icon is not executed, and the effect sound in the icon change effect is not output). Further, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the first starting port 10. At this time, the right-handed image (“right-handed →”) is displayed. At this time, a right-handed promotion image (“Please hit right”) for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area 4a2 of the skill area 4a is displayed, and “right-handed” is displayed. Please do "is output.
In FIGS. 75 and 76, the first hold icon display area 16b and the second hold icon display area 16c are not displayed, but the first hold icon display area 16b is not displayed, while the second hold icon display area 16c is displayed. Alternatively, both the first hold icon display area 16b and the second hold icon display area 16c may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 75 (5), every time a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 10, a right-handed promotion image is displayed and a voice "Please right-handed" is output. On the other hand, the first hold icon (including the first hold icon display area 16b) and the variable icon (including the variable icon display area 16d) are not displayed. Further, when two prizes are won in the first starting port 10, no winning sound is output. Further, at this time, the reserved number "2" in the first reserved number display area 16e is displayed.

As described above, if the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during the probability variation mode, the winning sound is not output, but if the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 during the normal mode, the winning sound is not output. The winning sound is output. That is, the winning sound is more likely to be output when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the normal mode than when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the probability variation mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (5), when the left and right keys of the cross key 6f are operated during the execution of the variation effect including the variation display of the effect symbol 16a, the volume adjustment screen SH is displayed, and the volume adjustment screen SH is displayed in the probability variation mode. During the execution of the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10, the volume of the BGM used for the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a can be selected. On the volume adjustment screen SH, a volume gauge (volume value level meter) indicating a plurality of volume stages and a cross-shaped key icon for changing the volume are displayed. When the left and right keys are operated, the volume gauge is displayed in a state showing the volume one step above or below the current volume, and the volume change confirmation sound is heard from the voice output device 9 with the voice corresponding to the changed volume. It is output.

Further, during the execution of the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 in the probabilistic mode, the effect element other than the volume used for the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a ( Mode, BGM, light intensity, customization, etc.) can also be selected.
It should be noted that during the execution of the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a in the probability variation mode, the effect element (mode, BGM) used for the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10. , Volume, amount of light, customization, etc.) can be selected.
It should be noted that the selection of the effect element (particularly, the volume and the amount of light) is restricted when the variation of the effect symbol 16a starts or stops.

After that, the three effect symbols 16a are temporarily stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol, and the temporary stop display is performed in the combination display mode “5 (frame) 4 (frame) 1 (frame)” indicating normal loss. Then, after the stop suggestion effect in which the flame effect is displayed for a moment on the three numerical symbols is executed (not shown), as shown in FIG. 75 (6), "5 (frame) 4 (frame) 1 (frame)" Is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination display mode of "541" as the numerical symbol of the effect symbol 16a.

As shown in FIG. 75 (7), the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 16e is subtracted from "2" to "1", and the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 is started. At that time, a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot game is executed is executed. In this jackpot suggestion effect, a moving image NM that can be opened after the entire screen is closed by a sliding door is displayed, and a weak vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 6a in the off state is slightly vibrated for 1 second.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (8), the reach fanning effect and the reach effect are not executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 16a, and after a predetermined time elapses, three effects are shown as shown in FIG. 75 (9). Temporary stop display is performed in the combination display mode "4 (frame) 4 (frame) 4 (frame)" in which the symbol 16a indicates a big hit. In addition, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 6a that emits rainbow light is vibrated for 4 seconds, and the lighting device 23 for the panel emits rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (10), after the stop suggestion effect in which the flame effect is displayed for a moment on the three numerical symbols is executed, as shown in FIG. 76 (11), "4 (frame) 4 ( "Frame) 4 (frame)" is displayed as a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is displayed as a fixed stop in the same "444" combination display mode as the numerical symbol of the effect symbol 16a.

After the symbol determination period elapses, the opening effect is executed as shown in FIG. 76 (12). In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is executed are displayed, the voice of "bonus" is output, and the lighting and blinking operation of the light emitting body of the lamp is repeatedly performed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is performed in which the effect button 6a that emits rainbow light is vibrated strongly for 1 second.

Next, the jackpot middle effect (round turn effect) corresponding to the round game of the 4R jackpot game shown in FIG. 76 (13) is executed.
The opening effect, the in-round effect, and the ending effect (not shown) shown in FIGS. 76 (12) and 76 (13) above are after the jackpot fluctuation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a in the probability variation mode. This is a production mode common to the opening effect, the in-round effect, and the ending effect corresponding to the 4R jackpot game.

It should be noted that the time-saving remaining number image, which is not shown, shows the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a even during the execution of the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10. It continues to be displayed even during execution, and is updated (subtracted) every time any variation effect is executed. In addition, the right-handed image is displayed both when the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 is being executed and when the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a is being executed. Continue to be done.

When the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 is executed in the probabilistic mode, the first special symbol 1st display 19a and the 1st special symbol 2nd display 20a blink. Will be done. Further, the first special symbol hold first display 19d and the first special symbol hold second display 20d are lit or blinking in correspondence with the display of the hold number in the first hold number display area 16e.
If the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a during the execution of the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 10 in the probabilistic mode, the second variation effect during execution is completed. The variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 11a is not executed, or the variation display of the first and second special symbols on the first special symbol first display 19a and the second special symbol first display 19b. Is performed in parallel, while the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a is not executed, or the variable effect being executed and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a are performed. Based on the fluctuation effect, it is performed in parallel.

Even when the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 is executed in the time saving mode, the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first start 10 in the above-mentioned probability variation mode. Is similar to. That is, the winning sound is not output even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 10, the first hold icon (including the first hold icon display area 16b) and the variable icon (including the variable icon display area 16d). Is not displayed, and the effect element (mode) used for the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a during the execution of the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 in the time saving mode. , BGM, volume, amount of light, customization, etc.) can be selected.

(Example of production when operating the operating means while waiting for customers)
An example of the effect of the operation means (effect button 6a, cross key 6f) while waiting for a customer will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

As shown in FIG. 77 (1), when the transition to the customer waiting state in which the variation effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effect suggestion effect suggesting that the valid period may occur is not executed, and the effect button 6a and The waiting valid period for customers, in which the operation of the cross key 6f is valid, is started. Since the valid period while waiting for customers is maintained until the variable effect is started, it can occur for a longer period than the various effective periods that occur during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 77 (2), the first image display device 16 displays a top screen including a stopped display effect symbol 16a, an effect button icon, and a cross key icon. When the effect button 6a is operated, the menu top screen MT including the menu screen, the effect button icon, and the cross key (selection button) icon is displayed without vibrating the effect button 6a, as shown in FIG. 77 (3). Will be done.

On the menu screen, for example, "Pachilog", "First pachinko course", "Volume / light intensity adjustment", "Back", selection key (cross key) icon, and enter button (directing button) icon are set as menu items. ing.

The player can select any of the desired selection items by using the cross key 6f. For example, on the menu screen, one of a plurality of selection items is highlighted (blinking display, display for changing the color of the selection item, etc.). The highlighted selection item is the selection target. The player switches the highlighted selection item using the cross key 6f, and determines the highlighted selection item by operating the effect button 6a. As a result, the desired selection item has been determined. When the selection item is decided, the screen corresponding to the decided selection item is switched from the menu screen and newly displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine the "pachinko log", the pachinko log top menu is displayed without the effect button 6a vibrating. To put it simply, a "pachilog" is a game in which a gaming machine stores information on a gaming history.
When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine the "first pachinko course", the instruction movie for beginners is played without the effect button 6a vibrating.
When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine "volume / light amount adjustment", the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed without the effect button 6a vibrating.

When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. A cross key icon for making changes is displayed. When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the volume gauge is displayed in a state of indicating the volume one step above or below the current volume without vibrating the cross key 6f or the effect button 6a, and the sound is output. A volume change confirmation sound is output from the device 9 with a voice corresponding to the changed volume.

When the up / down button of the cross key 6f is operated, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. A cross key icon for making changes is displayed. When the up / down buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the cross key 6f and the effect button 6a do not vibrate, and the light intensity gauge is displayed in a state showing the light intensity one step above or below the current light intensity, and the sound is output. The device 9 outputs a light amount change confirmation sound corresponding to the changed light amount.

When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine "return", the menu screen is erased without the effect button 6a vibrating. On the other hand, when the effect button 6a is not operated while the menu screen is displayed, when a predetermined time (for example, 45 seconds) has elapsed from the display of the menu screen, as shown in FIG. 77 (4), a demo effect image including the effect button icon is displayed. Is displayed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 77, the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) generated during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur for a period longer than the effective period, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a (by vibrating the effect button 6a). (Including the indirect vibration of the transmitted cross key 6f) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. Will be.

Regarding the validity period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the big hit effect (big hit game), various advance notice effects (line) that occur during the variable effect are also given. It can occur for a longer period than the valid period related to the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc., but in the effective period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light amount adjustment. Even if the cross key 6f is operated, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 6f transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 6a) is not executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. Will be.

Further, regarding the customer waiting valid period, the valid suggestion effect suggesting that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

Also, regarding the valid period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the big hit effect (big hit game), the effective suggestion effect is executed before the effective period occurs. It is designed not to be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being prepared even though the information useful to the player (the effect of expecting the jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, which makes the player uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving.

Further, the effect button 6a is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur for a period longer than the valid period (display period of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a that occurs during the variable effect. During the valid period (display period of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the variable effect, the effect button 6a When is operated, it is easier to execute the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the valid period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects generated during the variable effect is relative to the relatively short first effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of the operation promotion image related to the dialogue advance notice effect, etc.). There is a long second valid period (valid period accompanied by display of operation promotion image related to decision production etc.), but customers who can generate it for a longer period than the valid period of the effect button 6a generated during the variable effect. When the effect button 6a is operated during the second valid period, it is easier to execute the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a than when the effect button 6a is operated during the waiting valid period. .. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period while waiting for customers, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a at a predetermined ratio may be executed, but even in this case, a variable effect is performed. At a lower rate than when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) that occur during the process. It is good to perform a vibration effect.

(Summary of various vibration effects performed in a specific effect)
FIG. 78 shows various vibration effects executed as pre-reach effects after the start of fluctuation and before the reach effect is executed, and during reach from the execution of the reach effect to the fixed stop display of the symbol. It is a figure which shows various vibration productions performed as a production / post-reach production.
The specific effect is a variation effect of a loss / jackpot variation effect pattern with reach in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.
In a specific effect, there is an operation that is performed during the pre-reach effect (first effect). There is an operation that is performed during the post-reach effect (second effect) rather than the type of vibration effect (line notice effect). Since there are many types of (development production, cut-in notice production, decision success vibration production, re-lottery promotion vibration production, revival success vibration production, etc.), the vibration production with operation is more during reach than in the pre-reach production / The execution rate is higher in the post-reach production.

Further, in the specific effect, the execution ratio of the vibration effect without operation of matching the jackpot symbols is higher in the post-reach effect than in the pre-reach effect.
Further, in the specific effect (specific effect to be notified), the vibration notice effect (effect button 6a, movable effect members 17A to 17C) at the start of fluctuation is more in the pre-reach effect than in the post-reach effect. The execution rate is high.

The first feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue advance notice effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). , The step-up notice effect that does not accompany the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) determines the degree of jackpot expectation (the rate at which the jackpot confirmed vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) due to the matching of symbols is executed). The rate of successful vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is high. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the valid period of the effect button 6a (operation promotion image) is larger than the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in the step-up notice effect without the effect period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). When the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue notice effect accompanied by (display), the jackpot expectation degree (vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment) is executed. The ratio, the ratio at which the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed in the determined effect, etc.) may be increased.

The second feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect (during the dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, and pseudo-continuous effect) in which the vibration period is relatively short. , Vibration production (1 second) during development production, and 2nd vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, final production, etc.), which has a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect longer than a second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period (SP). / In a variable effect with SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. Therefore, it is possible to raise the sense of expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration notice effect) is also the first vibration effect in which the vibration time is relatively short, but even when the look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration advance notice effect) is included, the first vibration effect is used. In a variable production where there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP / SPSP reach production) after the production period (pre-reach production), the first production period is better than the second production period. The first vibration effect is easy to be executed (the ratio of being executed is high).

The third feature related to the vibration effect is that in a variable effect where there is a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). The first vibration effect (vibration effect (1 second) at the time of dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) is executed in the first effect period rather than the third effect period. Easy to do (high rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to raise the sense of expectation without misunderstanding that the player will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (during dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect). Vibration effect such as time (1 second) and second vibration effect (cut-in effect, successful decision effect, final effect, etc.) that has a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (1 second) 3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first production period (pre-reach production), there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP / SPSP reach production). In the variable effect, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the second effect period than in the first effect period. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fifth feature related to the vibration effect is that in a variable effect in which there is a third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). The third production period is longer than the first vibration production (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds) for the second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, final production, etc.). Seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As a sixth feature related to the vibration effect, in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) with the effect button 6a in the normal state protrudes from the effect button 6a. It is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) as a state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without excessively agitating the expectation of the player during the first production period.

As a seventh feature related to the vibration effect, in the third effect period (SP / SPSP reach effect), the ratio of executing the second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) with the effect button 6a in a protruding state is the effect button. It is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration effect with 6a as the normal state. Therefore, in the first production period (pre-reach production), the player's expectation is not excessively agitated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (during dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect). Vibration production at times (1 second)) and second vibration production (cut-in production, successful decision production, successful re-lottery promotion, successful revival), which has a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production. There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second at the time of production, final production, etc., and a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) of continuous production (pseudo continuous production). ) Is executed and the reach effect is executed. In the variable effect, when the first vibration effect (1 second) is executed, the second vibration effect (3 seconds) is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. The above) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the first vibration effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature related to the vibration effect is that the vibration effect executed as the jackpot notice effect has a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (during the cut-in effect, a successful decision effect). There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as when, re-lottery promotion success effect, revival success effect, final effect, etc. In the variable effect, the reach effect by the second type effect symbol (even number symbol) is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach effect by the first type effect symbol (odd number symbol other than "7" symbol). ), It is more difficult to execute the reach effect by the third type effect symbol (“7” symbol) than the reach effect by the second type effect symbol (even number symbol) (the ratio of execution is low), and the second type The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the reach effect by the third type effect symbol (“7” symbol) is executed than when the reach effect by the effect symbol (even number symbol) is executed. High rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol that executes the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature related to the vibration effect is that in the jackpot fluctuation effect in which the reach effect is executed, the vibration effect without the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach effect (look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration notice effect)). )), The number of times the vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, final effect) is executed without the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) during the post-reach effect, rather than the number of executions of the step-up notice effect, final effect). It is easy to increase. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation during the production after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature related to the vibration effect is that a specific reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed rather than a jackpot variable effect in which a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. The jackpot variation effect tends to increase the number of times the vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, final effect) is executed without the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the post-reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation effect from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature related to the vibration effect is that in the loss fluctuation effect in which the reach effect is executed, the vibration effect (development effect, pattern alignment, final effect) without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the post-reach effect is achieved. ) Is more than the number of executions of the vibration effect (look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration advance notice effect), step-up notice effect, final effect) without the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach effect. Is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by a vibration effect without an effective period (display of an operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature related to the vibration effect is the post-reach advance notice, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pre-reach advance notice effect, compared to the case where the pre-reach advance notice effect (line advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect) is executed in the variable effect. When the effect (cut-in effect, development effect) is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a (operation of the button vibration motor 6d) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high).
Further, when the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth feature related to the vibration effect, the probability variation / time saving modes D to G are accompanied by the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a in the post-reach notice effect than the normal modes A to C. The expectation of a big hit when the vibration effect is executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

It should be noted that, in the normal modes A to C, the big hit when the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a is executed in the post-reach advance notice effect than in the probabilistic change / time reduction modes D to G. Expectations may be high. Even in this case, the playability can be different depending on the type of production mode, and it becomes easy to raise the player's expectation in the probabilistic / time-saving modes D to G, which is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

The fifteenth feature related to the vibration effect is that in the first effect period (before reach) in the variable effect, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed rather than the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. However, the expectation of a big hit is high, and in the big hit fluctuation effect, the effect button 6a is used in the post-reach effect (the period after the successful decision effect) regardless of whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed during the pre-reach effect. Vibration effect (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit by the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature related to the vibration effect is the vibration effect (during dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a executed during the fluctuation effect. One of the vibration effects during the cut-in effect) is executed in any of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations, but the effect is executed during the variable effect. The vibration effect (one of the vibration effects such as the step-up notice effect and the pattern alignment) without the valid period of the button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. To. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image), it is possible to suppress the complicated production mode of the vibration effect and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As the 17th feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of the dialogue notice effect) accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the effect button 6a is executed in the pre-reach effect period in the jackpot fluctuation effect. In some cases, the vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is executed without the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and after that (post-reach effect period), the vibration effect is performed. (Vibration effect of 3 seconds or more at the time of decision success effect, re-lottery promotion success effect, revival success effect, and symbol alignment) is executed at different rates, and the validity period of the effect button 6a (display of operation promotion image) The vibration effect without the above (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is more likely to be executed in the normal modes A to C than in the probabilistic change / time saving modes D to G (the rate of execution is higher). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect without the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature related to the vibration effect is that when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the jackpot notice is given by the type of the jackpot effect symbol 16a (even symbol, odd symbol other than "7", "7" symbol). It is possible to make different execution modes (whether or not to execute, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect in the effect, but when the vibration effect is executed along with the execution of the successful decision effect or the final effect, the symbols are aligned (identification unit). The vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol 16a. Therefore, while raising the expectation for the big hit by the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the big hit and improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the vibration effect is that after executing the vibration effect (display of the operation promotion image) accompanied by the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) in the jackpot fluctuation effect, the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) is performed. Vibration effects that do not accompany (design alignment, etc.) can be executed, and vibration effects that accompany an effective period (display of operation promotion images) (decision success vibration effects, etc.) can change the timing to start vibration depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a. On the other hand, in the vibration effect (design alignment, etc.) without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image), the timing at which the vibration is started is predetermined. Therefore, it is possible to execute the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not it is accompanied by a valid period (display of the operation promotion image), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twentieth feature related to the vibration effect is a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-continuous effect) using the same movable effect member (first movable effect member 17A) in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. (Development effects, etc.) can be executed, but the jackpot expectation when the specific effects are executed differs between the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The 21st feature related to the vibration effect is the stage effect (step-up notice effect, pseudo) that progresses to any of multiple stages with different jackpot expectations in the normal modes A to C and the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. (Continuous production, etc.) can be executed, but the stage production (step-up notice production, pseudo-continuous production, etc.) is the same stage (step-up notice production, etc.) in the normal mode A to C and the probabilistic / time saving mode D to G. For example, if any of the 3rd step effect, the 4th step effect, and the 5th step effect, and if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, the jackpot expectation when it progresses to once or twice) is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

The 22nd feature related to the vibration effect is that it is possible to execute any of a plurality of operation promotion effects having different jackpot expectations in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G, and the effect button 6a. It is possible to execute an operation effect (any of development effect, cut-in effect, and decision effect) according to the operation of, and in the normal mode A to C and the probability change / time saving mode D to G, when the operation effect is executed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the effective suggestion effect is executed and the operation promotion effect is executed than when the operation promotion effect is executed without the effective suggestion effect being executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the effective suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
When the vibration effect is executed during the effective suggestion effect, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed during the effective suggestion effect.

The 23rd feature of the vibration effect is that the vibration effect for a relatively short period of time (for example, 1 second) executed in association with the jackpot notice effect is the valid period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). ), Or without a valid period (display of operation promotion image), but the vibration period executed with the jackpot notice effect is a relatively long time ( The vibration effect (3 seconds or more) is executed with an effective period (display of an operation promotion image). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect on the operation of the effect button 6a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 24th feature relating to the vibration effect is that a battle effect involving a single hit operation of the effect button 6a or a tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is executed in the determined effect, and a continuous hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect button 6a. When a mission effect accompanied by a long press operation is executed, the start timing of execution of the decision success effect after operating the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h (the display start timing of the success effect image, the decision success vibration effect) The vibration start timing, the movable start timing of the determination operation, and the light emission start timing of the lamp emission (rainbow) are different. Therefore, it is possible to execute the determined success effect (determined successful vibration effect) at an appropriate timing according to the effect mode of the determined effect accompanied by the operation of the operating means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the 25th feature related to the vibration effect, the same vibration effect mode is determined and the successful vibration effect is executed by the decision success effect accompanied by the single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the decision success effect accompanied by the tilt operation of the effect lever 6h. However, the success sound effect (success sound effect A) output by the decision success effect accompanied by the single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the success sound effect (success sound effect sound) output by the decision success effect accompanied by the tilt operation of the effect lever 6h. B) is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the success sound effect in the decision success production from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, after the decision success effect accompanied by the single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the decision success effect accompanied by the tilt operation of the effect lever 6h are executed, the vibration effect of the same vibration effect mode (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned) is executed. To. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the big hit regardless of the content of the decided production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 26th feature related to the vibration effect is that the successful vibration effect, which involves the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h, is "7" symbol alignment rather than the even-numbered symbol alignment or the jackpot symbol of "7" symbol alignment being stopped and displayed. It is easier to execute when the jackpot symbol of is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give a rarity to the determined successful vibration effect accompanied by the operation of the effect lever 6h, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
If the hold icon or the variable icon changes to a display mode (red, rainbow) with a high expectation of a big hit during the variable effect, the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is set to 1 for the effect other than the successful decision effect. It may be vibrated weakly or strongly for a second.

The 27th feature related to the vibration effect is that when the jackpot variation effect is executed, even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a of the even-numbered symbol alignment (“222”) is stopped and displayed, the odd-numbered symbol alignment (“777”) is displayed. Even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a is stopped and displayed, the vibration effect mode (long-time strong vibration) of the decision success vibration effect that is executed when the success effect image is displayed along with the execution of the decision success effect is the same. It has become. Therefore, while raising the expectation for the jackpot by the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the jackpot regardless of the type of the jackpot effect symbol that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 10 and the jackpot variation effect is executed, and the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 11a and the jackpot variation effect is executed. Even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols (“222”) is stopped and displayed, or even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a with odd-numbered symbols (“777”) is stopped and displayed, the decision is successful. The vibration effect mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the vibration effect is the same.

Further, in the normal modes A to C, the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 and the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, and in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G, the game ball wins in the first starting port 10. Even if the jackpot effect symbol 16a with even-numbered symbols (“222”) is stopped and displayed when the jackpot variation effect is executed, the jackpot effect symbol 16a with odd-numbered symbols (“777”) is stopped and displayed. Even in this case, the vibration effect mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the successful vibration effect is the same.

The 28th feature related to the vibration effect is that in the normal modes A to C and the probabilistic / time saving modes D to G, when the cut-in effect or the development effect is executed during the reach effect, the operation promotion effect emits red light. The operation promotion image including the opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a is displayed, and the jackpot expectation when the vibration effect is executed is different. Therefore, even if the operation promotion effect and the vibration effect of the same effect mode are executed, the playability can be different depending on the type of the effect mode, and the fun of the game can be improved.

The 29th feature related to the vibration effect is that the game ball wins in the first starting port 10 in the normal modes A to C, and the game is played in the second starting port 11a in the probability change / time saving modes D to G. Operation when the cut-in effect or development effect is executed during the reach effect, depending on whether the ball wins or the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the probability change / time saving mode D to G. The operation promotion image of the button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light in the promotion effect is displayed, and the jackpot expectation when the vibration effect is executed is different.

The thirtieth feature related to the vibration effect is the vibration effect (short-time weak vibration or short time) when the light emission effect of causing the effect button 6a to emit white or red light is executed in the operation promotion effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect). The vibration effect mode (vibration intensity or Vibration period) is different. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the operation promotion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the 31st feature related to the vibration effect, the ratio of the button vibration warning effect to be executed is higher in the normal modes A to C than in the probability variation / time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player in the normal mode, which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the probability change / time saving mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 32nd feature related to the vibration effect is the first operation promotion effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light is displayed in the operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the operation means. There is a second operation promotion effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light is displayed, and a third operation promotion effect for adjusting the volume and brightness, which is useful information for the player (the variable effect). It is possible to execute the vibration effect when the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect that suggest the jackpot expectation level, etc.) are executed, but the third operation promotion effect that does not suggest useful information to the player is When executed, the vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration effect from being executed until the player does not suggest useful information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 33rd feature related to the vibration effect is that when the determined effect is executed, the valid period elapses after a predetermined period has elapsed from the execution of the effective suggestion effect (without vibration effect) (when the operating means is operated or not operated). The first vibration effect (effective suggestion effect) that executes the vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) and the vibration effect (effective suggestion effect) after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effective suggestion effect was executed while the vibration effect was executed at the time of the effective suggestion effect. There is a second vibration effect that executes the time vibration effect and the determined success vibration effect), and the jackpot expectation is higher when the second vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player from the time of the effective suggestion production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 34th feature related to the vibration effect is that the lamp change effect by the winning port lamp NR and the panel lighting device 23 (frame lighting device 27) is executed rather than the lamp change effect by the winning port lamp NR. If this is done, the expectation of a big hit will be higher, and it will be easier to execute the vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect, vibration effect when the symbols are aligned, etc.). Therefore, the expectation of the player can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the case of a gaming machine having a V winning opening for continuing a high-probability time-saving gaming state during a big hit game, the effect button 6a vibrates and the effect button 6a vibrates when the game ball wins the V winning opening during the big hit game. , May emit light in rainbow colors.

Hereinafter, the modified form will be described.
(1) In the continuous advance notice effect type determination table for the probabilistic change / time saving mode shown in FIG. 39, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in the probability change modes D and E and the continuous advance notice effect in the time reduction modes F and G are displayed. Although the execution ratio was the same, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in the probabilistic mode D and E and the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in the time saving modes F and G may be different.

Specifically, the table shown in FIG. 39 is used as a continuous advance notice effect type determination table for the time saving mode, and the table shown in FIG. 79 is used as a continuous advance notice effect type determination table for the probability variation mode.
As a feature of the continuous advance notice effect type determination table for the probability change mode shown in FIG. 79, the continuous advance notice effect is more likely to be executed in the probability change modes D and E than in the time saving modes F and G.
Further, in the probabilistic mode D and E, the continuous advance notice effect is more likely to be executed than in the normal modes A to C.
Further, in the probabilistic mode D and E, the vibration advance notice effect (button vibration advance notice effect, the accessory vibration advancement effect) is easier to be executed than in the time saving modes F and G, while in the normal modes A to C. It is more difficult to execute the vibration notice effect.

(2) In the continuous advance notice effect type determination table for the probability change / time saving mode shown in FIG. 39 (1), even if the time saving mode is set corresponding to a time saving game state, b time saving corresponding to the time saving game state is performed. Even if the mode is set, even if the time saving mode is set corresponding to the time saving game state, the execution rate of the continuous advance notice effect is the same, but for each time saving mode according to the type of the set time saving game state. The execution ratio of the continuous notice effect may be different.
Specifically, a continuous advance notice effect type determination table for the time saving mode set corresponding to the b time saving gaming state and the time saving mode set corresponding to the c time saving gaming state is separately provided, and the a time saving gaming state is set. Set the execution rate of the continuous notice effect lower than the corresponding time saving mode.

(Technical Features of the Invention Corresponding to the Above Embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the gaming machine that executes the game effect according to the result of the determination. Is common. In such a gaming machine, there is known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable effect member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, a gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in gaming is low.

The first configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled into a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (normal), and the start The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of producing the possibility that the special game is executed based on the satisfaction of the condition by using a plurality of types of notification effects (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern). A plurality of types of predetermined effects (the fanning effect, button vibration, accessory operation (movement / light emission), effect change effect, etc.) that are expected to execute the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) capable of executing the special game. Executes background change, pattern production at the start of fluctuation, story progress production, step-up, dialogue notice, mode change, light guide plate emission, roulette effect, decision effect, pattern alignment effect, pattern enlargement effect after pattern alignment, look-ahead effect, etc.) It is possible, and the predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, and the first predetermined effect (the fanning effect, the first button vibration (decision button vibration), the first combination). Object operation (major accessory operation), 1st effect change effect (1st position effect change effect), 1st background change (change to background 1), 1st story progress effect (story progress effect with the change)) Is the first in the first gaming state (normal) even in the notification effect (variation display of jackpot) in which the first starting condition is satisfied and the special game is performed in the second gaming state (probability change, time reduction). The notification effect (variation display of the jackpot), which is the special game when the start condition is satisfied, can also be executed, but the second predetermined effect (second button vibration (look-ahead vibration), second accessory operation ( (Small operation), 2nd effect change effect (2nd position effect change effect), 2nd background change (change to background 2), look-ahead fanning effect, 2nd story progress effect (countdown effect)) It is feasible before and / or during the execution of the notification effect (variation display of jackpot) which is the special game when the first start condition is satisfied in the state (normal), but the second game state. It is characterized in that the execution is restricted before and / or during the execution of the notification effect (variation display of the jackpot) which is the special game when the first start condition is satisfied in (probability change, time reduction). do.

A second configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled into a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (normal), and the start The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of producing the possibility that the special game is executed based on the satisfaction of the condition by using a plurality of types of notification effects (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern). A plurality of types of predetermined effects (the fanning effect, button vibration, accessory operation (movement / light emission), effect change effect, etc.) that are expected to execute the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) capable of executing the special game. Executes background change, pattern production at the start of fluctuation, story progress production, step-up, dialogue notice, mode change, light guide plate emission, roulette effect, decision effect, pattern alignment effect, pattern enlargement effect after pattern alignment, look-ahead effect, etc.) It is possible, and the predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect, and the first predetermined effect (the fanning effect, the first button vibration (decision button vibration), the first combination). Object operation (major accessory operation), 1st effect change effect (1st position effect change effect), 1st background change (change to background 1), 1st story progress effect (story progress effect with the change)) Is the first in the first gaming state (normal) even in the notification effect (variation display of jackpot) in which the first starting condition is satisfied and the special game is performed in the second gaming state (probability change, time reduction). The notification effect (variation display of the jackpot), which is the special game when the start condition is satisfied, can also be executed, but the second predetermined effect (second button vibration (look-ahead vibration), second accessory operation ( (Small operation), 2nd effect change effect (2nd position effect change effect), 2nd background change (change to background 2), look-ahead fanning effect, 2nd story progress effect (countdown effect)) It is feasible before and / or during the execution of the notification effect (variation display of jackpot) which is the special game when the second start condition is satisfied in the state (probability change / time reduction), but the second It is characterized in that the execution is restricted before and / or during the execution of the notification effect (variation display of jackpot) which is the special game when the first start condition is satisfied in the game state (probability change, time reduction). do.

A third configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the gaming state is the first gaming state (normal), the second gaming state (probability change, time saving) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (normal) after the execution of the special game, and the above. It is possible to control from the first game state (normal) to the third game state (play time) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) without executing the special game, and the start condition. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means capable of producing the possibility that the special game is executed based on the establishment of the above using a plurality of types of notification effects (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern). Multiple types of predetermined effects (the fanning effect, button vibration, accessory operation (movement / light emission), effect change effect, background) that are expected to execute the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) that can execute a special game. Change, change start design effect, story progress effect, step-up, dialogue notice, mode change, light guide plate emission, roulette effect, decision effect, pattern alignment effect, pattern enlargement effect after pattern alignment, look-ahead effect, etc.) can be executed. The first start condition is satisfied in the second game state (probability change, time reduction) and the notification effect is executed, and the second start condition is satisfied in the third game state (play time). The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs between the case where the notification effect is executed and the case where the notification effect is executed.

A fourth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled between a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the first effect (pre-reach effect) is followed by the second effect (post-reach effect) to notify whether or not the special game is to be executed. , A vibration effect that vibrates a predetermined effect means (button, lever, movable accessory, etc.) and an effect control means capable of performing the first effect condition in the second gaming state (probability change, time reduction). Based on the establishment of the first starting condition in the first gaming state (normal), rather than the case where the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of When the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the pre-reach effect). do.

A fifth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled between a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the starting condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the first effect (pre-reach effect) is followed by the second effect (post-reach effect) to notify whether or not the special game is to be executed. , A vibration effect that vibrates a predetermined effect means (button, lever, movable accessory, etc.) and an effect control means that can execute the effect, and in the second gaming state (probability change, time reduction), the first start. The notification effect of notifying the execution of the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition is more than the case where the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of the condition. When the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the pre-reach effect).

A sixth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the gaming state is the first gaming state (normal), the second gaming state (probability change, time saving) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (normal) after the execution of the special game, and the above. It is possible to control from the first game state (normal) to the third game state (play time) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) without executing the special game, and the start A notification effect (reach loss fluctuation pattern, variation per reach) that notifies whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (post-reach effect) after the first effect (pre-reach effect) based on the condition is satisfied. A pattern) and a vibration effect that vibrates a predetermined effect means (button, lever, movable accessory, etc.) are provided, and the second game state (probability change, time reduction) is provided. The second start condition is in the third game state (play time) than in the case where the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of the first start condition. It is easier to execute the vibration effect during the first effect (during the pre-reach effect) when the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of. It is characterized by that.

◆ The seventh configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled between a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the starting condition is satisfied. A notification effect (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern) that notifies whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (variation second half) after the first effect (variation first half) based on It is equipped with a vibration effect that vibrates the effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.) and an effect control means that can execute the effect, and the first start condition is satisfied in the second game state (probability change, time reduction). The first start condition is satisfied in the first game state (normal), as compared with the case where the notification effect (loss variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed. It is characterized in that the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the first half of the variation) when the notification effect (reach loss variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed.

The eighth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled between a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the starting condition is satisfied. A notification effect (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern) that notifies whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (variation second half) after the first effect (variation first half) based on It is equipped with a vibration effect that vibrates the effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.) and an effect control means that can execute the effect, and in the second gaming state (probability change, time reduction), the first start condition is The notification notifying that the second start condition is satisfied and not executing the special game is more than the case where the notification effect (loss variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed. When the effect (loss variation pattern) is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the first half of the variation).

A ninth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled between a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the starting condition is satisfied. A notification effect (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern) that notifies whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (variation second half) after the first effect (variation first half) based on It is equipped with a vibration effect that vibrates the effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.) and an effect control means that can execute the effect, and the first start condition is satisfied in the second game state (probability change, time reduction). Based on the establishment of the first starting condition in the first game state (normal), rather than the case where the notification effect (loss fluctuation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed. It is characterized in that the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the second effect (during the latter half of the variation) when the notification effect (loss variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed. ..

A tenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled between a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the starting condition is satisfied. A notification effect (reach loss variation pattern, reach per variation pattern) that notifies whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (variation second half) after the first effect (variation first half) based on It is equipped with a vibration effect that vibrates the effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.) and an effect control means that can execute the effect. Notify that the special game is not executed based on the establishment of the second start condition, rather than the case where the notification effect (loss variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed based on the establishment. The case where the notification effect (loss variation pattern) is executed is characterized in that the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the second effect (during the latter half of the variation).

The eleventh configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port). The gaming state can be controlled between a first gaming state (normal) and a second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and can be operated by the player. Various operating means (buttons, levers), a notification effect (reach loss fluctuation pattern, reach-per-reach fluctuation pattern) for notifying whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the operating means to the player. When the second gaming state (probability change, time reduction) is provided, the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) for prompting the operation of the above operation, the vibration effect for vibrating the operation means, and the effect control means capable of executing the operation promotion effect are provided. Is more likely than the case where the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of the second starting condition, the first starting condition is satisfied and the special game The case where the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution is executed is characterized in that the operation promotion effect is less likely to be executed and the vibration effect is less likely to be executed.

A twelfth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine executes a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening). The determination means for determining whether or not the game is performed, the pre-determination means for determining whether or not the special game is to be performed before the determination is performed, the game state is the first game state (normal), and the above. After the execution of the special game, the second game state (probability change) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) and the first game without executing the special game from the first game state (normal). It is possible to execute the game effect according to the game state control means for controlling the third game state (play time) which is more advantageous to the player than the state (normal), the result of the determination, and the result of the preliminary determination. A specific effect (look-ahead effect) that is provided with an effect control means and can be executed based on the preliminary determination in the third game state (play time) and a front in the second game state (probability change). It is characterized in that the ratio of execution of a predetermined specific effect (button / character vibration look-ahead effect, character operation look-ahead effect) that can be executed based on the pre-article determination is different.

A thirteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine executes a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening) or the establishment of the second starting condition (winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening). The determination means for determining whether or not the game is performed, the pre-determination means for determining whether or not the special game is to be performed before the determination is performed, the game state is the first game state (normal), and the above. After the execution of the special game, the second game state (probability change) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) and the first game without executing the special game from the first game state (normal). It is possible to execute the game effect according to the game state control means for controlling the third game state (play time) which is more advantageous to the player than the state (normal), the result of the determination, and the result of the preliminary determination. A specific effect (look-ahead effect) that is provided with an effect control means and can be executed based on the preliminary determination in the third game state (play time) and a front in the second game state (probability change). It is characterized in that the ratio of executing a predetermined specific effect (button / character vibration look-ahead effect, character operation look-ahead effect) that can be executed based on the pre-article determination is the same.

Next, as described above, in the gaming machine, the game progresses by the control processing on the various control boards, and the game production is executed according to the progress of the game. Will be explained.
Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, each constituent member will be described with a new reference numeral. That is, in the constituent members described above and the constituent members described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 125, different reference numerals may be attached to the same member, and the same reference numerals may be attached to different members. May be done.

(Structure on the back of the game board)
First, the configuration on the back side of the game board will be described.
FIG. 80 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame body, and FIG. 81 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 80.
As shown in FIGS. 80, 81, etc., a base frame body (liquid crystal base frame) 130 having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is attached to the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 4, and the base frame body is formed. An image display unit (image display device 31 and image display cover 165) 160 is assembled on the back side (rear surface side) so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 166 is attached to the back surface (rear surface) of the image display cover (liquid crystal cover) 165, and a board protection in which a main control board is housed in the lower back surface of the image display cover 165 below the lamp relay board 166. The case (board case) 200 is attached.
The base frame (liquid crystal base) 130 is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the front surface 131 of the annular body is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game board 10. There is a space on the back of the base frame for arranging various circuit boards and parts.
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of the image display unit (liquid crystal unit) 160 fixed to the back surface of the base frame body 130. The image display unit 160 is slidable from the side (horizontal direction), vertical direction, or diagonal direction of the base frame with respect to the gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the effect control board. It is configured to be attached to.
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame are covered with the lid member 170 (FIGS. 80 and 81).

As shown in FIG. 80, at least the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 included in the main control board 50) are exposed on the back side of the board case 200.
Further, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 included in the main control board 50 can be visually recognized via the transparent board case 200.
The staff of the game store opens the door of the game machine and operates the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 while visually observing the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 on the back of the game machine to clear the RWM. You can change settings, check game performance, and perform other operations.

The RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed, and the operation member 685 that can be operated by the staff of the amusement shop or the like can be operated from the opening provided at the position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680 in the board case 200. It stands out.
When the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed by the pressed operation member 685. As a result, the RWM clear switch 680 is operated.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end surface of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is exposed from the opening provided in the board case 200.
Amusement shop staff and the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660.

(Main board protection case)
Next, the configuration of the main board protection case 200 according to the present embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the main board protection case 200, the payout board protection case 400, and the effect board protection case 700 are common to the game board 4 side in the forward direction and the opposite side to the game board 4 with respect to the board case. The direction will be described as the back side.
Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when each board case is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 4.

82 is a diagram illustrating a main board protection case according to an example of the present embodiment, where FIG. 82 is a perspective view, FIG. 82 is a side view, and FIG. 82 is a front view. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the main board protective case including the pedestal. FIG. 84 is a side view showing an aspect when the main board protection case is attached to the pedestal.
85 is a view illustrating a state in which the main board protection case of FIG. 82 is removed from the pedestal, where FIG. 85A is a perspective view, FIG. 85B is a side view, and FIG. 85C is a front view. FIG. 86 is a rear perspective view of the main board protective case of FIG. 85.
The main board protection case (hereinafter, simply referred to as a main board case) 200 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in a state where the main control board 50 on which electronic components such as a ROM are mounted is housed inside. It is assembled to the back surface of the slingshot via a pedestal 280 (see FIGS. 82 to 84).

Further, the main board case 200 has two transparent resin case pieces (lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220) that are housed inside with the main control board (printed circuit board) 50 on which the ROM is mounted sandwiched between them. ), A cutting member (hereinafter referred to as a cutting part material) 230 for cutting the opening prohibition seal sandwiched between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and the opening prohibition seal 250 described later are adhered to each other. It is provided with a cap 240 that is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the main board case 200.
The main control board 50 of the present embodiment employs a single-sided mounting method in which electronic components are arranged on only one side.
By mounting important electronic components (especially ROM) on only one side and facing the mounting surface to the surface that can be seen from the outside (rear surface), it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activities such as replacement of electronic components.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
The two case pieces constituting the main board case 200 are described as a lower case piece and an upper case piece, but the positional relationship between the case pieces is different from the vertical direction shown in the figure.
For convenience, the case piece on the back side is described as the lower case piece and the case piece on the front side is described as the upper case piece from the viewpoint of the inspector, but according to the direction notation in the figure, the upper case piece is the rear case. The lower case piece is the front case piece.
At the lower part of the upper case piece 220, a protective cover 229 that covers the connection portion between the internal connector and the external connector provided on the internal main control board 50 is arranged.
In the present embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 by a caulking member with the main control board 50 sandwiched between them.

A caulking fastening portion 290 using a caulking member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main board case 200, and a caulking member (locking member) is provided in a fastening hole 291 (sealing portion) provided in the caulking fastening portion 290. ) Is driven in (locked) to lock the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (fastened) into the fastening hole 291, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 can be opened / closed and detached.
In the caulking fastening portion 290 of the main board case 200 of the present embodiment, two caulking fastening holes are provided (caulking fastening holes 291A and 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole is configured by communicating the lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and the upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220.

As will be described later, the lower case is formed by driving a caulking member into one of the caulking fastening holes 291 in a state where the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are engaged with each other by using the hook groove and the hook piece. It becomes impossible to disengage the engagement between the piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 by sliding them together.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case.
It should be noted that only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 at one time. After removing the caulking member (breaking) and releasing the fastening (after opening the main board case 200), if the caulking member is to be fastened again, the caulking member is driven into the remaining caulking fastening hole to fasten the fastening. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
In the main board case 200 (for example, FIG. 85, etc.) of the present embodiment, for example, the caulking member is driven into the caulking fastening hole 291B on the lower side in the drawing.

The pedestal 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the game machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 166) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
Since the main board case 200 accommodating the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the game board such as a game machine via the pedestal 280, the upper case is from the back side of the game board. The electronic components mounted on the internal control board surface can be visually recognized through the piece 220.
Further, by rotating the main board case 200 upward about the shaft portion 281 located at the upper part of the pedestal 280, the inside of the main board case can be confirmed from the bottom surface of the transparent lower case piece 210.

The main board case assembly 200A in which the main board case 200 is attached to the pedestal 280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the main board case assembly 200A includes a pedestal 280, a main board case 200, and a protective cover 229. The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 10 (see FIG. 82).
As shown in FIG. 83, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left-right direction are longer than the two sides along the up-down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 281 near both left and right ends of the lower side. It has a plate shape in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The shaft portion 281 has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.
The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that engage with each shaft portion 281. The pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of the upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 84, when the main board case 200 is attached to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 is convex toward the back surface side. Then, since the hook portion 249 is in a state where it can be engaged with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200 is brought close to the pedestal 280, and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.
Then, when the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200 is rotated around the shaft portion 281 counterclockwise when viewed from the left side (direction of the arrow of the reference numeral C in FIG. 84) to rotate the main board. Overlay the case 200 on the pedestal 280. As shown in FIG. 82, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 280 is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the main board case 200. Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 282 and the main board case 200.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the protective cover 229 is then attached to the main board case 200. The protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of the main board case 200 including the hook portion 249. In this way, the main board case assembly 200A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board 10.
The main control board 50 and the main board case 200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, the main control board 50 that controls the game is housed in the main board case 200. The integrated main ROM 502 is mounted on the main control board 50. Further, a plurality of electronic components 595 different from the integrated main ROM 502 are mounted on the main control board 50. The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Further, as shown in FIG. 85B, a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the main control board 50. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 85 (b), and may be omitted in other drawings.

The integrated main ROM 502 stores the stored contents used for controlling the game. Further, the integrated main ROM 502 stores stored contents that affect the result of the game.
Further, the integrated main ROM 502 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the main CPU 50a, the main ROM 50b, and the main RAM 50c are integrated.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right in the lower part of the main control board 50. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside the six openings 779 provided at the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Of the plurality of connectors 771 to 767, the plurality of connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a first start port detection switch 10a, a second start port detection switch 11c, a large winning opening detection switch 13c, and a general winning opening detection switch 14a, which detect that a game ball has won a prize. A signal from at least a part of (see 3) is input. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a first start port detection switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won, a second start port detection switch 14a, a large winning opening detection switch 13c, and a general winning opening detection. It is assumed that all signals of the switch 14a (see FIG. 3) are input. The detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent colors, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773 and 776 are different colors from the fluorescent colors.

The integrated main ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits a signal between the integrated main ROM 502 and the main control board 50. The first signal pin 582 is visibly arranged via the main board case 200. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the main body 580 of the integrated main ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Therefore, the first signal pin 582 can be visually recognized from the front via the main board case 200.
The signal pin provided in each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is referred to as a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 83). The second signal pin 583 transmits a signal between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the main control board 50. The signal is not limited to a digital signal, but also includes an analog signal. It is visibly arranged via the main board case 200. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, left, right, or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the main board case 200.
As shown in FIG. 83, the main board case 200 is a box-shaped case that houses the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner.

A detailed configuration of the main board case 200 and a table attached to the main board case and the included main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 94.
The performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 described with reference to FIG. 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and later, and will not be described here.
The main board case 200 includes the main control board 50 so that a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 85 (b)) mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized. The main substrate case 200 is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic.
As described above, the lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an inclusion portion 581 for containing the main control board 50. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200, which is the integrated main ROM 502 side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200, which is opposite to the integrated main ROM 502 side. In FIG. 85B, only the integrated main ROM 502 is shown among the electric parts provided in the main control board 50 contained in the transparent main board case 200, and the other electric parts are shown. Is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 87 (a) and the like).

As shown in FIG. 86, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each have a control board storage unit 211 and 221 for accommodating the main control board 50 (see FIG. 83) and a sealing base unit 310 (see FIG. 83) described later. 87) is provided with sealing portions 212 and 222. The control board storage portions 211 and 221 are projected from the plate portions 211a and 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and the peripheral edges of the plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and are provided on one side of the plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.
Further, as shown in FIG. 83, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 50 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210. The cylindrical portion 565 is formed with a hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the main control board 50, a hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

The main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 50 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 85) is inserted into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the main control board 50 via the hole portion 567. The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided in the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 85 (b)). As a result, the main control board 50 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

As shown in FIG. 86, of the flange portion 211b of the control board storage portion 211, a portion (hereinafter referred to as a “male portion”) projecting from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a. Is formed by three hook pieces 211c each formed in an L shape.
On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221, the portion protruding from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as "female portion") has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which a male portion of the control board accommodating portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Further, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 50 is screwed by the screw 769 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 are slid to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 86 along the left-right direction. Then, since the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion engages with the hooking piece 221d, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α. Is done.
When combined in this way, the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 form a box-shaped encapsulation portion 581 internally shielded from the outside. The main control board 50 (see FIG. 83) is housed in the inclusion portion 581. Therefore, the possibility that the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the like are illegally replaced can be suppressed.

The main control board 50 is attached to the inside of the control board storage unit 221 before the control board storage units 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the IC or the like mounted on the main control board 50 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board storage portion 221. This is because the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 200, electronic components such as the integrated main ROM 502 mounted on the main control board 50 can be used. This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside via the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. As shown in FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, when the main board case assembly 200A including the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 4, the inside of the main board case 200 is passed through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. The electronic components mounted on the main control board 50 of the above can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 86, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. As shown in FIG. 87, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw stop piece 91 and a second screw stop piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222.
When the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the encapsulation base portion 310 is formed by the encapsulation portions 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of the encapsulation body 300 in which these are combined.
As shown in FIG. 85, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base portion 310, the first screw stop piece 91 and the second screw stop are attached to the longitudinal end portion of the sealing body 300. In addition to the piece 92, the third screw stop piece 93 included in the cap 240 overlaps to form a screw stop portion 90 for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 86, the sealing portions 212 and 222 project to the right from the right end portion of the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221. The sealing portions 212 and 222 have the same height along the left-right direction and the same width in the vertical direction.
Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in each of the sealing portions 212 and 222 along the left-right direction. Two groove portions 222a parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed in the sealing portion 222 so as to be separated from each other for a predetermined period of time, and one groove portion 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 along the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 87, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined as described above, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are sealed in the right portion of the combined control board storage portions 211 and 221. The foundation portion 310 is formed.
In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel at regular intervals, and an insertion / removal space 310a (see FIG. 87) is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other. To.

As shown in FIG. 86, the open prohibition seal 250 is used as a means for sealing the main board case 200, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by a certified organization or the like. ..
The open prohibition seal 250 is provided with an adhesive surface on one surface of an easily cut material such as paper in consideration of cutability, and a plurality of cuts are formed. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the opening prohibition seal 250. In addition, the characters "opening prohibited" are also printed on the opening prohibition sticker 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a foundation portion 230a, a pair of picking portions 61, and a cutting portion 64. The foundation portion 230a, which is the basis of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64 is formed on one of the two long sides of the foundation portion 230a. The cut portion 64 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed in a blade shape. The picking portions 61 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the foundation portion 230a, and are formed in a shape bent in a "<" shape as a whole. The left end portion of the picking portion 61 is referred to as a free end portion 61a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can cover the entire sealing base portion 310 so as to cover the sealing base portion 310, and is formed to be removable from the sealing base portion 310.
The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310, and a third screw stop piece 93 that is formed on one end side of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 82 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end portion 61a of the picking portion 61 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion / removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base portion 310. It is provided. Further, a groove portion 86 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.
The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion / extraction space 310a (see FIG. 87) of the sealing base portion 310. After that, the opening prohibition seal 250 is attached. Further, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 86 fits into a part of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion / removal space 310a. Further, the protrusion 82 engages with the free end portion 61a of the grip portion 61 of the cutting member 230.

As shown in FIG. 85, as described above, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the third screw stop piece 93 becomes the first screw stop piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. It overlaps with the combination with the second screw stop piece 92 to form a screw stop portion 90 for screwing. When the caulking member 94 is driven into the screw fastening portion 90, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.
When the main board case 200 is unsealed, the caulking member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310. The same applies when the seal of the main board case 200 is illegally released.
The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the opening prohibition seal 250 is irreparably scratched by the cut portion 64 or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display including information about the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 50 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524.
The identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 525.

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification display 521 is displayed by silk printing on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information discrimination unit for displaying specific information.
The identification display 523, 524, 525 attached to the main board case 200 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 87).
The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

The identification labels 521 to 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification label 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string of "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string of "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification display 529 in the identification display 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to a manufacturer name, a model name, or the like. In the present embodiment, as an example, among "ABCD", "AB" represents a manufacturer name and "CD" represents a model name.
In addition, in the identification display 521 to 525, the manufacturer name itself is displayed as in the identification display 1595 and 1596 of FIG. 93, instead of displaying the manufacturer name by "AB" included in "ABCD". You may. Further, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed as in "CR Ai" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. 93. Further, the identification display 521 to 525 may display a model like the model "GH101" in the identification display 1595 and 1596 of FIG. 40. In this case, the same identification display in the identification display 521 to 525 becomes the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company".

In the following description, in the upper case piece 220, the surface forming the inside of the main board case 200 is referred to as an inner surface 532. In the upper case piece 220, the surface forming the outside of the main board case 200 is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIGS. 82 (c), 85 (c), and 87, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display unit 541. The position display unit 541 is a portion that displays a position to which the identification display 523 is given. The position display unit 541 is provided in the main board case 200 at a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502. More specifically, the position display unit 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the upper case piece 220. The integrated main ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display unit 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display unit 541 is a concave portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 85 (b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the position display portion 541. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example.
On the seal portion 542, a printing portion 797 is printed on the seal main body (base portion).
For all the seal parts attached to all the board cases described later, printing (printing) is performed on the adhesive seal body (base part), or writing is possible on the seal body (base part). It is common in that the base is formed.
In the present embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is an identification display 523.
Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal unit 542, the position display unit 541 is in a state where the identification display 523 is attached. The seal portion 542 is arranged so as to straddle at least a part of a plurality of electronic components 595 in the main board case 200. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main board case 200 when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 85 (b) illustrates a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and in reality, other electronic components (see FIG. 83) also exist. The identification display 523 of the upper case piece 220 is displayed so that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 has a visible angle. In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impair the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. As in the case of the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 94) in the modification described later, when the main board case 200 is at a predetermined angle, the identification display 523 may overlap with the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. .. In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impair the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is formed. In the present embodiment, the main board case 200 including the main control board 50 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 82, 83, 85, and 87, the main board case 200 is provided with a position display unit 541 which is a portion for displaying a position to which the identification display 523 is applied. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200 as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine 1, it is easier for the manufacturer to grasp the position where the identification display 520 is given, as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification display 523 is given by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification display 523 is given to different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200 as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the position display unit 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200 and is a recess for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display unit 541 is provided as a recess, the inspector can display the position of the position display unit 541 as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is displayed on the flat surface of the main board case 200 by printing or the like. , Easy to grasp.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display unit 541 that is a recess. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is mass-produced, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the position display unit 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main board case 200. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 and the integrated main ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the integrated main ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the integrated main ROM 502 has been replaced due to fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 523, which is an information identification unit attached to the main board case 200, and the identification display 522, which is an information identification unit attached to the integrated main ROM 502, include at least the same identification display 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Further, in the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impair the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. Since the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed so that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 has a visible angle, the inspector can see the integrated main ROM 502 with the same identification display 529. It is possible to confirm with the main board case 200 and easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed. Further, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, it is determined whether or not the integrated main ROM 502 and the identification display 529 attached to the main board case 200 are the same. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 523 which is the information identification unit attached to the main board case 200, the identification display 522 which is the information identification unit attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and the information identification unit displayed on the main board 50. A certain identification display 521 includes at least the same identification display 529 (character string of "ABCD" in this embodiment). Therefore, the inspector can confirm the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 to which the same identification display 529 is attached, and can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed. Further, even if at least one of the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with the other main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 due to fraudulent activity, the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 By determining whether or not the identification display 529 attached to the is the same, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

The main board case 200 includes a main control board 50 so that a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 can be visually recognized. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent colors, the inspector can easily see them as compared with the case where the detection signal connectors are not fluorescent colors. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is illegally connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to confirm the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 as compared with the case where there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is illegally connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the first signal pin 582 included in the integrated main ROM 502 is visibly arranged via the main board case 200. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the first signal pin 582. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the second signal pin 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 is visibly arranged via the main board case 200. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the second signal pin 583. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side by a screw 769 (see FIG. 85B). Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 as compared with the case where it is not screwed. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are slid to each other and combined. Therefore, even if a person who intends to cheat simply tries to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 in order to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the upper case piece 220 The lower case piece 210 is difficult to separate. Therefore, it is difficult to replace the main control board 50 illegally. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made. In each of the following modifications, the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above embodiments are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The position display unit 541 was a recess, but the position display unit 541 is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, the position display unit 541 may be a convex portion.

88 to 90 are views showing a modified example of the position display unit provided on the main board case.
FIG. 88 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 85 in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case according to the modified example of the main substrate case 200. As shown in FIG. 88, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes to the rear side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542.
Further, the position display unit 541 is provided on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, but the position display unit 541 is not limited to this. For example, the position display unit 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220.

FIG. 89 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 85 in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case according to the modified example of the main substrate case 200. As shown in FIG. 89, the position display unit 541 is a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed on the rear side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the main board case 200 via the transparent upper case piece 220.

FIG. 90 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 85 in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case according to the modified example of the main substrate case 200. As shown in FIG. 90, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes to the front side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case via the transparent upper case piece 220.
As described above, the position display unit 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200, and is a convex portion or a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display unit 541 that is a convex portion and a concave portion is provided, for example, the position of the identification display 520 is displayed by the inspector as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is displayed on the flat surface of the main board case 200 by printing or the like. Is easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520 attached to the main board case 200. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display unit 541 which is a convex portion or a concave portion. Therefore, in the case of mass-producing the gaming machine 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the plurality of members including the main control board 50 may not include a part of the upper case piece 220, the lower case piece 210, and the cap 240. Further, the plurality of members may further include members different from the upper case piece 220, the lower case piece 210, and the cap 240.

Further, the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the plurality of members are provided with the identification display 520, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members may be attached with the related identification display 520. For example, the identification display 525 may not be attached to the cap 240 included in the plurality of members. Further, the identification display 524 may not be attached to the lower case piece 210 included in the plurality of members. Further, the identification display 523 may not be attached to the upper case piece 220 included in the plurality of members. The inspector can confirm the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members, and can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, is the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members related? By determining whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210. In this case, the inspector confirms the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210, and easily determines whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. You can check. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, the identification attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210. By determining whether or not the display 520 is related, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the upper case piece 220 and the identification display 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. For example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, it is inspected by at least determining whether the upper case piece 220 and the identification display 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 are related. The person can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the identification display 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification display 520 may be all the same identification display (for example, all “ABCD01” or the like). Further, the identification display 520 may be different from each other, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The description content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Further, the identification display 520 does not have to be a character string. For example, the identification display 520 may have various marks. Further, the mode to which the identification display 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but also the identification display 521 to 525 may be printed and attached to the seal portion. Further, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Further, the identification marks 523 to 525 may all be stamped by the mold for manufacturing the main board case 200.

In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541 which is a sticking position mark indicating the position to stick the seal part 542 may take the following form.
That is, the position display unit 541 is a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal portion 542 on the same surface or the back surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached, and is on the same surface or the back surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached. It is a mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.

The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same surface as the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portion 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion or concave portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion.
The position display portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex portion nor a concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542.

Further, the identification display 520 may be formed inside the material of the main board case 200.
91 and 92 are views showing a modified example in which the identification display is formed on the main board case.
Hereinafter, the modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92.
In the main board case shown in FIG. 91, the portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display unit 1390. Further, the portion outside the identification display unit 1390 is referred to as an outside portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 92, the identification display unit 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391.
The identification display 523 is formed inside a member (in this embodiment, the material of the upper case piece 220) forming the identification display unit 1390. The identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers (four in the present embodiment) in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384.
The letter 1371 of "A" of the identification display 523 is formed in the layer 1381. The letter 1372 of "B" is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The letter 1373 of "C" is formed in the layer 1383. The letter 1374 of "D" is formed in the layer 1384. The character 1375 of "0" is formed in the layer 1382. The character 1376 of "3" is formed in the layer 1383.

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique for condensing a laser and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns in the material of the main substrate case 200 at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm. By forming a plurality of the cracks, the identification display 523 is formed inside the main substrate case 200.
In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, for example, the identification display 523 is more difficult to remove than the case where the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the main board case 200. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. Further, when the identification display 523 is removed by fraud, scratches are formed on the main board cases of FIGS. 91 and 92. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. Therefore, it is difficult to remove the identification display 523 as compared with the case where the identification display 523 is formed only on one layer. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, in the main substrate cases of FIGS. 91 and 92, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In this case, it is necessary to cut the main board case 200 deeper when an unauthorized person tries to remove the identification display 520, as compared with the case where L1 is L2 or less. Therefore, the main board cases of FIGS. 91 and 92 are easily scratched. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
The identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display unit 1390. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 may be less than or equal to the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. Further, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification display 520 provided in the main board case of FIGS. 91 and 92, such as the identification display 524 and 525, is also formed inside the main board case of FIGS. 91 and 92. May be done.

Further, various seals may be attached to the main board case 200 in addition to the seal portion 542 and the like. Further, the content displayed on the printing unit (for example, the printing unit 797) provided on various seals such as the seal unit 542 is not limited.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a modified example of the main board case.
The configuration of the performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 will be described below, and will not be described here.
For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case according to the modified example shown in FIG. 93. In FIG. 93, the members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper part of the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200. The sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are transparent as an example. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83), respectively. In FIG. 93, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

A printing unit 1571 is printed on the seal unit 1560. The printing unit 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing unit 1571 is colored and, in the present embodiment, has a white background as an example. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code unit 1572, an information display unit 1573, and an entry area 1570. The seal unit 1560 is provided so that the printing unit 1571, the code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the entry area 1570 do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.
The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. The code unit 1572 contains predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”) indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50. For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information mobile terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Etc. are included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and the information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display unit 1573 contains various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the main control board 50. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

As an example, the entry area 1570 is provided with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper left, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Opening date" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the lower left.
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector's name is entered in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date when the main board case 200 is opened is entered in the entry area 1570 on the right side. .. The inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was fraudulent.

The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595. The peep section 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The peep section 1574 has light transmission. In this embodiment, the peep portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In the present embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 having three lines in the vertical direction. Further, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged side by side and the two entry areas 1570 on the upper side. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.

Further, the seal unit 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion where such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The seal unit 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".

Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification display 1595 and 1596. In the present embodiment, the species name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" in the identification labels 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but some of them may be the same.
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating the information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562.
Although the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 50 may be displayed including the same identification display as the identification display 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). By confirming the positional relationship with the component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the area 1575 is provided, the inspector writes the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200 is opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). be able to. In addition, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date and the like on which it is confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Further, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the viewing unit 1574 is provided, the inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 via the viewing unit 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the cord portion 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the code unit 1572 is associated with the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 by using the code unit 1572. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 50 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the fraud in which the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced by checking the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 85, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend back and forth and left and right. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Further, when the main body portion 580 extends back and forth and left and right, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body portion 580.
Further, various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.
For example, FIG. 94 is a view of the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 as viewed diagonally upward from the rear. In FIG. 94, members other than the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 are not shown. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps with the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. That is, FIG. 94 is a view from an angle at which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. However, as shown in FIG. 93, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 93 is a view from an angle at which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 can be visually recognized at the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. In this way, the information displayed on the seal unit 1561 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the explanation has been given by taking the seal portion 1561 as an example, various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, information of the identification display 523) has an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. It should be displayed in.

(Board structure of main control board)
The configuration (layout) of the main control board housed in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to that described above.
95 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a component surface (surface) of the main control board, FIG. 95. (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board.
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the printed circuit board used for the main control board, FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board. , It is a figure which showed the structure of the solder side (back side) of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, the main control board 50 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701 is adopted.
Further, in the printed wiring board 701, various electronic components such as an insertion mounting type (through hole mounting type) resistor R, a capacitor C, a transistor Tr, and an IC and a connector CN are mounted in a through hole (component insertion hole) formed in the board. Through-hole mounting method is adopted.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 96, the printed wiring board 701 is provided with a through hole (component insertion hole) 702 for inserting leads of various electronic components. In this case, a connection electrode (connection land) 703 is provided around the through hole 702 on the solder surface 701b side of the printed wiring board 701.

The connection electrode 703 is an electrode for connecting the leads of electronic components inserted into the through hole 702 from the component surface 701a side of the printed wiring board 701 by, for example, soldering. The component and the wiring pattern on the board are electrically connected, and the electronic component is mechanically held.
That is, the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 701 provided with a through hole 702 into which leads of insert-mounted electronic components can be inserted.

97 is a diagram showing a main board case of the present embodiment when the main control boards shown in FIGS. 95 and 96 are housed, FIG. 97 shows a perspective view of the assembly, and FIG. 97B shows the assembly. The front view of is shown. Further, FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 97 and 98.
Further, similarly to FIGS. 82 to 94, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display including information about the gaming machine 1. The identification display 520 provided on the control board 50 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524. The identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 525.

The identification display 521 is displayed by silk printing on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.
The identification display 523, 524, 525 attached to the main board case 200 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.
The position display unit 541 is, for example, a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed on the rear side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542.
The identification display 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 87).
The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240.
In FIGS. 97 and 98, the members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 82 to 94) are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower portion on the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided in the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.
Both the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, it is assumed that they are transparent as an example. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83), respectively. In FIG. 97, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.
In this example, the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing counterfeiting.
The "watermark" is a display in which the appearance differs depending on the viewing angle, and various types such as those using a hologram and those having a different appearance depending on the physical shape can be applied. .. In general, a seal with a watermark has a lower translucency of the base portion, which is the main body of the seal portion, than a seal without a watermark, so that the visibility through the seal is lowered.

A printing unit 1571 is printed on the seal unit 1560. The printing unit 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing unit 1571 is colored and, in the present embodiment, has a white background as an example. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code unit 1572, an information display unit 1573, and an entry area 1570. The seal unit 1560 is provided so that the printing unit 1571, the code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the entry area 1570 do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.

That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is provided with an entry area 1570 for entering the opener who opened the main board case 200 and the opening date.
The seal portion 1560 is made of a transparent material. For example, a total of six entry areas 1570 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "main board control number", three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the seal portion 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
The entry area 1570 is a white base formed on the transparent material and writable by a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the entry area numbers are printed on the left side of each entry area.
Except for each print and entry area 1570 (white background), the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
In the seal portion 1560, the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is attached to a position visible via the transparent material from all angles.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the three rows of entry areas 1570 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
The entry area 1570 provided in the seal portion 1560 is a total of six in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.

On the other hand, as described above, the number of caulking portions (caulking fastening holes 291, that is, closing portions) provided in the main board case 200 is two (caulking fastening holes 291A and caulking fastening holes 291B).
That is, the number of caulking portions (closing portions) provided in the main board case 200 is less than or equal to the number of openers and opening date entry fields provided in the seal portion 1560 attached to the main board case 200. .. By providing more entry fields than can actually be opened, it is possible to deal with errors and other errors, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than when the number of caulked parts and the number of entry fields are the same. Is.
In the main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 580 and a plurality of first signal pins 582, as described above.
However, the integrated main ROM 502 of FIGS. 97 and 98 is erected so that its main surface is orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control board 50.
The seal portion 1562, which will be described later, is attached to the main surface orthogonal to the substrate surface.

The display contents of the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. The code unit 1572 contains predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”) indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50. For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed at the end of the information mobile phone includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Information such as is included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and the information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display unit 1573 contains various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the main control board 50. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

As an example, the entry area 1570 is provided with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper left, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Opening date" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the lower left.
For example, when the main board case 200 is opened, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side and the date when the main board case 200 is opened in the entry area 1570 on the right side. .. The inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was fraudulent.

The seal unit 1560 includes a viewing unit 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50. The peep section 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The peep section 1574 has light transmission. In this embodiment, the peep portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In the present embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 having three lines in the vertical direction. Further, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged side by side and the two entry areas 1570 on the upper side. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.

Further, the seal unit 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of a model name, a manufacturer name, a rated voltage, and a total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion where such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" including a model, a manufacturer name "AA", a rated voltage and a total capacity (AC24V ± 5%, 250VA).
In addition, the part where the model name is displayed is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow for the transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white on the background.

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The seal unit 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating the information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562.
Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification display 1595 and 1596. In the present embodiment, the species name "CR Ai", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA" in the identification labels 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but some of them may be the same.
Although the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 50 may be displayed including the same identification display as the identification display 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the area 1575 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can see the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200 is opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). Can be filled in. In addition, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date and the like on which it is confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Further, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the peep portion 1574 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 through the peep portion 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the cord portion 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the code unit 1572 is associated with the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 by using the code unit 1572. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 50 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the fraud in which the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced by checking the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 85, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend back and forth and left and right. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Further, when the main body portion 580 extends back and forth and left and right, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body portion 580.
Further, various information displayed on the seal portions 1560 and 1561 may be displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, particularly the upper case piece 220, does not have a vent.
In the main board case 200, date marks are formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220.
The date mark is a mark for lot management that is added at the time of manufacturing (molding) a case that is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of this embodiment, a component having a height that makes the ROM identification seal (ROM seal / seal portion 1562) invisible is provided in the vicinity of the main ROM.

FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (d) are schematic views showing a procedure for assembling the cutting member, the open prohibition seal, and the cap to the sealing base portion centering on the protruding piece of the upper case piece, and FIGS. 99 (e) show. It is an end view of the projecting piece, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before assembling a cutting member, an opening prohibition seal, and a cap to the sealing base portion 310, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before assembling the sealing base portion. FIG. 102 is a perspective view showing a state in which the seal is adhered, FIG. 102 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the opening prohibition seal, and FIG. 103 shows a state in which the cap is removed and the opening prohibition seal is broken. It is a perspective view, and FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are a surface view of an example of an opening prohibition seal, and a partially enlarged view.
The cutting member 230 shown in FIGS. 99 to 103 has a partially different configuration from that shown in FIG. 86, but is the same in that the opening prohibition seal is broken when the cap is removed. It applies in the same way.

(Opening prohibited sticker)
As a means for sealing the main board case 200 having the above configuration, the opening prohibition seal 250 shown in FIG. 104 (a) is used. The open prohibition seal 250 is made of a paper material that can be cut and broken relatively easily, and is printed for security (for anti-counterfeiting) on the front surface and an adhesive layer is formed on the back surface. There is.
The band-shaped part 251 arranged along each of the upper and lower sides of the surface is an identification area (fine pattern area) 251 for authenticity identification (forgery prevention) composed of fine components including random micro characters. Is. Hologram 252, QR code (registered trademark) 253, and the like are provided as security means other than the identification area 251.
Random microprinting is a technology that inserts very small characters into a line or a part of a pattern. Since microprints cannot be duplicated with a low-resolution copier, it is one of the means to confirm the authenticity of the duplicate.

FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram in which a part of the identification area (fine pattern area) provided on the opening prohibition seal 250 is magnified 10 times, and "opening prohibited" is shown in the pattern consisting of fine circles or dots. Hidden characters such as "security" are described.
By adhering the opening prohibition seal 250 across the two case pieces constituting the main board case, the identification region 251 is surely broken when the seal is illegally opened. Even if the fraudster replaces the ROM and then closes the case body and the cover body again and connects the broken parts of the opening prohibition seal 250 to restore the original appearance, the identification area (other parts) remains. By discriminating with a magnifying glass, it is possible to reliably confirm the existence of the broken portion and the repaired portion.

Since fine characters such as random micro characters cannot be discriminated (reading, recognizing, and discriminating) with the naked eye, they can be discriminated only by magnifying them 5 to 10 times using a magnifying glass such as a loupe. For example, if each character has a minute size of 1/10 to 1/5 mm, it is difficult to distinguish and read it with the naked eye, but it has normal eyesight by magnifying it 10 times or 5 times. It is possible to enlarge the size to about 1 mm, which can be discriminated and read by the person who made it.
The identification area 251 of the opening prohibition seal 250 of the present invention is not limited to random micro characters, and it is difficult for an observer who has at least a part thereof to have normal visual acuity to discriminate (read, recognize, and identify) with the naked eye. Anything that contains very small (fine) characters, figures, symbols, or / and patterns may be used. By enlarging these minute characters and the like, the observer can discriminate, read, and judge the authenticity.
It should be noted that "difficult to discriminate with the naked eye" broadly includes cases where it is not impossible to discriminate with the naked eye, but it is difficult to discriminate with the naked eye, and cases where it is impossible to discriminate with the naked eye.
Needless to say, the method of arranging the identification area 251 on the opening prohibition seal, its shape, and the like can be changed in various ways.

(Main board case main structure)
Next, the main structure of the main board case centering on the portion to which the opening prohibition seal is adhered will be described.
That is, when the main board case 200 is in the closed state as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, it straddles between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 (sealing base portion 310 = opening prohibition seal adhesive portion). By adhering the opening prohibition seal 250 to the opening prohibition seal 250, both case pieces cannot be opened without damaging the opening prohibition seal 250. That is, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided on one end edges in the longitudinal direction of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively, and both sealing portions 212 and 222 form a sealing base portion 310. .. That is, both sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at substantially the same position on one end edge in the longitudinal direction of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, so that both sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided when both case pieces are closed. It becomes a matching state and forms a sealing base part (opening prohibition seal adhesive part).

In the present embodiment, the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion (seal adhesive portion) A is composed of both sealing portions 212 and 222, and the cutting member 230 is supported in a state of being sandwiched between both protruding pieces. The cutting member 230 may be supported (temporarily locked) on the outer surface of one of the projecting pieces, or the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion A may be composed of only one projecting piece and may be formed by one surface of the one projecting piece. The cutting member may be supported.
That is, the cutting member 230 may be configured to be held by at least one case piece (protruding piece) at the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion.
The substantially plate-shaped cutting member 230 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the two closed lower case pieces 210 and the sealing portions 212 and 222 (between the edges) of the upper case piece 220.
The tip surface of the seal bonding portion A forbidden to open (the tip surfaces of both sealing portions 212 and 222) constitutes the first bonding surface A1, and the outer surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 orthogonal to the first bonding surface A1 are. The second adhesive surface A2 is configured (FIGS. 99 and 100).
An accommodation space S for accommodating the cutting member 230 is provided inside the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive surface A2 (FIG. 100).

Further, a first opening O1 communicating with the accommodation space S is formed on the first adhesive surface A1, and a second opening O2 (guide slit 224) communicating with the accommodation space S is formed on the second adhesive surface A2. ing. In the present embodiment, the upper case piece 220 is formed with two second openings O2, and the lower case piece 210 is formed with one second opening O2.
The opening prohibition seal 250 covers the first seal adhesive portion 250A which covers all or a part of the first opening O1 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive which covers a part of the second opening O2. It has a second seal adhesive portion 250B to be adhered to the surface A2 (FIG. 104).

The cap 240 is detachably attached to the outer surface of the sealing base portion so as to surround (conceal) the opening prohibition seal 250 with the opening prohibition seal 250 adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base portion 310. The cap 240 is sandwiched between the cap body 241 surrounding the outer surface of both projecting pieces (sealing base portion 310) including the opening prohibition seal 250 and the sealing portions 212 and 222 when attached to the sealing base portion 310. A locking portion 242 (FIG. 85) that elastically engages with the cutting member 230 (locked portion 236) in a closed state is provided, and the cutting member is integrally detached when the cap is detached from the sealing base portion. By doing so, the opening prohibition seal is broken and detached.
A tubular caulking member 203A (third screw stop piece 93) is provided on one side surface of the cap 240 so as to cover both sealing portions 212 and 222 and the opening prohibition seal as shown in FIGS. 82 and 88. When the cap is attached, the center hole of the caulking member 203A is in a state of communicating with the hole of the caulking member 203B ((first screw stop piece 91, second screw piece 92) provided at the corresponding positions of the upper and lower case pieces). In this state, the cap is fixed to the upper and lower case pieces by inserting the caulking pin 94 (FIG. 85) and caulking.
In the illustrated embodiment, an example is shown in which the cap 240 surrounds the entire sealing portion 212 and 222 including the opening prohibition seal, but the cap is sealed so as to surround at least a part of the opening prohibition seal. It may be configured to be mounted on at least a part of the base portion (opening prohibition seal adhesive portion = cap mounting portion) 310.

The cutting member 230 intersects the blade portion (first broken piece) 231 provided at the tip edge in the direction (b) (b) (FIG. 86) in which the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion 310 and the direction (b) in which the cap 240 is detached. It includes a fragment (second fragment) 233 that protrudes in the (orthogonal) direction. One piece of the fragment 233 is provided on the surface of the lower case piece on the sealing portion 212 side, and two pieces are provided on the surface of the upper case piece on the side of the protruding piece 222.
One second opening O2 (guide slit 224) for receiving one broken piece 233 is formed in the sealing portion 212 of the lower case piece, and two broken pieces 233 are formed in the protruding piece 222 on the upper case side. Two second openings O2 (guide slits 224) are formed to receive each of the above.
By making the cutting member 230 a separate member from each case piece, the shape of the cutting means such as the blade portion 231 can be formed and processed independently and arbitrarily, and the opening prohibition seal is remarkably broken. It will be possible.

(Procedure for assembling each member and procedure for breaking the seal that prohibits opening)
Next, the procedure for assembling the cutting member 230, the opening prohibition seal 250, and the cap 240 to the sealing base portion 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 101, focusing on the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece.
In the present embodiment, the cutting member 230 is configured to be temporarily locked to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece. A pair of locking portions (temporary locking portions) 223 are provided on the inner surface surface (cutting member support portion) of the projecting piece 222, and these locking portions 223 are mounted in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 101 (a). It is configured to engage with and hold the inner edge portion of the two recesses (temporary locking portions) 232 provided on the rear end edge of the cutting member 230. Further, a broken piece 233 is projected on the surface side of the cutting member, and a guide slit 224 that allows the breaking piece 233 to pass through when the cutting member is attached to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 from the arrow direction protrudes. It is formed on a piece 222. Therefore, when the cutting member 230 is moved in the direction of the arrow to be seated on the inner surface of the projecting piece 222 as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the surface of the cutting member is slid along the inner surface of the projecting piece 222. It can be attached while letting it. At this time, since the broken piece 233 moves while being fitted in the guide slit 224, it does not hinder the mounting.

By providing the broken pieces 233 on both sides of the cutting member 230 and providing guide slits 224 in both sealing portions 212 and 222 as in the present embodiment, the cutting member is separated from the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion A together with the cap. At this time, the opening prohibition seal adhered to the outer surfaces of both sealing portions 212 and 222 can be broken at the same time.
Although the present embodiment shows a configuration example in which the cutting member support portion is provided on the protruding piece 222 on one side of the upper case, it is also possible to provide the cutting portion support portion on the inner side surface of the sealing portion 212 on one side of the lower case. be.

Further, the cutting member 230 is provided with claw-shaped locked portions 236 that can be elastically deformed at both end edges in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the mounting direction). The locked portion 236 is exposed to the outside from the gap between the two protruding pieces when the cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the two sealing portions 212 and 222 (see FIGS. 99 (b) and 99 (c)). It is in. Therefore, when the cap is attached to the sealing base portion, the cap and the cutting member can be engaged with each other. Since the tip edge of the cutting member is also exposed from the gap between the two protruding pieces, smooth separation and breakage of the opening prohibition seal are possible when the cutting member is separated from the sealing base portion together with the cap.
After attaching the cutting member 230 to the protruding piece 222 in this way, the lower case piece 210 is attached to the upper case piece 220, and the opening prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222. do.

Next, FIG. 99 (b) shows the state in which the opening prohibition seal is adhered to the sealing base portion in the state where the lower case piece 210 is omitted, and FIGS. 99 (c) and 102 show the state in which the cap 240 is attached. Shows.
The cap 240 has a protruding locking portion 242 that can be engaged with the locked portion 236 of the cutting member 230 inside the cap main body 241, and the cap is used as a sealing base portion as shown in FIG. 99 (c). When mounted, each locking portion 242 elastically engages with the tip portion of each locked portion 236 to be temporarily integrated.
In this state, when the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion as shown in FIGS. 99 (d) and 103, the cutting member 230 integrated with the cap is also integrally detached, so that the cutting members are both sealed. It is extracted from the gap between the stoppers 212 and 222. At this time, the blade portion 231 of the cutting member and the broken fragment 233 break the opening prohibition seal. That is, the blade portion 231 is configured to be detachable to the outside (outside) from the gap (first opening O1) between the two sealing portions 212 and 222, while the broken piece 233 is provided on the protruding piece 222. Since the guide slit 224 is configured to be detachable from the inside to the outside (outside), it is possible to break each part of the opening prohibition seal located in the moving path of the blade portion 231 and the broken fragment 233.
Each broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protrudes from a part of each second opening O2 that is not covered by the opening prohibition seal.

In the configuration example of the open prohibition seal shown in FIG. 104, the identification region 251 composed of random micro characters is a broken piece (second broken piece) provided in the cutting member 230 in a state where the open prohibition seal 250 is adhered to both projecting pieces. It is in the movement path of 233. Therefore, the identification region 251 is broken (broken) by the fragment 233 when the cutting member is separated together with the cap.
When the identification area 251 is provided at a position corresponding to the blade portion 231 at the tip edge of the cutting member, the identification portion is broken by the blade portion 231 (FIG. 103).
In the present embodiment, the outer surface of the sealing base portion is adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base portion 310 of the main board case so as to straddle the sealing portions 212 and 222 of both case pieces. The cap 240 is attached so as to cover the cap 240, and at this time, the cutting member 230 held between the two sealing portions 212 and 222 and the cap 240 are engaged and integrated. Therefore, the operation of breaking the opening prohibition seal 250 by the cutting member 230 is performed at the stage before opening the main substrate case, that is, in the process of separating the cap 240 from the sealing base portion.

Since the cutting member 230 has a jagged blade portion 231 at its tip (tip in the detaching direction), the opening prohibition seal is displayed when the cutting member 230 protrudes outward from the abutting position of both sealing portions 212 and 222. The first seal adhesive portion 250A of the above is configured to break. Therefore, it is possible to know that the main board case has been illegally opened.
Further, the cutting member 230 includes a broken piece 233 that protrudes in a direction intersecting the direction in which the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion 310 (one side of the upper case), and is broken when the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222. The fragment 233 is in a state of projecting onto the surface of the projecting piece 222 from the guide slit 224 provided in the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece 220. If the opening prohibition seal is adhered to the surface of the projecting piece 222 in this state, the broken piece 233 is in constant contact with the opening prohibition seal 250 and is in a state of interfering with the opening prohibition seal 250. Therefore, when the cutting member moves in the detaching direction by detaching the cap 240 from the sealing base portion, the broken piece may move along the guide slit 224 and the opening prohibition seal may be broken linearly. can. Since the opening prohibition seal portion (second seal adhesive portion 250B) broken by the broken fragment 233 corresponds to the surface of the protruding piece 222, it can be directly viewed from the back side of the gaming machine, and fraudulent activity can be performed. Evidence of the work can be easily found from this fracture.
When the main board case is rotated with respect to the pedestal and opened as shown in FIG. 83, the opposite side of the cap 240 can be visually recognized.

In the present embodiment, assuming that the opening prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222, the cutting member 230 is provided with a blade portion 231 for irreparably cutting the identification region 251. Each of the broken pieces 233 is provided to surely leave a trace of breakage on the appearance, but this is only an example, and only the blade portion 231 at the tip or only the broken piece 233 on the other surface may be provided. In particular, when the opening prohibition seal 250 is not adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222 and is adhered only to the outer surface of one protruding piece, for example, the protruding piece 222 on the upper case side, the cutting member 230 is broken. It suffices to provide fragment 233. That is, according to the present invention, it is possible to deal with both the case where the opening prohibition seal is adhered over both protruding pieces and the case where it is adhered only to one protruding piece.

In the example shown in FIG. 103, when the main board case 200 is opened, the open prohibition seal (opening prohibition seal) 250 is broken with the QR code (registered trademark) 253 unreadable.
However, it is desirable to configure the blade portion 231 so that the opening prohibition seal 250 is broken while the QR code (registered trademark) 253 can be read.

(Disbursement control board protection case)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board protection case in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a component layout of the payout control group according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 105, the payout control board 60 includes a one-chip microcomputer (IC chip) 601 that integrates (integrates) a payout CPU 60a, a payout ROM 60b, and a payout RAM 60c, and other electronic components 605 such as capacitors and ICs. It is equipped with an error display 610 for displaying error information.
The error display 610 may be composed of one 7-segment liquid crystal display or 7-segment LED. The 7-segment liquid crystal display is a liquid crystal display device composed of seven segments that can be individually turned on / off in order to express one character of a number.
The 7-segment LED is an LED display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on / off in order to express one character of a number.
The error display 610 may further include a segment for displaying dots in addition to the seven segments for displaying numbers, similar to the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 below.
Not only the error display 610 but also the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 described below can use a 7-segment liquid crystal display or a 7-segment LED having a segment for displaying dots.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the printed wiring board 701 of the payout control board 60, as in the main control board 50, various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component side of the printed wiring board as a mounting method for mounting the electronic components. The single-sided mounting method for mounting is adopted.

106 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a payout control board protective case, where FIG. 106A is a perspective view, FIG. 106B is a side view, and FIG. 106C is a front view.
107 and 108 are exploded perspective views of the payout control board case.
The payout control board protective case (hereinafter, payout board case 400) is composed of an upper case piece 410 and a lower case piece 420.
Similar to the case of the main board case 200, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are provided with control board storage units 411 and 421 for storing the payout control board 60, respectively.
Further, the control board accommodating portions 411 and 421 each have a plate portion formed in a substantially rectangular shape and a flange portion that protrudes from the peripheral edge portion of these plate portions and surrounds one surface of each plate portion. It is formed in a shape that it has.

Of the flanges constituting the control board storage portion 411 of the upper case piece 410, the portion protruding along the two long sides of the upper case piece 410 is a hook piece 412 formed in an L shape. Are formed 5 each.
On the other hand, of the flange portions constituting the control board storage portion 421 of the lower case piece 420, the portion protruding along the two long sides of the lower case piece is formed in a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 422 into which the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Further, a hook piece 423 is formed in each insertion groove portion 422.

When the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are combined, the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 is inserted into the insertion groove portion 422 of the lower case piece 420.
Then, the upper case piece 410 is slid in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 107 along the left-right direction with respect to the lower case piece 420. Then, since the hooking piece 412 engages with the hooking piece 423, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.
When combined in this way, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 form a box-shaped inclusion portion shielded from the outside by the control board storage portions 411 and 421, and the delivery control board 60 is formed in the inclusion portion. Is stored. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the payout control board 60, the integrated payout ROM 601 and the like are illegally replaced.
Further, a protective cover is arranged below the upper case piece 410 to cover the connection portion between the internal connector and the external connector provided on the internal payout control board 60.

In the present embodiment, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case 410 are fixed by a caulking member with the payout control board 60 sandwiched between them.
A caulking fastening portion 450 using a caulking member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the payout board case 400, and the caulking member is driven into the caulking fastening portion 450 to form the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410. Locked in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven into the fastening hole 451, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 can be opened / closed and detached.
In the payout substrate case 400 of the present embodiment, two caulking fastening portions are provided (caulking fastening portions 450A and 450B).

The upper fastening piece 455 is provided at an appropriate position along the edge of the upper case piece 410, and the upper fastening piece 455 is provided with a through fastening hole 456.
A lower fastening piece 455 is provided so as to project from a portion corresponding to the upper fastening piece 455 on the inner surface of the lower case piece 420. A fastening hole 457 is formed in the lower fastening piece 455.
When the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are engaged with each other by using the hook piece 412, 423 and the insertion groove portion 422, the through fastening hole 456 of the upper fastening piece 455 and the fastening hole 457 of the lower fastening piece are formed. Communicate. By driving the caulking member into the communicating fastening hole (caulking fastening hole), the engagement between the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 cannot be released.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the payout control board 60 housed inside the payout board case.
It should be noted that only one caulking fastening portion is used for fastening the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 at one time. After removing the caulking member and adding / removing the fastening (after opening the payout board case 400), when the fastening is performed again, the caulking member is driven into the other remaining caulking fastening hole to fasten. That is, the payout board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
A position display portion similar to that of the main board case 200 is provided on the lower left side and the lower center on the front surface of the upper case piece 410.
Then, a seal portion (error display sticker) 1565 indicating the content of the error display is attached to the position display portion on the lower left side, and the person who opened the payout board case and the opening date and time are entered in the position display portion in the lower center. A seal portion (opener display seal) 1566 for the purpose is attached.

As shown in FIG. 107, the position display portion and the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are formed and attached to the outer surface side of the upper case piece 410, but these are formed and attached to the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410. May be good. This is the same as the sealing portions 542, 1560, and 1561 of the main board case 200.
The position display unit may also be provided on the outer surface side or the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410, as described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 for the main board case 200.

In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541 which is a sticking position mark indicating the position to stick a seal part may take the following form.
That is, the position display unit 541 has a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as or on the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached, and an upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached. It is a mark on the L-shaped side on the same side or the back side as.
The position display unit 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display unit 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion or concave portion provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion.
The position display portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex portion nor a concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566.

In FIGS. 106 to 108, the position display unit 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion provided on the same surface as the seal (front side of the upper case piece), but is not limited to any of the above. It can take an aspect.
The seal portion 1565 is attached in the vicinity of the error display 610 included in the payout control board 60 housed in the payout board case 400, and shows the content of the error display displayed on the error display 610.
The error display 610 displays the error number shown on the seal unit 1565.
When a plurality of errors have occurred, only the most serious error among the errors that have occurred is displayed on the error display 610. Alternatively, all of the plurality of errors that have occurred are sequentially displayed on the error display 610.
Further, an error may be notified by arranging a plurality of LEDs corresponding to the error numbers as the error display 610 and causing the LEDs corresponding to the generated errors to emit light.
Here, for example, the corresponding LEDs are vertically arranged next to the plurality of error numbers displayed on the seal unit 1565.
For example, when the "payout quantity abnormality error" corresponding to the error number 0 occurs, the LED arranged next to the error number "0" in the seal unit 1565 is turned on, and the "main control not yet" corresponding to the error number 1 is turned on. When a "connection error" occurs, the LED arranged next to the error number "1" in the seal portion 1565 is turned on.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material, for example, an error display number in white and the content of the error indicated by the number are printed in a frame printed in white color.
Except for the display of the frame, number, and error content, the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the payout control board 60 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
That is, the error indicator 610 can visually recognize the transparent material of the seal portion 1566. Alternatively, the seal portion 1566 is attached to the payout board case 400 which does not overlap with the error indicator 610 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the error indicator 610 is always visible.
The seal portion 1565 attaches the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60 to a position recognizable through the transparent material from all angles.

As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the seal unit 1565 (error display explanation seal) describes, for example, the following contents corresponding to the errors detected by the main control board and various sensors.
That is,
0 Payout quantity error 1 Main control unconnected error 2 Payout switch error detection error 1
3 Payout switch abnormality detection error 2
4 Payout case error 5 Main control case error 6 Full tank error 7 Ball out error 8 Game ball rental device unconnected cellar 9 Game ball rental device communication error.

In addition, "dish full tank error", "counter case error", "count switch error", "payout excess error", "game ball lending device unconnected error", "game ball lending device communication error", "door open" One of the following errors: "Error", "Abnormal winning error 1", "Abnormal winning error 2", "Ejection error", "Magnet detection error", "Prize frequency error error", "Abnormal door opening error" The display may be performed by the error display 610, and the content of the corresponding error display may be displayed on the seal unit 1565 (error display explanation sticker).
The "dish full tank error" is an error that occurs when the saucer is full due to the payout of the prize ball or when the saucer is full due to the ball lending.
The "counter case error" is an error that occurs when the ball is clogged between the tank and the payout mechanism.
"Counting switch error" is an error that occurs when the wiring that connects the payout control board and the payout device relay terminal board or the wiring that connects the payout device relay terminal board and the parts in the payout mechanism is not connected correctly. ..

"Excess payout error", an error that occurs when more than the requested number of payouts are made.
The “payout command error” is an error that occurs when the signal sent from the main control board to the payout control board is not normal.
The "error in which the lending device for gaming balls, etc. is not connected" is an error that occurs because the lending device for gaming balls, etc. is not connected to the gaming machine.
The "game ball lending device communication error" is an error that occurs when the payout control board detects that the signal from the game ball lending device is invalid.
The "door opening error" is an error that occurs because the upper decoration is opened.
The "switch not connected error" is an error that occurs when a disconnection of a switch on a game board such as a gate and a winning opening and a connection failure are detected.

"Abnormal winning error 1" detects five or more prizes to the right start port between the end of operation of the normal electric accessory and the start of the next operation, or after the power is turned on until the start of operation of the ordinary electric accessory. Since one or more prizes were detected in the meantime, a prize was detected in the upper right large prize opening when the upper right special electric accessory was not activated, so a prize was awarded to the lower right large prize opening when the lower right special electric accessory was not activated. This is an error that occurs when it is detected.
The "abnormal winning error 2" is an error that occurs because the game ball is detected in the switch in each winning opening for a remarkably long time.
The "discharge error" is an error that occurs when the error between the number of game balls that have passed through the switch in each winning opening and the number of game balls that have passed through the out switch exceeds 49.
The "magnet detection error" is an error that occurs when a magnetic force is detected near the left windmill, near the upper left winning opening, near the left middle winning opening, near the lower left winning opening, near the middle starting opening, or at the lower right of the game board surface.
"Abnormal winning frequency error" is when an abnormal number of winnings is detected in any of the middle start opening, the lower left winning opening, the left middle winning opening, the upper left winning opening, or the right winning opening when a certain number of shot balls is reached. This is an error that occurs.
The "abnormal door opening error" is an error that occurs when the inner frame is opened when the upper decoration is closed.

As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the seal portion 1566 (opener display seal / payout board management seal) has an entry area 1567 for entering the opener who opened the payout board case 400 and the opening date. Be prepared.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material and is not processed such as a watermark. For example, three entry areas 1567 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "Payout control board".
The entry area 1567 is a white base formed on the transparent material and writable by a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1567, and circled numbers indicating the entry area numbers are printed on the left side of each entry area.
The transparent material is exposed except for each print and entry area 1567 (white background), and the electronic components on the payout control board 60 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 attaches the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60 to a position visible via the transparent material from all angles.
The seal portion 1566 is provided so that the three entry areas 1567 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated payout ROM 601 from all angles.

In the seal portion 1566 shown in FIG. 106 (c), the entry area 1567 is integrated with columns for entering the "opener" and "opening date". On the other hand, as in the case of the seal portion 1560 of the main board case 200 shown in FIGS. 93 and 97, the fields for entering the opening date and the opening date are separated, and a viewing portion made of a transparent material is provided between them. You may do it. By doing so, it becomes easier to confirm the electronic components on the payout control board 60 through the seal portion 1566.

As described above, like the main board case 200, the payout board case 400 of the present embodiment has a caulked portion.
The payout board case 400 has two caulking portions. On the other hand, there are three entry areas 1567 provided in the seal portion 1566.
In the payout substrate case 400, the number of caulked portions does not match the number of writable times (the number of entry areas 1567) of the opened person or the like in the seal portion 1566.
The number of caulked portions included in the payout substrate case 400 is less than or equal to the number of openers and opening date entry fields provided on the payout substrate management seal (seal portion 1566).
By providing more entry fields than can actually be opened, it is possible to deal with errors and other errors, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than when the number of caulked parts and the number of entry fields are the same. Is.

In particular, the upper case piece 410 of the payout substrate case 400 does not have a ventilation hole.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the payout ROM 60b (payout chip) 601.
As described above, the seal unit 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".
The seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 may have the same color as the seal portion 1562 having the same contents attached to the main ROM of the main control board 50, or may have a different color.

The number of times that information such as the opened person can be written in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 differs between the payout board case 400 and the main board case 200. Alternatively, the size of the writable area in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 is different.
In the description of FIG. 106, the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 are different seal portions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 may be integrated.
That is, one seal including the contents described in the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 may be attached.

(Production control board protection case)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board protection case in this embodiment will be described.
First, the substrate structure of the image control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the image control board, FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a component surface (surface) of the image control board, and FIG. 109 (b) is an image control. It is a figure which showed the structure of the solder surface (back surface) of a substrate.
110 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for an image control board, FIG. 110A is a diagram showing a configuration of a component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG. 110B is a diagram showing the configuration of a component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board. , It is a figure which showed the structure of the solder side (back side) of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, a large number of electronic components including VDP are mounted on the image control board 70.
In the image control board 70, a printed wiring board 801 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board is used.
In the present embodiment, the image control board 70 has been described by giving an example of using the printed wiring board 801. However, this is only an example, and in the image control board 70, wiring is performed on both sides and the inner layer surface of the printed circuit board. A multilayer printed wiring board on which a pattern is formed may be used.
As a mounting method for mounting electronic components on the printed wiring board 801, various surface mount type electronic components are mounted on the connection electrodes (lands) 802 formed on both sides (component surface 801a and solder surface 801b) of the printed wiring board 801. A surface mount method for mounting a connector or the like is adopted. That is, the image control board 70 is configured by using a surface mount type printed wiring board 801.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is composed of a printed wiring board 701 provided with a through hole into which a lead of an insertion mounting type electronic component (hereinafter referred to as “insert mounting component”) can be inserted into the main control board 50. The board other than the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 801 having a connection electrode connectable to a connection terminal of a surface mount type electronic component (hereinafter referred to as “surface mount component”).

FIG. 111 is an enlarged view showing a part of the printed wiring board used for the image control board.
As shown in FIG. 111, the printed wiring board 801 is configured with land groups 811 and 812 by lands 802 connected to connection terminals of one surface mount component, respectively. For example, if the surface mount component is the IC 850 shown in FIG. 109 (a), the printed wiring board 801 is configured with a land group 811 for the IC 850 by a plurality of lands 802 connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the IC 850. Ru. In this specification, a plurality of lands 802 connected to a plurality of lead terminals of one surface mount component are referred to as a land group.
Similarly, if the surface mount component is the connector 851 shown in FIG. 109 (a), the printed wiring board 801 has a land for the connector 851 by a plurality of lands 802 connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the connector 851. Group 812 is composed.
The plurality of lands 802 constituting these land groups 811 and 812 are composed of a first land 802a and a second land 802b having a shape different from that of the first land 802a.
Specifically, among the plurality of lands 802 constituting the land groups 811 and 812, the shapes of the lands 802b at the four corners are made larger than the other lands 802a (for example, about 1.5 times).

FIG. 112 is a front view illustrating the configuration of the effect control board protective case.
113 and 114 are exploded perspective views of the effect control board case.
As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, a large number of electronic components including a host CPU, VDP, and an image ROM are mounted on the image control board 70 in the effect control board case (effect board case) 700.
As described above, in the printed wiring board of the image control board 70, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a double-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted on both the component surface and the solder surface of the printed wiring board is adopted. To.

The effect board case 700 includes a lower case piece 710 and an upper case piece 720.
The effect control board and the image control board 70 are housed in the inclusion part composed of the control board storage part 711 included in the lower case piece 710 and the control board storage part 721 included in the upper case piece 720.
The effect board case 700, particularly the upper case piece 720, is provided with a ventilation hole 725 unlike the main board case 200 and the payout board case 400 described above.
Further, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, the main board case 200, the opener attached to the payout board case 400, and the seal portions 1560 and 1566 for entering the opening date are attached. Not.
Therefore, the effect board case 700 is not provided with a caulking portion for sealing the effect board case 700 as provided in the main board case 200 and the payout board case 400.

On the other hand, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, an opaque seal portion 1580 describing the explanation related to the volume setting is attached in the vicinity of the volume changeover switch 36.
Correspondingly, a position display unit 541 is provided on the rear surface of the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700.
As described above, the image control board 70 is a double-sided mounting board, and the electronic components mounted on the front side (game board side) cannot be directly visually inspected.
Further, unlike the main control board 50 and the payout control board 60, the image control board 70 has a property of simply having a function of outputting an effect image and an effect sound, and there is a risk that a ROM chip or the like may be illegally replaced. Is low.
Therefore, since it is less necessary to visually recognize the substrate surface through the seal, the opaque seal portion 1580 can be attached to the effect substrate case 700.
Further, for the same reason, the caulking portion (sealing portion) for sealing the effect substrate case 700 is not provided.
As a result, the seal portion 1566 provided with the opening person who opened the effect board case 700 and the entry area 1567 for entering the opening date is not attached either.

The position display unit 541 may be provided on the front side of the upper case piece 720.
In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541 which is a sticking position mark indicating the position to stick the seal part 1580 can take the following form.
That is, the position display unit 541 is a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface as or on the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portion 1580 is attached, and on the same surface or back surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 1580 is attached. It is a mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display unit 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580.
The position display unit 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal unit 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal unit 1580.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580.

The position display unit 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface as the seal portion 1580.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portion 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion or concave portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion.
The position display portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex portion nor a concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 1580.

The seal portion 1561 provided on the 220 surface of the upper case piece of the main board case 200, the seal portion 1560 as the main board control number seal, and the QR code (registered trademark) of the open prohibition seal 250 extend the main control board 50. The distance from the virtual surface that was made is different. The distance of the QR code (registered trademark) of the opening prohibition seal 250 from the virtual surface (main control board 50) is shorter (closer).
This is because, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the QR code (registered trademark) 253 of the opening prohibition seal 250 is located at a position lower than the upper surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

The board case of the gaming machine including the main board case 200, the payout board case 400, and the effect board case 700 has a case seal, a ROM seal, a lead resistance color code, a network resistance identification code, and an IC as information display. There are model number code, capacitor model number code, performance display monitor, setting display monitor display information, etc.
These pieces of information have different distances from each control board housed in the board case (main board case 200, payout board case 400, effect board case 700). Also, the distance from the top surface of the board case is different. As described above, the top surface of the substrate case is the place where the seal portion is attached, and is the highest point in the board case.
The seal part of the board case is affixed to the highest point of the board case, the ROM seal is affixed to the ROM mounted on the board inside the case, and the display information of the performance display monitor and setting display monitor is affixed on the board. It is displayed on the performance display monitor and setting display monitor provided in. It is natural that the height of this information differs with respect to the control board.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM feet of the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70) housed in the board case can be seen so that the ROM feet are not hidden by the seal. , Attach the seal part to the top surface of the board case. The ROM foot is not hidden by the seal even if it is a part when the board case is viewed from above.
In the present embodiment, the electronic component including the ROM may be hidden when viewed from above, but can be seen from the viewing portion when the angle is changed.
A transparent connector is installed as a connection part of the ROM to the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70) so that it can be seen at a glance that the ROM foot is not fraudulent.
The identification information provided on the case piece of the board case has a display in which the distance to the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70) is different. For example, the identification information displayed on the upper case piece, the lower case piece, and the cap (in the case of the main board case) has a distance based on the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70). It is different, and the positional relationship is also different before and after. Further, in the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70), the color of the area where the electronic components are installed is different from the color of the area where the manufacturer name is displayed.

(Board structure of main control board)
The configuration (layout) of the main control board housed in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to that described above, such as in FIG. 95.
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining other configurations of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, is a diagram showing a configuration of a component surface (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board is the same as that of FIGS. 95 and 96, but in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the main control board has a performance display monitor (performance display) on its component surface (surface). Unit) 600 and a setting display monitor (setting display unit) 650. Further, the main control board 50 includes a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.

The performance display monitor 600 displays the base value of the gaming machine.
The base value is a numerical value that indicates the performance of the gaming machine, such as how much is paid out in the normal state (low probability time reduction timeless) excluding special states such as big hit, probability variation game state, and time reduction game state. be.
For example, if there are 50 prize balls when the player launches 100 game balls at low accuracy, the base value is "50".
The number of game balls launched by the player is called the number of outs, and in the game machine 1, the number of outs is low for each total number of outs (usually 60,000) in all game states including jackpot, probabilistic game state, and time-saving game state. The base value of the time saving and the timelessness is calculated and displayed on the performance display monitor 600.
The base value of the low probability time saving time is expressed by (the number of payouts in the low probability time saving time / the number of outs in the low probability time saving time).

The performance display monitor 600 will be described. The performance display monitor 600 includes a display and a circuit unit on the main control board 50. A display unit in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized may be mounted on the main control board 50.
The display displays four-digit numbers side by side. Dot points are provided below the numbers. Of the four-digit numbers, the left two digits are the identification segment and the right two digits are the ratio segment.

FIG. 115B is a diagram illustrating the display of the performance display monitor, and is a diagram for explaining the display of the performance display monitor 600.
Displays the following four types of information in sequence and repeatedly.
As shown in (b-1) to (b-4), the values of "bL.", "B1.", "B2.", And "b3." Are sequentially switched and displayed in the identification segment, and the ratio is displayed. The corresponding base value is displayed in the segment.
The display switching time of "bL.", "B1.", "B2.", And "b3." Is about 5.0 seconds.
For example, "bL.xx" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b1.yy" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b2.zz" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, and "b3.ww" is displayed for 5.0 seconds. It is displayed for a second, and "bL.xx" is displayed again for 5.0 seconds.
“BL.” Shown in (b-1) indicates a low-probability time-saving timeless base value for every 60,000 total outs, which is a real-time value during measurement.
“B1.” Shown in (b-2) indicates a base value with low probability, short time, and no time in the total number of outs of 60,000 one time before.
“B2.” Shown in (b-3) indicates a base value with low probability, short time, and no time in the total number of outs of 60,000 two times before.
“B3.” Shown in (b-4) indicates a base value with low probability, short time, and no time in the total number of outs of 60,000 three times before.

Here, the performance display processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
The main CPU 50a starts measuring the number of outs (total number of outs) in all gaming states from the first power-on (RWM all clear).
In (b-1), the main CPU 50a blinks "bL." In the identification seg and displays "---" in the ratio seg until the total number of outs reaches an arbitrary number of less than 300. In (b-2), "b1." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg. In (b-3), "b2." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg. In (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.

After that, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of payouts at low probability time / short time (low probability payout number), and the number of outs at low probability time / short time (low probability out number), and starts the first measurement. ..
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5,999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6,000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
In (b-2), "b1." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
In (b-3), "b2." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
In (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
Then, the main CPU 50a stores the final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the first measurement as AA.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of low probability payouts, and the number of low probability outs, and starts the second measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
Further, in (b-2), "b1." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-3), "b2." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the first measurement is saved as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the second measurement is saved as BB.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of low probability payouts, and the number of low probability outs, and starts the third measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
Further, in (b-2), "b1." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved BB is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-3), "b2." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the first measurement is saved as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the second measurement is saved as BB.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the third measurement is saved as CC.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of low probability payouts, and the number of low probability outs, and starts the fourth measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the fourth time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
Further, in (b-2), "b1." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved CC is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-3), "b2." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved BB is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio seg.
When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 next time, the main CPU 50a repeats the fifth and subsequent measurements in the same manner as described above.

The board case 200 of the present embodiment may be used to accommodate the main control board of the spinning machine (pachislot machine), in which case the gaming information display included in the main control board is the spinning machine (pachislot machine). Display information such as the role ratio of pachislot machines).
The performance display monitor 600 described above is a kind of game information display indicating game information of a game machine, and the game information of the game machine is not only the information of the base value of the pachinko game machine but also the role ratio of the pachislot machine. Also includes information such as.
A game information display that displays information such as the role ratio of a pachislot machine is called a role ratio monitor.
The role ratio monitor is
(1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio (2) Consolidation ratio for each 6,000 games (3) Condominium ratio for each 6,000 games (4) Cumulative concordance ratio (5) Cumulative combination ratio is displayed.
Here, the advantageous section ratio is the ratio of the number of advantageous section games to the total number of games. Further, the advantageous section is a section in which instructions such as push order navigation can be given.
The winning combination ratio and the continuous winning combination ratio are the ratio of the number of payouts of bonuses (so-called bonuses) to the total number of payouts.
The winning combination ratio is calculated for all the winning combinations, and the continuous winning combination ratio is calculated for the operating of the continuous winning combination actuation device.
The game information display showing the game information of the game machine may also include such a role ratio monitor, but in the present embodiment, in particular, the monitor for displaying the base value of the pachinko game machine is described in detail, and the role is used. The detailed explanation of the ratio monitor is omitted.

Next, the setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 displays the setting value of the gaming machine 1.
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can change the probability of winning a big hit by changing the setting.
The setting display monitor 650 is mounted in the main control board case 200, includes a single-digit display as shown in FIG. 115 (c), and has one of a plurality of preset setting values. Can be displayed.
These set values may be displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 may not be provided.

The setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 is installed for the purpose of showing the player that the setting changing device is installed in an easy-to-understand manner, showing the game store staff the operation method and the like in an easy-to-understand manner, and preventing fraud related to the setting.
Numerical or non-numeric symbols can be used to display the settings. When a numerical value is used, any one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", and "4" corresponding to the set value is used for displaying the setting. When the set value is from "1" to "6", one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" according to the set value is selected. use.

For the setting operation, for example, the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670 described above are used.
The setting key switch 660 is a switch that triggers a transition to the "setting change state" and the "setting confirmation state". Operate using a key.
The setting key switch 660 can take two states of OFF / ON and can maintain each state. Also, the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state.
The setting key switch 660 is mounted in the main control board case 200.
The setting switch 670 is a switch for switching the setting when the setting is changed, and is mounted at an arbitrary position that the player cannot operate.
The setting switch 670 can also be used as an RWM clear switch 680 or the like.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RWM clear switch 680 turned on, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the "setting change state" for changing the setting.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RWM clear switch 680 turned off, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the "setting confirmation state" for confirming the setting.

The setting change process by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off. (2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operation of a setting person such as a game store staff. The setting display monitor 650 is still off. (3) When the RWM clear switch 680 is turned on by the operation of the setter and the power of the gaming machine is turned on in that state, the main CPU 50a shifts the gaming machine 1 to the “setting change state”. The main CPU 50a causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state. (4) In this state, when the setting switch 670 (or RWM clear switch 680) is pressed, the main CPU 50a sequentially changes the set value, and the changed (setting) set value is set to the setting display monitor 650. Display. (5) When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50a confirms the set value and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the above-mentioned performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50a displays the setting value in the "setting change state" with respect to any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600. conduct.
Then, when the setting value is determined by turning off the setting key switch 660 by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50a starts the performance display described above on the performance display monitor 600.

The setting confirmation process by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is in the power off state, the setting display monitor 650 is in the off state.
(2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operation of the setter. The setting display monitor 650 is still off.
(3) In this state, if the power of the gaming machine is turned on without turning on the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50a shifts the gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation state. The main CPU 50a causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50a ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the above-mentioned performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50a uses any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600 to display the set value in the "setting confirmation state". conduct.
Then, when the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning off the setting key switch 660 by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50a starts the performance display described above on the performance display monitor 600.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control board 50 includes connectors 771 to 776 on the component surface.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right at the lower end of the main control board 50.
Although not shown in FIG. 116 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 have six openings provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200, similar to those shown in FIG. 93. It is arranged inside the portion 779.
The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the component side of the main control board 50 are both provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50.
That is, the connectors 771 to 776, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at contradictory positions on the main control board 50.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not interfere with the visibility by the inspector who confirms the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650.
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at the upper end sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging from the connectors are provided in the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display. It does not interfere with the field of view of the inspector who tries to visually recognize the monitor 650.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 of FIG. 115 is the same as that of FIG. 95 (b).
Further, in the main control board 50 of FIG. 115, a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board is used as in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701 is adopted. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 96A and 96B, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board described with reference to FIG. 115 is housed, FIG. 116 (a) shows a perspective view of the assembly, and FIG. The figure is shown. Further, FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 115.
In the description of FIGS. 116 and 117, the members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 116 and 117.
Further, similarly to FIGS. 94, 97 to 98, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower portion on the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided in the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.
Both the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, as an example, it is assumed to be transparent (made of a transparent material).
The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83), respectively. In FIG. 116, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

The seal portion 1560 will be described.
The seal portion 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing counterfeiting. That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal in which the seal portion main body 1560A is watermarked.
The "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types such as those using a hologram and those that look different depending on the physical shape can be applied. ..
However, the seal member main body 1560A is transparent even though it has been subjected to predetermined processing (watermark processing), and at least has high translucency, and a certain degree of visibility is ensured.

The seal unit 1560 has a white background entry area (entry field) 1570, a code unit 1572, and an information display unit 1573 in a black frame with a heading such as "main board control number" on the seal unit main body 1560A. I have.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display described later attached to these areas are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is not exposed. It is a department.
The seal portion 1560 includes a plurality of non-transmissive portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 50 in the main board case 200 through these non-transmissive portions.
The code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the entry area 1570 as the non-transmissive unit are provided at positions on the seal unit main body 1560A that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650.

On the other hand, in the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the areas other than the character display described later, which are attached to these areas, the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is exposed and translucent. Is a high translucent portion 1574.
The translucent portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion that can be confirmed by looking through the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200 through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200, the main control board 50 can be visually recognized via the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the main control board 50 via the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not the fraud is performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached to the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 at a position visible from all angles. ing.
Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the entire seal portion 1560 including the entry area 1570, the cord portion 1572, and the information display unit 1573 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles. It is provided so that it is in a position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 is always visible through the main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent part and the non-transparent part, the seal part 1560 includes the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, and the information display part 1573, and the entire seal part 1560 is the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor from all angles. It is provided so as not to overlap with 650.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200.

In FIG. 116, it cannot be said that the seal unit 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, but the seal unit 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 Is sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, and if all the conditions that the seal portion 1561 does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 are satisfied, the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other. There may be. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located at the position shown by the broken line in the upper part of the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 116 (b).
In this case, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance at the same time.

The display contents of the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200 and the date of opening.
The entry area 1570 is a white base formed on the transparent material and writable by a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry area 1570 is provided with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the entry area numbers are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, "Opener" is printed in black above the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Opening date" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the lower left.
For example, when the main board case 200 is opened, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side and the date when the main board case 200 is opened in the entry area 1570 on the right side. .. The inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was fraudulent.

The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. The code unit 1572 contains predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed at the end of the information mobile phone includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Information such as is included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and the information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 50 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The information display unit 1573 contains various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the main control board 50. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The translucent portion (peeping portion) 1574 included in the seal portion 1560 will be described.
The translucent part 1574 is an entry area 1570, a code part 1572, an information display part 1573, a notation of "main board control number", a frame, an opener, a notation of the opening date, and circles 1 to 1 in the seal part main body 1560A. It is an area other than the notation of 3.
The translucent portion 1574 is, for example, a region extending in the left-right direction existing between the entry areas 1570 having three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also a region extending in the left-right direction existing between the code portion 1572 and the information display unit 1573 arranged side by side and the two upper entry areas 1570.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the vertical direction between the entry areas 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62 (a)) via the translucent portion 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The seal portion 1561 will be described.
The seal portion 1561 attaches the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 to a position visible from all angles.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 is always visible through the main board case 200.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as to be positioned so as not to overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200.
Since the description and the like of the seal portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 44, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. Since the seal portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 93 and 97, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 is provided with a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.
The RWM clear switch 680 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688, and the recess 688 is provided with an opening 687.
Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 116 (b) and 117, the operation member 685 is provided at the corresponding position of the RWM clear switch 680, and when the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the pressed operation member 685 causes the operation member 685 to be pressed. The RWM clear switch 680 is pressed. As a result, the RWM clear switch 680 is operated.
A cover member 686 is provided in the recess 688. The cover member 686 is rotatably movable between a first position in the recess 688 that closes the operating member 685 and makes it inoperable, and a second position that opens the operating member 685 and makes it operable. Has been done. By moving the operation member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 680 can be operated.
By doing so, the substrate case 200 need only be provided with an opening 687 having a size capable of inserting the operating member 685. Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the board case 200.
The end of the RWM clear switch 680 may be exposed from the opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using the operating member 685.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end surface of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is exposed from the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200. The staff or the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200.

FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining still another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, is a diagram showing a configuration of a component surface (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board 50 is the same as that of FIG. 115, but in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the main control board 50 is provided with a performance display monitor 600 on its component surface (surface). The setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
The function of the setting display monitor 650 is also used in the performance display monitor 600, and the independent setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
Alternatively, the main control board 50 shown in FIG. 118 is a main control board of a gaming machine that does not have a setting change function.
As shown in FIG. 115, the main control board 50 includes connectors 771 to 776 on the component surface.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right at the lower end of the main control board 50.

Although not shown in FIG. 116 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 have six openings provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200, similar to those shown in FIG. 93. It is arranged inside the portion 779.
The performance display monitor 600, which is provided on the component surface of the main control board 50 and can also be used as the setting display monitor 650, is provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50.
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 and the performance display monitor 600 are provided at opposite positions on the main control board 50.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not interfere with the visibility by the inspector who confirms the performance display monitor 600.
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 is provided at the upper end sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cable or harness hanging from the connector is in the field of view of the inspector who tries to visually recognize the performance display monitor 600. Does not interfere.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 of FIG. 118 is the same as that of FIG. 95 (b).
Further, in the main control board 50 of FIG. 118, a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board is used as in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701 is adopted. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 96A and 96B, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

119 is a diagram showing a main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board described with reference to FIG. 118 is housed, FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the assembly, and FIG. 119 is a front view of the assembly. The figure is shown. Further, FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 119.
In the description of FIGS. 118 and 119, members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 94, 97, 98) are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 118 and 119.
Further, similarly to FIGS. 94, 97 to 98, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower portion on the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided in the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Both the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, it is assumed that they are transparent as an example. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83), respectively. In FIG. 116, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.
In this example, the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing counterfeiting.
Since the configuration of the seal portion 1560, which is a processed seal, is the same as that in FIGS. 97 and 116, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Except for the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the entry area 1570 (white background), the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 should be confirmed through the transparent material. Can be done.
In the main board case 200, the main control board 50 can be visually recognized via the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the main control board 50 via the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not the fraud is performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached to the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 at a position visible from all angles. ing.
Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the entire seal portion 1560 including the entry area 1570, the cord portion 1572, and the information display unit 1573 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles. It is provided so that it is in a position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 is always visible through the main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
The seal unit 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal unit 1560, including the entry area 1570, the code unit 1572, and the information display unit 1573, does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 from all angles regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent unit and the non-transmissive unit. It is provided so as to be.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200.

In FIG. 119, it cannot be said that the seal unit 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, but the seal unit 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 Is sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, and if all the conditions of the performance display monitor 600 in which the seal portion 1561 does not overlap are satisfied, even if the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other. good. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located at the position shown by the broken line in the upper part of the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 119.
At this time, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance at the same time.

Since the description content and the like of the seal portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 97, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502.
The seal portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 93 and 97, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the integrated main ROM 502 for controlling the game, the performance display monitor 600 for displaying the performance of the gaming machine, and other board components 595 different from these are mounted on the main control board 50. There is. A transparent seal member 1560 is attached to the main control board 50.
As a result, other board components 595 can be visually recognized via the transparent sealing portion 1560 and the main board case 200. Further, the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 can be directly visually recognized via the main board case 200.
By watermarking the transparent portion of the predetermined seal portion 1560 having the transparent portion and the plurality of non-transparent portions, which needs to be attached to the main substrate case 200, duplication of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented.
In addition, by attaching the seal part 1560 to the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 at a position that does not cover it, the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component without being affected by watermarking and multiple non-transparent parts, The visibility of the performance display monitor 600, which needs to be read accurately, can be reliably ensured.
For the board component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the status can be confirmed through watermarking from the gaps between multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (peeping part 1574). can. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent parts, the visibility of the board parts can be ensured by the transparent parts.
Further, in the non-transparent portion, predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as specifying the integrated main ROM 502 can be displayed. Different information can be displayed or entered in each of the plurality of non-transparent parts.

Further, when the main control board 50 is separately provided with the setting display monitor 650, the seal portion 1560 can be attached to the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 at a position where they are not covered with each other. It is possible to reliably secure the visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component without being affected by a certain non-transparent portion, the performance display monitor 600 that needs to be read accurately, and the setting display monitor 650.
For the board component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502, performance display monitor 600, and setting display monitor 650, it is in a state through watermarking from the gaps between multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (peeping part 1574). Can be confirmed. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent parts, the visibility of the board parts can be ensured by the transparent parts.

The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 50 instead of the upper end side. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are arranged on the (opposite) upper end side opposite to the performance display monitor 600.
The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 50. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are arranged at the (contradictory) ends opposite to the performance display monitor 600.
Further, as described above, the performance display monitor 600 may be arranged inside the main control board 50 instead of the end portion. Even in that case, be sure to arrange it at a position where it does not overlap with the cable, harness, seal portion 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771 to 776.
In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 680 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RWM clear switch 680 may be provided on the payout control board 60.
Further, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 660 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this.
If the setting key switch 660 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, it can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 50.
The RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 may be shared with each other.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when the RWM is cleared.
In the following description, the configurations of the performance display unit and the setting display unit shall be based on the configurations shown in FIGS. 115 (b) and 115 (c).
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When clearing the RWM, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned off and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31 is displayed, for example, "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
When the RWM clearing process is completed, in (3), the image display device 31 is displayed with a message such as "RWM clearing is completed" to notify that the RWM clearing is completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (4), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values as described in FIG. 115 (b). In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when the setting is changed when the gaming machine includes a performance display unit that also serves as a setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31 is displayed, for example, "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

In (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed in, for example, the leftmost seg of the four-digit segs of the performance display monitor 600, but other segs may be used. Regardless of which digit is displayed, the set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31. Further, the voice output device 34 outputs a voice for notifying that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed". The frame lamp 101 or the panel lamp 100 may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being changed.

When the setter operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the performance display monitor 600 displays the setting value for each change operation in (4). The change operation can be performed many times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed one step at a time for each operation.
As described above, with the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the number increases by one step from "1" to "2", and when the setting "6" is reached, it reaches "1". return. During the change operation, the dots are not displayed along with the set values.
During that time, the image display device 31 continues to display such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31. The voice notifying that the setting is being changed is also continuously output from the voice output device 34. The light emission of the frame lamp 101 and the board lamp 100 continues.
The history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to an operation using the cross key 6f, the effect button 6a, or the like during the setting change.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, in (5), the set value is confirmed by the value currently displayed by the performance display monitor 600. The performance display monitor 600 displays one of the set values with dots.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being changed may be continued or may be terminated. Image display device 31 and voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being changed. You may go with.

After that, in (6), the image display device 31 is displayed with a display such as "RWM clearing is completed" to notify that the RWM clearing is completed.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "RWM clear has been completed" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that the RWM clear has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (7), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display unit, and the setting display unit when the setting is changed when the gaming machine separately includes the performance display unit and the setting display unit.
The open detection switch 105 is ON, which is a major premise.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31 is displayed, for example, "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

In (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101 or the panel lamp 100 may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being changed.
The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

When the setter operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the setting display monitor 650 displays the setting value for each change operation in (4). The change operation can be performed as many times as necessary until the setting change is completed, and the set value is changed one step at a time for each operation.
As described above, with the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the number increases by one step from "1" to "2", and when the setting "6" is reached, it reaches "1". return. During the change operation, the dots are not displayed along with the set values.
During that time, the image display device 31 continues to display such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
The history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to an operation using the cross key 6f, the effect button 6a, or the like during the setting change.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting change is completed, and in (5), the setting value is confirmed by the value currently displayed by the setting display monitor 650. After that, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being changed may be continued or may be terminated. Image display device 31 and voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being changed. You may go with.
After that, in (6), the image display device 31 is displayed with a message such as "RWM clearing is completed" to notify that the RWM clearing is completed.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "RWM clear has been completed" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that the RWM clear has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (7), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine includes a performance display unit that also serves as a setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31 is displayed, for example, "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

In (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed in, for example, the leftmost seg of the four-digit segs of the performance display monitor 600, but other segs may be used. Regardless of which digit is displayed, the set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, a voice is output to notify that the setting is being confirmed, such as "Setting is being confirmed". The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31. The frame lamp 101 or the board lamp 100 may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being confirmed.
The history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to an operation using the cross key 6f, the effect button 6a, or the like during the setting confirmation.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the above voice or display ends.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed may be continued or may be terminated. The image display device 31 and the voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed. You may go with.
After that, in (4), the image display device 31 is displayed with a display such as "power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, the voice output device 34 may output a voice such as "The power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (5), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display unit, and the setting display unit at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine separately includes the performance display unit and the setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31 is displayed, for example, "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

In (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, a voice notifying that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", is output from the voice output device 34.
The frame lamp 101 or the board lamp 100 may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being confirmed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
The history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to an operation using the cross key 6f, the effect button 6a, or the like during the setting confirmation.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the above voice or display ends. The setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed may be continued or may be terminated. The image display device 31 and the voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed, instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed. You may go.
After that, in (4), the image display device 31 is displayed with a display such as "power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "power has been restored" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (5), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

(Technical Features of the Invention Corresponding to the Above Embodiment)
The first configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal comprises a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency and a plurality of non-transmissive portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The processed seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the translucent portion and the substrate between the plurality of non-transmissive portions are attached. The other board components can be visually recognized through the case, the main control unit can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the board case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

A second configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a plurality of non-transmissive portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display unit, and the other translucent portion is interposed between the translucent portions and the substrate case. The board component is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

A third configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) that has been subjected to watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency. The processed seal has a plurality of non-translucent portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit and the information display unit on the substrate case. The main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIG. 115, FIG. 115). FIG. 116).

A fourth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case) for accommodating a transparent portion (main substrate case) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing are provided. It has a plurality of non-translucent portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency, and the processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

A fifth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion (non-transmissive portion 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and the other substrate components are attached via the translucent portion and the substrate case. It is visible, the main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

A sixth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion (non-transmissive portion 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. However, the processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the substrate case is visible. The information display unit can be visually recognized via the above (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ The seventh configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) that has been subjected to watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency. The processed seal has a non-translucent portion (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit, the information display unit, and the information display unit on the substrate case. The main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116). ).

The eighth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) that has been subjected to watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency. The processed seal is affixed to the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display unit, and has a non-transmissive portion (non-transmissive portion 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

A ninth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal is a main control unit on the substrate case. The other board components can be visually recognized via the translucent section and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and are attached to the information display section at a position not overlapping with the information display section. The main control unit is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

A tenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal is the information display unit on the substrate case. The other board components can be visually recognized via the transmissive section and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display section can be visually recognized via the board case. It is characterized in that there is (FIG. 115, FIG. 116).

The eleventh configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. It has a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (entry area 1570 on a white background) that can be entered by an administrator. A seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the seal is attached to the main control unit via the substrate case. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible (FIGS. 115 and 116).

A twelfth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. It has a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (entry area 1570 on a white background) that can be entered by an administrator. A seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. It is characterized (FIG. 115, FIG. 116).

A thirteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an entry field (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal is provided with the main control unit and the main control unit on the substrate case. It is affixed to a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other board components can be visually recognized via the translucent unit and the substrate case, and the main control unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. Yes, the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.
It is characterized in that (FIG. 115, FIG. 116).

A fourteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an entry field (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal overlaps the information display unit on the substrate case. The other board components are visible through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIG. FIG.). 115, FIG. 116).

A fifteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A seal having a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and an entry field (white background entry area 1570) in which an administrator can fill in. A machined seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and the main control unit is attached via the substrate case. It is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The sixteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A seal (main board case 200), a transparent portion having high translucency (translucent portion 1574), and an entry field (white background entry area 1570) in which an administrator can fill in. A processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ The seventeenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an information description unit (white background entry area 1570) on which predetermined information is written, and the seal is the main control on the substrate case. The other board components can be visually recognized via the translucent section and the substrate case, and the main control section can be seen via the substrate case. It is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The eighteenth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an information description unit (white background entry area 1570) on which predetermined information is written, and the seal displays the information on the substrate case. It is characterized in that it is affixed to a position that does not overlap with the portion, the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ The 19th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200), a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and an information description unit (entry area 1570 on a white background) in which predetermined information is recorded. The seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and the seal is attached to the main control unit and the information display unit via the substrate case. The control unit is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The twentieth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and an information description portion (entry area 1570 on a white background) on which predetermined information is recorded. The seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. (FIG. 115, FIG. 116).

The 21st configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a plurality of non-transmissive portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The processed seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the translucent portion between the plurality of non-transmissive portions and the translucent portion. The other board components can be visually recognized through the board case, the main control unit can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the board case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

The 22nd configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a plurality of non-transmissive portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The processed seal is affixed to the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other translucent portion is interposed between the translucent portions and the substrate case. The board component is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The 23rd configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) that has been subjected to watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency. The processed seal has a plurality of non-translucent portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit and the information display unit on the substrate case. The main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIG. 115, FIG. 115). FIG. 116).

A twelfth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) that has been subjected to watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency. It has a plurality of non-transmissive portions (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1571, 1573) having low translucency, and the processed seal is attached to the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ The 25th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion (non-transmissive portion 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and the other substrate components are attached via the translucent portion and the substrate case. It is visible, the main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ The 26th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. The processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion (non-transmissive portion 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. However, the processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the substrate case is visible. The information display unit can be visually recognized via the above (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The 27th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) that has been subjected to watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency. The processed seal has a non-translucent portion (non-transmissive portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit, the information display unit, and the information display unit on the substrate case. The main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116). ).

The 28th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200) and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) that has been subjected to watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal has a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency. The processed seal is affixed to the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display unit, and has a non-transmissive portion (non-transmissive portion 1570, 1572, 1573) having low translucency. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The 29th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal is a main control unit on the substrate case. The other board components can be visually recognized via the translucent section and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and are attached to the information display section at a position not overlapping with the information display section. The main control unit is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The thirtieth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal is the information display unit on the substrate case. The other board components can be visually recognized via the transmissive section and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display section can be visually recognized via the board case. It is characterized in that there is (FIG. 115, FIG. 116).

The 31st configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. It has a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (entry area 1570 on a white background) that can be entered by an administrator. A seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the seal is attached to the main control unit via the substrate case. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The 32nd configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. It has a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (entry area 1570 on a white background) that can be entered by an administrator. A seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. It is characterized (FIG. 115, FIG. 116).

The 33rd configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an entry field (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal is provided with the main control unit and the main control unit on the substrate case. It is affixed to a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other board components can be visually recognized via the translucent unit and the substrate case, and the main control unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

A thirty-fourth configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an entry field (white background entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal overlaps the information display unit on the substrate case. The other board components are visible through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIG. FIG.). 115, FIG. 116).

◆ The 35th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A seal having a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and an entry field (white background entry area 1570) in which an administrator can fill in. A machined seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and the main control unit is attached via the substrate case. It is visible, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ The 36th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A seal (main board case 200), a transparent portion having high translucency (translucent portion 1574), and an entry field (white background entry area 1570) in which an administrator can fill in. A processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

The 37th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an information description unit (information display unit 1573) on which predetermined information is written, and the seal is a main control unit on the substrate case. The other board components can be visually recognized through the translucent section and the substrate case, and the main control section can be visually recognized via the substrate case. It is possible, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

The 38th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This gaming machine has a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) that controls the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) that displays game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control board 50) on which components (plural electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the substrate, and a translucent portion (translucent portion) having high translucency. 1574), a seal (processed seal 1560) having an information description unit (information display unit 1573) on which predetermined information is written, and the seal is the information display unit on the substrate case. The other substrate components are visible through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display portion is visible through the substrate case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

The 39th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. It has a substrate case (main substrate case 200) for accommodating the above, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and an information description unit (information display unit 1573) in which predetermined information is written. A seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the seal is attached to the main control unit via the substrate case. The information display unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ The 40th configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine.
This game machine has a board (main control board 50) on which a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling the game, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and the board are mounted. A substrate case (main substrate case 200), a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) having high translucency, and a translucent information description unit (information display unit 1573) in which predetermined information is written. The seal (processed seal 1560) is provided, and the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. (FIG. 115, FIG. 116).

1 Pachinko machine 6a Effect button 16 Image display devices 17A to 17C Movable effect member 110 Main control board 130 Effect control board 130 m Effect control unit 140 Image control unit 150 Lamp control unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the establishment of the second starting condition.
The game state is the first game state, the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the execution of the special game, and the first game state without executing the special game from the first game state. It is possible to control the third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state.
It is provided with an effect control means capable of producing the possibility that the special game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition by using a plurality of types of notification effects.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of predetermined effects that are expected to be executed by the notification effect that can execute the special game.
When the first start condition is satisfied and the notification effect is executed in the second gaming state, and when the notification effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on whether the second start condition is satisfied and the notification effect is executed in the third game state.

Images